- All categories
Welcome to Wikbeauty
Main menu
-
SHOP All
-
Shop by Category
- Shop by Category
-
Body Contouring & Fat Reduction
-
Facial & Skin Rejuvenation
-
Recovery & Circulation Therapy
-
Bestsellers
Your cart
Product Comparison
Describe you product comparison grid
|
__ __ |
|
|---|---|
| Vendor |
Vendor - __ |
| SKU |
SKU - __ |
| Description |
Description - __ |
| Customizable title |
Customizable title - __ |
| Variant name |
Variant name - __ |
|
|
Compare products ( / )
Products
Products
Transform Every Treatment
From fat reduction to facial rejuvenation, our professional-grade equipment is built to elevate every service on your menu, giving clients real results and your business a competitive edge.
74 products
74 products
Sort by:
- Featured
- Most relevant
- Best selling
- Alphabetically, A-Z
- Alphabetically, Z-A
- Price, low to high
- Price, high to low
- Date, old to new
- Date, new to old
$2,299.00
Professional 10-in-1 80K Cavitation and Vacuum RF System
Multi-Technology Body Contouring with a Complete Treatment Kit
The 10-in-1 80K Cavitation Vacuum RF Machine is a multifunctional body-contouring platform developed for beauty salons, medical spas, aesthetic clinics and professional body-sculpting studios.
The system combines 80K ultrasonic cavitation, Vacuum RF, Multipolar RF, lipolaser plates and Inner Ball Roller vibration massage. Its comprehensive accessory kit includes seven professional handles, five massage heads, eight lipolaser plates and 29 vacuum cups.
Multiple technologies and applicator sizes allow trained practitioners to create customized programs for the abdomen, waist, thighs, upper arms, back, hips, legs and suitable face and neck areas.
Ten treatment functions | 80K cavitation | 29 vacuum cups | Three-year warranty
Five Core Technologies on One Professional Platform
80K Ultrasonic Cavitation
The 80K Cavitation Handle delivers ultrasonic energy to suitable body areas for professional non-invasive contour-refinement programs.
Common applications include:
-
Abdomen treatments
-
Waist and flank programs
-
Thigh treatments
-
Upper-arm programs
-
Hip and back treatments
-
General body-contouring services
Vacuum RF Therapy
The Vacuum RF function combines controlled suction with radiofrequency energy.
Common applications include:
-
Cellulite-appearance programs
-
Skin-firming support
-
Circulation-focused body care
-
Vacuum massage
-
Body-contour refinement
-
General aesthetic treatments
Multipolar RF
Multipolar RF delivers controlled thermal energy for professional skin-firming and texture-refinement programs.
Common applications include:
-
Loose-looking body skin
-
Skin-firming support
-
Texture-improvement programs
-
Abdomen and thigh treatments
-
Suitable facial protocols
-
General rejuvenation services
Lipolaser Plates
Eight lipolaser plates support professionally planned, multi-area body-contouring programs.
Common applications include:
-
Abdomen
-
Waist and flanks
-
Thighs
-
Upper arms
-
Back and hips
-
Simultaneous multi-area treatments
Inner Ball Roller Massage
The Inner Ball Roller provides controlled mechanical massage and vibration across selected body areas.
Common applications include:
-
Circulation-focused massage
-
Temporary water-retention support
-
Cellulite-appearance programs
-
Muscle relaxation
-
Post-treatment massage
-
General body wellness
The appropriate technology, applicator, energy setting, vacuum level and session duration should be selected according to the treatment area, client condition and professional protocol.
Select the Right Treatment Program for Each Client
The system supports customized body-contouring pathways using one or more treatment technologies.
Program 1: Abdomen and Waist Contouring
A body-focused program for suitable localized areas around the abdomen and waist.
Recommended technologies:
-
80K Cavitation
-
Vacuum RF
-
Multipolar RF
-
Lipolaser Plates
-
Inner Ball Roller
Recommended for:
-
Abdomen treatments
-
Waist-contour refinement
-
Flank programs
-
Professional body-sculpting services
Program 2: Thigh and Cellulite Appearance
A lower-body program designed for suitable inner- and outer-thigh concerns.
Recommended technologies:
-
Vacuum RF
-
Multipolar RF
-
Inner Ball Roller
-
80K Cavitation
-
Lipolaser Plates
Recommended for:
-
Inner thighs
-
Outer thighs
-
Cellulite-appearance programs
-
Lower-body contouring
Program 3: Arms, Back and Hips
A customizable program for smaller or contoured body areas.
Recommended technologies:
-
Suitable Cavitation Handle
-
Vacuum Cups
-
Multipolar RF
-
Lipolaser Plates
-
Roller Massage
Recommended for:
-
Upper arms
-
Upper and lower back
-
Bra-line areas
-
Hips and flanks
Program 4: Face and Neck Firming
A gentler professional program using only applicators and settings approved for facial and neck areas.
Recommended technologies:
-
Suitable small RF Handle
-
Appropriate Vacuum Cups
-
Gentle Roller Massage
-
Customized low-intensity settings
Recommended for:
-
Facial-contour refinement
-
Jawline treatments
-
Suitable neck areas
-
Professional skin-firming services
Complete Accessory Kit for Customized Treatments
The machine includes multiple handles, heads, plates and cups for different treatment areas.
| Accessory Category | Quantity | Recommended Application |
|---|---|---|
| Professional Treatment Handles | 7 | Cavitation, RF, Vacuum RF, Roller and additional functions |
| Massage Heads | 5 | Customized mechanical massage |
| Lipolaser Plates | 8 | Simultaneous multi-area body programs |
| Vacuum Cups | 29 | Different body, face and neck areas |
| Inner Ball Roller | 1 system | Massage and circulation-focused body care |
The range of applicators allows trained operators to select a suitable size and shape for each treatment zone.
New clients should begin with conservative energy, vacuum and temperature settings before the intensity is increased gradually.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
The system supports professional treatments across multiple body and facial zones.
Upper-Body Treatments
-
Upper arms
-
Upper back
-
Lower back
-
Bra-line areas
-
Waist
-
Flanks
Lower-Body Treatments
-
Abdomen
-
Hips
-
Buttocks
-
Inner thighs
-
Outer thighs
-
Legs
Face and Neck Treatments
-
Suitable cheek areas
-
Jawline
-
Lower face
-
Appropriate neck areas
-
Other professionally assessed facial zones
Professional Body and Facial Applications
The available treatments depend on the selected technology, handle, cup, plate, energy setting and professional protocol.
| Treatment Area | Applicable Technology | Intended Aesthetic Application |
|---|---|---|
| Abdomen | Cavitation, RF and Lipolaser | Body-contour refinement |
| Waist and flanks | Cavitation and Vacuum RF | Waist-contouring support |
| Thighs | Vacuum RF and Roller | Cellulite-appearance and texture care |
| Upper arms | Cavitation, RF or Lipolaser | Targeted body-care programs |
| Back | Vacuum RF and Lipolaser | Localized contour refinement |
| Hips and buttocks | RF and Roller | Firming and texture support |
| Face and jawline | Suitable RF and Vacuum Applicators | Facial-contour programs |
| Neck | Suitable RF Handle | Professional firming support |
Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete consultation should be performed before every treatment.
How a Professional Treatment Session Works
1. Client Consultation
The practitioner reviews the client’s health history, treatment goals, body composition, target areas and contraindications.
2. Technology and Applicator Selection
The appropriate treatment handles, massage heads, vacuum cups and lipolaser plates are selected according to the treatment plan.
3. Parameter Selection
The practitioner selects the cavitation energy, RF level, vacuum pressure, massage intensity and session duration according to client tolerance and professional protocol.
4. Multi-Technology Treatment
The selected technologies are applied in the appropriate sequence. A complete professional session generally lasts approximately 60–90 minutes.
5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After treatment, the areas are assessed and the client receives suitable hydration, activity and aftercare guidance.
Temporary redness, warmth, tenderness, bruising, tingling or sensitivity may occur, particularly after vacuum treatments.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The machine combines multiple contouring technologies with an extensive accessory kit for streamlined professional operation.
Key operating advantages include:
-
Ten integrated treatment functions
-
80K ultrasonic cavitation
-
Vacuum RF and Multipolar RF
-
Eight lipolaser plates
-
Inner Ball Roller massage
-
Seven professional handles
-
Five massage heads
-
Twenty-nine vacuum cups
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | 10-in-1 80K Cavitation Vacuum RF Machine |
| Product Type | Professional multifunctional body-contouring system |
| Primary Technologies | 80K Cavitation, Vacuum RF, Multipolar RF, Lipolaser and Roller Massage |
| Cavitation Frequency | 80KHz |
| Treatment Handles | Seven |
| Massage Heads | Five |
| Lipolaser Plates | Eight |
| Vacuum Cups | Twenty-nine |
| Treatment Duration | Approximately 60–90 minutes |
| Treatment Areas | Abdomen, waist, thighs, arms, back, hips, legs, face and neck |
| Control Interface | Professional touchscreen or digital control panel |
| Power Supply | 110V and 220V |
| Design | Professional wheeled trolley system |
| Safety Features | Automatic shut-off, temperature monitoring, overload protection and adjustable intensity |
| Warranty | Three-year parts warranty |
| Support | Professional training and customer assistance |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
What Is Included?
The package includes the main control system and a comprehensive selection of professional treatment accessories.
Standard Equipment
-
One 10-in-1 Cavitation Vacuum RF main unit
-
Seven professional treatment handles
-
One 80K Cavitation Handle
-
Vacuum RF treatment components
-
Multipolar RF Handles
-
Inner Ball Roller Handle
-
Five massage heads
-
Eight lipolaser plates
-
Twenty-nine vacuum cups
-
Handle and cup connection components
-
Lipolaser cables and accessories
-
Power cable
-
English user manual
-
Operating guidance
Documentation and Training
-
English operating manual
-
Remote professional training
-
Machine installation guidance
-
Treatment-handle setup
-
Cavitation operation
-
RF parameter selection
-
Vacuum-cup selection
-
Lipolaser-plate placement
-
Inner Ball Roller operation
-
Body and facial treatment protocols
-
Safety and contraindication instructions
-
Cleaning and maintenance guidance
-
Basic troubleshooting assistance
-
Training certificate after completion
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Professional training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Control-interface operation
-
Installation of all treatment handles
-
80K Cavitation operation
-
RF-energy adjustment
-
Vacuum-pressure selection
-
Selection of the 29 vacuum cups
-
Lipolaser-plate placement
-
Inner Ball Roller operation
-
Multi-technology treatment sequencing
-
Client consultation
-
Cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Safety procedures
-
Basic troubleshooting
A professional training certificate is provided after successful completion.
Three-Year Warranty
The 10-in-1 80K Cavitation Vacuum RF Machine is supported by a three-year parts warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered:
-
Main machine unit
-
Internal electronic components
-
Digital control interface
-
Cavitation-generation components
-
RF and vacuum components
-
Original treatment handles
-
Lipolaser plates
-
Handle and cable connections
-
Other eligible parts supplied with the machine
Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the support team will assist with:
-
Remote inspection and fault identification
-
Guided troubleshooting
-
Confirmation of the affected component
-
Warranty-eligibility review
-
Replacement-part assistance when covered
-
Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Damage caused by misuse
-
Incorrect handle, cup or plate operation
-
Unauthorized repairs or modifications
-
Incorrect voltage or electrical connection
-
Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance
-
Normal wear of cups, membranes and consumable items
-
Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual
-
Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization
The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service.
Full coverage remains subject to the official warranty policy.
Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional cavitation, RF, vacuum and lipolaser equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel.
A complete health assessment and contraindication review must be completed before treatment.
Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Metal implants in or near the treatment area
-
Active cancer
-
Active or suspected blood clots
-
Severe cardiovascular conditions
-
Severe varicose veins
-
Open wounds or active skin infections
-
Severe liver or kidney conditions
-
Uncontrolled diabetes
-
Bleeding disorders
-
Recent surgery
-
Reduced sensation
-
Uncontrolled medical conditions
-
Other contraindications listed in the operating manual
Cavitation must not be applied over the head, heart, breasts, kidneys, liver, reproductive organs, bone surfaces or other prohibited areas.
RF, vacuum and lipolaser settings must be adjusted according to the treatment area, skin condition and client tolerance.
This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain.
Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for:
-
Beauty salons
-
Professional spas
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Medical spas
-
Body-contouring studios
-
Wellness centers
-
Trained independent practitioners
-
Qualified aesthetic professionals
-
Businesses expanding their body-contouring services
This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use.
Why Choose the 10-in-1 80K Cavitation Vacuum RF Machine?
Combine Multiple Technologies
The system combines cavitation, Vacuum RF, Multipolar RF, lipolaser and Inner Ball Roller massage in one professional platform.
Access a Complete Treatment Kit
Seven handles, five massage heads, eight lipolaser plates and 29 vacuum cups support a wide range of professional protocols.
Treat Multiple Body Areas
The system supports treatments for the abdomen, waist, thighs, arms, back, hips, legs and suitable facial and neck areas.
Customize Every Session
Multiple technologies, applicator sizes and adjustable settings allow treatments to be adapted to client condition and professional objectives.
Protect Your Investment
The system includes a three-year parts warranty, CE and ISO certificates, professional training and customer support.
Frequently Asked Questions
What technologies are included?
The system combines 80K Ultrasonic Cavitation, Vacuum RF, Multipolar RF, lipolaser plates, Inner Ball Roller massage and additional integrated treatment functions.
What is 80K cavitation?
The 80K Cavitation Handle delivers ultrasonic energy for professionally planned body-contouring programs on suitable localized areas.
Why are 29 vacuum cups included?
Different body and facial areas require different cup sizes and shapes. The selection allows practitioners to choose an appropriate cup for each treatment zone.
How many lipolaser plates are included?
The system includes eight lipolaser plates for professionally planned multi-area treatments.
Which body areas can be treated?
Suitable areas include the abdomen, waist, flanks, thighs, upper arms, back, hips, buttocks, legs and selected face or neck areas.
How long does a treatment take?
A complete multi-technology session generally lasts approximately 60–90 minutes. The duration depends on the number of areas and technologies selected.
How many sessions are recommended?
The treatment course should be customized according to the client’s condition and objectives. Professional programs commonly include multiple sessions with appropriate intervals.
Is the treatment uncomfortable?
Client sensation varies by technology. Cavitation may produce an audible tone, RF creates warmth, vacuum produces suction and the Roller Handle provides mechanical massage.
Is there downtime?
Many suitable clients can resume normal activities shortly after treatment. Temporary redness, warmth, bruising, tenderness or sensitivity may occur.
Is professional training included?
Professional training covers all treatment handles, vacuum cups, lipolaser plates, technology sequencing, safety, cleaning and maintenance. A training certificate is provided.
What does the three-year warranty cover?
The three-year parts warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Consumables, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded.
Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included.
Add Multi-Technology Body Contouring to Your Business
The 10-in-1 80K Cavitation Vacuum RF Machine combines:
-
80K ultrasonic cavitation
-
Vacuum RF and Multipolar RF
-
Eight lipolaser plates
-
Seven handles, five massage heads and 29 vacuum cups
-
Three-year parts warranty and professional support
Contact Wikbeauty to order the machine or receive more information about its technologies, accessories and professional training.
Order Your 10-in-1 Cavitation Vacuum RF Machine and Request Pricing
Receives in 8 days.
$2,299.00
Professional 14 Tesla HI-EMT Body-Sculpting System
High-Power Electromagnetic Technology for Muscle Conditioning and Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty 14 Tesla EMSlim Machine is a professional non-invasive body-sculpting system developed for muscle conditioning, body contouring, and improved definition across multiple treatment areas.
High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic Technology delivers a maximum magnetic intensity of 14 Tesla, producing approximately 20,000 supramaximal muscle contractions during a 20–30-minute treatment session.
Available with two or four ergonomic applicators, the machine supports focused, bilateral, multi-area, and optional dual-client treatments. Its 12-inch intelligent touchscreen, adjustable energy controls, and combined air-and-water cooling system support continuous professional operation.
14 Tesla HI-EMT | Two- or four-handle options | Multi-area treatment | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Functions on One Platform
14 Tesla HI-EMT Muscle Stimulation
The system delivers high-intensity electromagnetic energy to targeted muscle groups, producing repeated involuntary contractions throughout the treatment program.
Common applications include:
-
Abdominal muscle conditioning
-
Buttock muscle stimulation
-
Thigh muscle conditioning
-
Upper-arm toning
-
Waistline definition
-
Professional fitness treatments
Multi-Area Body Contouring
The available two- or four-handle configuration supports different applicator-placement strategies according to the client’s anatomy and treatment objectives.
Common applications include:
-
Abdomen and waist treatments
-
Buttock and thigh programs
-
Upper-arm conditioning
-
Bilateral muscle stimulation
-
Single-area focused treatment
-
Customized multi-area programs
Optional Dual-Client Operation
The four-handle configuration can divide applicators between two appropriately screened clients.
Common benefits include:
-
Simultaneous two-client treatments
-
Flexible applicator allocation
-
Independent treatment planning
-
Improved clinic scheduling
-
High-volume professional operation
-
Customized client programs
Each client requires an individual consultation, screening, settings, applicator placement, documentation, and continuous monitoring.
Select the Right Program for Each Client
Abdominal-Conditioning Program
Uses suitable applicator placement to stimulate the abdominal muscles and support improved midsection definition.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdominal muscle conditioning
-
Core-area stimulation
-
Midsection definition
-
Waistline sculpting
-
General abdominal programs
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking improved abdominal tone
-
Fitness clients wanting additional muscle stimulation
-
Clients following healthy lifestyle programs
Buttock-Toning Program
Positions the applicators over suitable buttock muscle areas to support bilateral conditioning and shape-enhancement programs.
Recommended applications:
-
Buttock muscle stimulation
-
Toning and firmness support
-
Bilateral buttock treatments
-
Shape-enhancement programs
-
Lower-body conditioning
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking improved buttock tone
-
Clients combining treatment with exercise
-
Clients receiving lower-body programs
Thigh and Arm Program
Uses the available applicators sequentially or bilaterally across suitable thigh or upper-arm muscle groups.
Recommended applications:
-
Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning
-
Upper-arm muscle stimulation
-
Bilateral limb treatments
-
Arm and thigh definition
-
Multi-area muscle conditioning
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking improved arm or thigh tone
-
Fitness and body-contouring clients
-
Clients requiring several treatment areas
Maintenance Program
Provides periodic treatment after completion of the client’s initial EMSlim course.
Recommended applications:
-
Muscle-tone maintenance
-
Body-contour maintenance
-
Fitness-program support
-
Seasonal body-sculpting treatments
-
Continued core conditioning
Recommended for:
-
Returning EMSlim clients
-
Clients completing four to six initial sessions
-
Clients combining treatment with regular exercise
Adjustable Power and Treatment Settings
The Wikbeauty 14 Tesla EMSlim Machine allows practitioners to customize treatment according to the model configuration, body area, client tolerance, and professional protocol.
| Setting | Available Configuration | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| Technology | HI-EMT | Electromagnetic muscle stimulation |
| Maximum Magnetic Intensity | 14 Tesla | Professional high-power output |
| Treatment Handles | Two or four, model-dependent | Focused, bilateral, or multi-area treatment |
| Contractions per Session | Approximately 20,000 | Intensive muscle activation |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–30 minutes | Efficient treatment scheduling |
| Treatment Course | Four to six sessions | Structured body-sculpting program |
| Treatment Frequency | Commonly twice weekly | Progressive muscle conditioning |
| Cooling System | Air and water circulation | Supports continuous operation |
Energy should be increased progressively according to client comfort, muscle response, treatment objectives, and the supplied operating protocols.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Abdomen and Waistline
One or more applicators can be positioned over suitable abdominal and waist muscle groups for focused or combined midsection treatments.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Abdominal muscle activation
-
Core-area conditioning
-
Waistline definition
-
Improved abdominal tone
-
Multi-zone midsection treatment
Buttocks and Thighs
The applicators support focused or bilateral lower-body treatments across suitable muscle groups.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Buttock muscle stimulation
-
Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning
-
Bilateral lower-body treatments
-
Improved-looking definition
-
Lower-body sculpting
Upper Arms
Suitable applicator placement supports focused or bilateral upper-arm conditioning.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Upper-arm muscle stimulation
-
Biceps conditioning
-
Triceps conditioning
-
Bilateral arm treatments
-
Improved-looking arm definition
Professional Treatment Applications
| Treatment Area | Primary Objective | Recommended Configuration |
|---|---|---|
| Abdomen | Muscle conditioning and midsection definition | One or two handles |
| Waistline | Contouring and core-area stimulation | Targeted or combined placement |
| Buttocks | Toning and shape-enhancement support | Bilateral handle placement |
| Inner Thighs | Lower-body conditioning | Sequential or bilateral treatment |
| Outer Thighs | Thigh definition and muscle stimulation | Sequential or bilateral treatment |
| Upper Arms | Arm muscle stimulation and definition | Sequential or bilateral treatment |
| Multiple Areas | Comprehensive body-sculpting program | Four-handle model |
| Dual Clients | Simultaneous independent programs | Four-handle configuration |
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, fitness level, target areas, body-sculpting objectives, previous procedures, and possible contraindications. Explain the treatment sensation and establish realistic expectations.
Step 2: Applicator Placement
Select the treatment areas and position the applicators securely over suitable muscle groups. Correct placement is essential for balanced muscle stimulation.
Step 3: Treatment Preparation
Choose the appropriate treatment program and begin with a conservative energy level. Increase the intensity gradually according to the client’s comfort and muscle response.
Step 4: HI-EMT Treatment
The system delivers electromagnetic energy for approximately 20–30 minutes. Monitor the client’s comfort, muscle response, and applicator position throughout the session.
Step 5: Treatment Completion
Stop the program, remove the applicators, inspect the treatment areas, document the selected settings, and provide suitable hydration, recovery, or lifestyle recommendations.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Wikbeauty 14 Tesla EMSlim Machine combines high-power electromagnetic technology with flexible handle configurations and professional controls.
Key advantages include:
-
Professional 14 Tesla HI-EMT technology
-
Choice of two or four ergonomic applicators
-
Approximately 20,000 contractions per session
-
Focused, bilateral, and multi-area treatments
-
Optional dual-client operation
-
Treatments for the abdomen, arms, thighs, buttocks, and waistline
-
Adjustable energy intensity
-
12-inch intelligent touchscreen
-
Air-and-water circulation cooling
-
Approximately 20–30-minute sessions
-
Four- to six-session treatment programs
-
110V and 220V compatibility
-
CE and ISO certificates
-
Three-year professional warranty
-
Professional training and ongoing support
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty 14 Tesla EMSlim Machine |
| Technology | High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic Technology |
| Maximum Magnetic Intensity | 14 Tesla |
| Treatment Handles | Two or four ergonomic applicators, model-dependent |
| Contractions per Session | Approximately 20,000 |
| Primary Functions | Muscle conditioning, body contouring, and fat-reduction support |
| Supplied Performance Figures | Up to 15–20% muscle growth and 20–25% fat reduction |
| Treatment Areas | Abdomen, arms, thighs, buttocks, and waistline |
| Treatment Configuration | Focused, bilateral, multi-area, or optional dual-client |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–30 minutes |
| Recommended Course | Four to six sessions |
| Recommended Frequency | Commonly twice weekly |
| Energy Intensity | Adjustable |
| Cooling System | Air and water circulation |
| Display | 12-inch intelligent touchscreen |
| Power Supply | 110V or 220V |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
| Warranty | Three-year professional warranty |
| Support | Professional training and ongoing technical assistance |
Performance figures are supplied product claims and should not be presented as guaranteed outcomes. Individual results vary.
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty 14 Tesla EMSlim main unit
-
2 or 4 × Ergonomic HI-EMT treatment applicators
-
Applicator connection cables
-
Applicator-positioning accessories
-
12-inch intelligent touchscreen control system
-
Adjustable energy controls
-
Air-and-water circulation cooling system
-
1 × Region-compatible power cable
-
Standard machine accessories
-
Warranty card
The selected two- or four-handle configuration should be confirmed when placing the order.
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Installation and operating guide
-
Safety and maintenance instructions
-
Professional video training
-
Applicator-placement guidance
-
Energy-adjustment guidance
-
Abdominal treatment protocols
-
Waistline treatment protocols
-
Arm-treatment protocols
-
Buttock-treatment protocols
-
Thigh-treatment protocols
-
Multi-area and dual-client guidance
-
Client-consultation materials
-
Post-treatment guidance
-
Professional training certificate
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty 14 Tesla EMSlim Machine includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use the system safely and consistently.
Training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen operation
-
Client consultation and screening
-
Treatment-area assessment
-
Correct applicator placement
-
Two- and four-handle configurations
-
Multi-area treatment planning
-
Optional dual-client operation
-
Energy-level adjustment
-
Abdominal and waistline protocols
-
Arm-treatment protocols
-
Buttock-treatment protocols
-
Thigh-treatment protocols
-
Client monitoring
-
Post-treatment guidance
-
Cooling-system maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty 14 Tesla EMSlim Machine includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period.
Applicator covers, straps, cables, connectors, cooling-system fluids, and other components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement.
Technical Support Process
-
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team.
-
Provide the machine model and order information.
-
Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested.
-
A technician will assess the reported issue remotely.
-
Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged.
-
Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable accessories, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper cooling-system maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual.
Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation and health-history review should be completed before every treatment. The machine should only be operated by appropriately trained professionals.
Treatment may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Metal implants within or near the treatment area
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Cardiac rhythm disorders
-
Epilepsy or seizure disorders
-
Active muscle injury
-
Severe inflammation
-
Open wounds within the treatment area
-
Recent surgery within the treatment area
-
Serious neurological or muscular conditions
-
Reduced or impaired sensation
-
Medical conditions requiring physician supervision
Clients with recent surgery should receive appropriate professional or medical clearance before treatment.
Do not position applicators over the head, neck, chest, heart, spine, reproductive organs, bones, joints, or other prohibited areas identified in the operating manual.
Operating Precautions
-
Inspect the machine, applicators, cables, straps, and accessories before use.
-
Check the air-and-water cooling system before operation.
-
Complete a separate consultation for every client.
-
Remove metal objects from each treatment area.
-
Confirm correct applicator placement before activation.
-
Secure all handles according to the supplied instructions.
-
Begin with a conservative energy level.
-
Increase intensity progressively according to client comfort.
-
Monitor muscle response and client condition throughout treatment.
-
Continuously monitor both clients during dual-client operation.
-
Do not position applicators over prohibited anatomical areas.
-
Record treatment areas, duration, and energy settings.
-
Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client.
-
Follow the supplied maintenance schedule.
-
Stop treatment if unexpected pain or discomfort occurs.
Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty 14 Tesla EMSlim Machine is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in:
-
Slimming clinics
-
Body-contouring centers
-
Medical spas
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Fitness centers
-
Gyms
-
Physiotherapy facilities
-
Wellness centers
Operators should review applicable local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, staffing, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering HI-EMT or dual-client treatments.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty 14 Tesla EMSlim Machine?
14 Tesla Magnetic Intensity
The machine provides a listed maximum magnetic output of 14 Tesla for professional electromagnetic muscle-stimulation programs.
Flexible Applicator Options
Two- and four-handle configurations support focused, bilateral, multi-area, and optional dual-client treatments.
Multiple Body Areas
One system supports customized programs for the abdomen, arms, thighs, buttocks, and waistline.
Professional Cooling and Controls
The 12-inch intelligent touchscreen and combined air-and-water cooling system support continuous professional operation.
Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating training, applicator-placement guidance, treatment protocols, CE and ISO certificates, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty 14 Tesla EMSlim Machine?
It is a professional HI-EMT system developed for electromagnetic muscle stimulation, body conditioning, and body-contouring programs.
What does 14 Tesla mean?
Tesla is a unit used to describe magnetic-field strength. The machine’s supplied maximum magnetic intensity is 14 Tesla.
Does a higher Tesla rating guarantee better results?
No. Treatment outcomes also depend on applicator design, positioning, pulse parameters, selected settings, treatment consistency, and individual response.
How many applicators are included?
The machine is available with two or four ergonomic applicators, depending on the selected model.
Which handle configuration should I choose?
A two-handle configuration is suitable for focused or bilateral treatments. A four-handle configuration supports greater multi-area flexibility and optional dual-client operation.
Can two clients be treated simultaneously?
Yes, with the suitable four-handle configuration. Each client requires separate screening, settings, applicator placement, documentation, and continuous monitoring.
Which areas can be treated?
Common treatment areas include the abdomen, upper arms, thighs, buttocks, and waistline.
How long does one session take?
A standard treatment takes approximately 20–30 minutes.
How many sessions are recommended?
We recommends four to six sessions, commonly scheduled twice weekly with appropriate recovery time between treatments.
What does the treatment feel like?
Clients experience strong, repeated muscle contractions. Energy should be increased progressively according to individual comfort and muscle response.
Is there downtime?
Clients can generally continue normal daily activities after treatment. Temporary muscle fatigue or soreness similar to that experienced after exercise may occur.
Can HI-EMT replace regular exercise?
HI-EMT treatments should complement rather than replace regular exercise, balanced nutrition, and healthy lifestyle habits.
When may clients notice changes?
Some clients may notice increased muscle activation during the initial sessions. Visible changes vary and may develop progressively during and after the treatment course.
What performance figures are supplied?
Muscle-growth figures of 15–20% and fat-reduction figures of 20–25%. These figures are not guaranteed outcomes.
How long can results last?
A possible duration of six to twelve months with maintenance and healthy lifestyle habits. Individual longevity varies.
Are results guaranteed?
No. Results vary according to baseline muscle condition, body composition, treatment consistency, applicator placement, settings, diet, exercise, and individual response.
What cooling system does the machine use?
The system uses combined air-and-water circulation cooling to support continuous professional operation.
What certificates are included?
The machine includes CE and ISO certificates.
What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues.
Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers machine operation, client screening, applicator placement, energy adjustment, two- and four-handle configurations, dual-client protocols, cooling-system maintenance, safety, and troubleshooting.
Add 14 Tesla HI-EMT Body Sculpting to Your Business
The Wikbeauty 14 Tesla EMSlim Machine enables slimming clinics, fitness centers, medical spas, and body-contouring professionals to provide focused or multi-area electromagnetic muscle-conditioning treatments.
Five key benefits:
-
Professional HI-EMT technology with a listed 14 Tesla maximum output
-
Flexible two- or four-handle configurations
-
Approximately 20,000 contractions per session
-
A 12-inch touchscreen with air-and-water cooling
-
CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for model selection, product pricing, package details, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Receives in 8 days.
Professional 15-in-1 Hydra Facial and Skin-Care System
Fifteen Treatment Technologies for Professional Facial Rejuvenation
The WikBeauty 15-in-1 Hydra Beauty Skin System is a multifunctional facial platform developed for beauty salons, professional spas, aesthetic clinics and skin-care studios.
The system combines 15 treatment technologies for deep cleansing, exfoliation, hydration, product infusion, skin firming, acne-care support, pore refinement, brightening and facial rejuvenation.
Its 500W maximum power, 14-inch touchscreen, adjustable vacuum pressure and intelligent software controls provide treatment flexibility for different skin concerns and professional facial protocols.
Fifteen treatment technologies | 14-inch touchscreen | Adjustable vacuum control | Three-year warranty
Fifteen Treatment Technologies on One Professional Platform
Hydro Dermabrasion
Hydro dermabrasion combines controlled suction, liquid flow and treatment solutions for professional cleansing and exfoliation.
Common applications include:
-
Deep facial cleansing
-
Surface exfoliation
-
Oil and debris removal
-
Skin hydration
-
Pore-care treatments
-
General facial rejuvenation
Bubble Pen
The Bubble Pen is designed for purifying and cleansing-focused skin-care protocols.
Common applications include:
-
Surface cleansing
-
Congested-looking skin
-
Oily-skin programs
-
Pore-care treatments
-
Facial preparation
-
General skin refinement
Bio RF Handle
The Bio RF handle delivers controlled radiofrequency energy for professional firming and rejuvenation programs.
Common applications include:
-
Skin-firming support
-
Fine-line appearance
-
Facial rejuvenation
-
Elasticity-focused treatments
-
Mature-skin programs
-
General anti-aging services
Three-Pole Bio-Electric Handle
The three-pole bio-electric handle provides controlled stimulation for suitable facial treatment programs.
Common applications include:
-
Facial-toning support
-
Skin-conditioning programs
-
Mature-looking skin
-
General rejuvenation
-
Professional facial services
-
Customized beauty protocols
Water Oxygen Spray
The Water Oxygen Spray provides a fine liquid mist for hydration and skin-care product application.
Common applications include:
-
Skin hydration
-
Cooling and refreshing
-
Facial solution application
-
Post-cleansing care
-
Dull-looking skin
-
General facial wellness
PDT Handle
The PDT handle uses selected LED light programs for professional skin-care applications.
Common applications include:
-
Anti-aging programs
-
Acne-prone skin care
-
Brightening treatments
-
Calming protocols
-
General skin rejuvenation
-
Post-facial support
High-Frequency Handle
The high-frequency handle is designed for suitable professional skin-care and acne-focused protocols.
Common applications include:
-
Oily-skin programs
-
Acne-prone skin care
-
Post-extraction support
-
Clarifying treatments
-
Facial skin conditioning
-
General spa services
Ultrasonic Skin Scrubber
The ultrasonic scrubber supports professional surface cleansing and exfoliation.
Common applications include:
-
Surface exfoliation
-
Pore cleansing
-
Removal of loosened debris
-
Skin-care preparation
-
Texture-refinement programs
-
General facial cleansing
Facial Ultrasound
The Facial Ultrasound handle supports professional facial massage and cosmetic-product application.
Common applications include:
-
Facial massage
-
Product-application support
-
General rejuvenation
-
Skin-conditioning programs
-
Hydration treatments
-
Professional facial packages
Eye Ultrasound
The Eye Ultrasound handle is designed for appropriate professional treatments around suitable eye-area zones.
Common applications include:
-
Under-eye skin care
-
Eye-area massage
-
Puffiness-focused programs
-
Fine-line appearance
-
Product-application support
-
Delicate-area facial treatments
Exfoliation Handle
The exfoliation handle provides controlled surface polishing for professional skin-refinement services.
Common applications include:
-
Gentle exfoliation
-
Uneven-looking texture
-
Surface skin polishing
-
Facial preparation
-
General skin refinement
-
Brightening programs
Microneedling Pen
The microneedling pen creates controlled microchannels for professional skin-remodeling programs.
Common applications include:
-
Uneven skin texture
-
Fine-line appearance
-
Acne-scar appearance
-
Collagen-remodeling programs
-
Professional rejuvenation
-
Customized facial treatments
Diamond Microdermabrasion
The diamond microdermabrasion handle provides controlled mechanical exfoliation using interchangeable diamond tips.
Common applications include:
-
Surface exfoliation
-
Rough-looking skin
-
Uneven-looking texture
-
Dull complexion
-
Skin-care preparation
-
Professional polishing treatments
Ice Hammer
The Ice Hammer provides controlled cooling for calming and post-treatment comfort.
Common applications include:
-
Cooling after facial treatments
-
Temporary redness
-
Skin-comfort programs
-
Pore-care finishing steps
-
Post-extraction support
-
Facial-treatment completion
WikBeauty Nutrient Solutions
The system supports compatible WikBeauty solutions for cleansing, moisturizing and revitalizing professional facial protocols.
Available solution functions include:
-
Purifying
-
Moisturizing
-
Revitalizing
-
Hydro dermabrasion support
-
Customized facial protocols
-
Professional maintenance care
The appropriate technology, settings, products and treatment duration should be selected according to the client’s skin condition, sensitivity and professional protocol.
Select the Right Facial Program for Each Client
The system supports customizable facial programs using one or more of its 15 technologies.
Program 1: Deep Cleansing and Pore Care
A cleansing-focused program for congested, oily or dull-looking skin.
Recommended technologies:
-
Hydro dermabrasion
-
Bubble Pen
-
Ultrasonic scrubber
-
High-frequency handle
-
Ice Hammer
Recommended for:
-
Congested-looking skin
-
Oily-skin programs
-
Pore-care treatments
-
General facial cleansing
Program 2: Hydration and Brightening
A moisture-focused program designed to support refreshed and radiant-looking skin.
Recommended technologies:
-
Hydro dermabrasion
-
Water Oxygen Spray
-
Facial Ultrasound
-
PDT Handle
-
WikBeauty nutrient solutions
Recommended for:
-
Dry-looking skin
-
Dull complexion
-
Skin-brightening services
-
Hydration-focused facials
Program 3: Anti-Aging and Firming
A rejuvenation program for mature-looking skin, fine lines and firmness concerns.
Recommended technologies:
-
Bio RF Handle
-
Three-Pole Bio-Electric Handle
-
Facial Ultrasound
-
Microneedling Pen
-
PDT Handle
Recommended for:
-
Mature-looking skin
-
Fine-line appearance
-
Skin-firming programs
-
Professional anti-aging services
Program 4: Texture and Skin Renewal
A customized program for uneven-looking texture, surface refinement and suitable scar concerns.
Recommended technologies:
-
Diamond Microdermabrasion
-
Exfoliation Handle
-
Microneedling Pen
-
Ultrasonic Scrubber
-
Ice Hammer
Recommended for:
-
Uneven-looking texture
-
Rough-looking skin
-
Acne-scar appearance
-
Professional renewal programs
Precision Vacuum Control for Customized Facial Treatments
The Hydra Beauty Skin System provides adjustable vacuum pressure from 0 to 100KPa. Each setting should be selected according to the treatment handle, skin condition, treatment area and client comfort.
| Vacuum Setting | Recommended Application |
|---|---|
| Lower Vacuum | Sensitive skin and delicate facial areas |
| Moderate Vacuum | General hydro dermabrasion and cleansing |
| Higher Vacuum | Appropriately selected congested or thicker skin areas |
| Customized Vacuum | Treatment-specific professional facial protocols |
The intelligent software control provides greater flexibility over suction strength, liquid flow and treatment comfort.
New clients should begin with lower vacuum and energy settings before treatment intensity is increased gradually.
Adjustable Facial Treatment Areas
The 15 treatment technologies support professional treatments for multiple facial and skin areas.
Full-Face Treatments
-
Forehead
-
Cheeks
-
Nose
-
Chin
-
Jawline
-
General facial skin
Delicate-Area Treatments
-
Suitable under-eye areas
-
Outer eye area
-
Upper cheeks
-
Lip-contour area
-
Other professionally assessed zones
Neck and Upper-Body Treatments
-
Neck
-
Décolletage
-
Upper chest
-
Suitable hand areas
-
Other appropriate skin zones
Professional Facial and Skin-Care Applications
The available treatments depend on the selected handle, products, vacuum pressure, energy settings and professional protocol.
| Skin Concern | Applicable Technology | Intended Skin-Care Application |
|---|---|---|
| Congested-looking skin | Hydro dermabrasion and scrubber | Deep-cleansing support |
| Dry or dehydrated-looking skin | Hydro dermabrasion and oxygen spray | Hydration-focused care |
| Fine-line appearance | RF, ultrasound or microneedling | Anti-aging support |
| Uneven-looking texture | Microdermabrasion or microneedling | Texture-refinement programs |
| Acne-prone skin | Bubble Pen, PDT or high frequency | Clarifying skin care |
| Dull-looking complexion | PDT, oxygen spray or solutions | Brightening programs |
| Eye-area concerns | Eye Ultrasound | Delicate-area skin care |
| Temporary post-treatment redness | Ice Hammer | Cooling and comfort support |
Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete skin consultation should be performed before every treatment.
How a Professional Facial Session Works
1. Client Consultation
The operator reviews the client’s skin concerns, treatment history, current products, sensitivities and contraindications. The appropriate facial program is then selected.
2. System Preparation
The required treatment handles, tips, bottles and nutrient solutions are installed according to the operating manual. The operator confirms that all connections are secure.
3. Parameter Selection
Vacuum pressure, RF energy, ultrasound settings, light mode, treatment duration and other available parameters are selected according to the client’s skin condition and professional protocol.
4. Facial Treatment
The operator performs the selected facial steps in the appropriate sequence. A complete professional session generally takes approximately 30–60 minutes.
5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After treatment, the skin is assessed and suitable moisturizer and sunscreen are applied where appropriate. The client receives customized aftercare instructions.
Temporary redness, dryness, sensitivity, tingling or mild swelling may occur, particularly after exfoliation or microneedling treatments.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The system combines 15 facial technologies with intelligent touchscreen controls for streamlined professional operation.
Key operating advantages include:
-
Fifteen professional treatment technologies
-
14-inch touchscreen control
-
Adjustable 0–100KPa vacuum
-
Intelligent suction software
-
Maximum 500W power
-
Multiple treatment handles
-
Four solution bottles
-
Modern floor-standing design
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | WikBeauty 15-in-1 Hydra Beauty Skin System |
| Product Type | Professional multifunctional facial system |
| Number of Technologies | 15 |
| Maximum Power | 500W |
| Display | 14-inch touchscreen |
| Vacuum Pressure | 0–100KPa adjustable |
| Vacuum Control | Intelligent software-controlled suction |
| Voltage Options | 110V and 220V |
| Electrical Frequency | 50Hz and 60Hz |
| Machine Dimensions | 42 × 52 × 98cm |
| Machine Weight | 40kg |
| Package Dimensions | 110 × 56 × 56cm |
| Package Weight | 45kg |
| Treatment Handles | 15 professional technologies |
| Solution Bottles | Four |
| Components | Imported parts from the USA, Germany and Japan |
| Warranty | 36-month main-machine warranty |
| Parts Warranty | 12 months |
| Support | Lifetime technical support |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
What Is Included?
The package includes the main control system, 15 treatment technologies and required operating accessories.
Standard Equipment
-
One 15-in-1 Hydra Beauty main unit
-
Hydro Dermabrasion handle
-
Bubble Pen
-
Bio RF Handle
-
Three-Pole Bio-Electric Handle
-
Water Oxygen Spray
-
PDT Handle
-
High-Frequency Handle
-
Ultrasonic Scrubber
-
Facial Ultrasound Handle
-
Eye Ultrasound Handle
-
Exfoliation Handle
-
Microneedling Pen
-
Diamond Microdermabrasion Handle
-
Ice Hammer
-
Four solution bottles
-
Compatible WikBeauty nutrient solutions
-
Power cable
-
English user manual
Documentation and Training
-
English operating manual
-
Personal Zoom or FaceTime training
-
Machine installation guidance
-
Treatment-handle setup instructions
-
Facial-protocol training
-
Vacuum and energy-setting guidance
-
Product and solution guidance
-
Safety and contraindication instructions
-
Cleaning and maintenance guidance
-
Professional training certificate
-
Basic troubleshooting assistance
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides personal professional training to help buyers understand:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen navigation
-
Operation of all 15 technologies
-
Treatment-handle installation
-
Hydro dermabrasion protocols
-
Vacuum-pressure adjustment
-
RF and ultrasound settings
-
PDT color selection
-
Microneedling operation
-
Client consultation
-
Facial-program creation
-
Cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Safety procedures
-
Basic troubleshooting
Personal training is available through Zoom or FaceTime.
A professional training certificate is provided after successful completion.
Lifetime technical support is included for machine-operation questions and troubleshooting assistance.
Three-Year Warranty
The WikBeauty 15-in-1 Hydra Beauty Skin System is supported by a 36-month main-machine warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered:
-
Main machine unit
-
Internal electronic components
-
14-inch touchscreen
-
Intelligent vacuum-control system
-
Internal pumps and control components
-
Other eligible main-machine components
Individual parts and treatment handles are covered by a 12-month parts warranty.
Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the Wikbeauty support team will assist with:
-
Remote inspection and fault identification
-
Guided troubleshooting
-
Confirmation of the affected component
-
Warranty-eligibility review
-
Replacement-part assistance when covered
-
Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Damage caused by misuse
-
Incorrect treatment-handle operation
-
Unauthorized repairs or modifications
-
Incorrect voltage or electrical connection
-
Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance
-
Normal wear of tips, filters and consumables
-
Damage caused by incompatible liquids or products
-
Blockages caused by incorrect cleaning
-
Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization
The original order details, machine serial number, images, unboxing video and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service.
Full coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy.
Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional facial equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel.
A complete skin consultation and contraindication assessment must be completed before treatment.
Treatment suitability depends on the selected technology. Some functions may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Active cancer
-
Active skin infections
-
Open wounds in the treatment area
-
Severe inflammatory skin conditions
-
Recent surgery
-
Recent injectable treatments
-
Photosensitivity or photosensitizing medication
-
Recent isotretinoin use
-
Bleeding disorders
-
A history of abnormal or keloid scarring
-
Reduced skin sensation
-
Other contraindications listed in the operating manual
Microneedling cartridges must be handled according to professional hygiene and infection-control requirements.
RF energy, ultrasound, vacuum pressure, light intensity and exfoliation strength must be selected according to the client’s skin condition and tolerance.
This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain.
Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for:
-
Beauty salons
-
Professional spas
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Medical spas
-
Skin-care studios
-
Estheticians
-
Facial specialists
-
Trained independent practitioners
-
Businesses expanding their facial services
This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use.
Why Choose the WikBeauty 15-in-1 Hydra Beauty System?
Access Fifteen Facial Technologies
One professional platform supports cleansing, exfoliation, hydration, infusion, RF, ultrasound, LED, microneedling and cooling treatments.
Create Customized Facial Programs
Practitioners can combine selected technologies to create cleansing, hydration, anti-aging, acne-care, brightening and texture-refinement packages.
Receive Professional Training
Personal Zoom or FaceTime training covers machine setup, all 15 technologies, treatment protocols, safety, cleaning and maintenance.
Build Professional Credibility
A complimentary professional training certificate is provided after successful completion and can be displayed in the treatment environment.
Protect Your Investment
The system includes a 36-month main-machine warranty, 12-month parts warranty, CE and ISO certificates and lifetime technical support.
Frequently Asked Questions
What technologies are included?
The system includes Hydro Dermabrasion, Bubble Pen, Bio RF, Three-Pole Bio-Electric, Water Oxygen Spray, PDT, High Frequency, Ultrasonic Scrubber, Facial Ultrasound, Eye Ultrasound, Exfoliation, Microneedling, Diamond Microdermabrasion, Ice Hammer and WikBeauty nutrient solutions.
How long does a professional facial take?
A typical session lasts approximately 30–60 minutes. Treatment duration depends on the selected technologies, skin concern and customized facial protocol.
Can treatments be customized?
Yes. Practitioners can combine suitable technologies to create cleansing, hydration, anti-aging, acne-care, brightening and texture-refinement programs.
Is professional training included?
Yes. Personal Zoom or FaceTime training covers machine setup, touchscreen operation, all 15 technologies, treatment protocols, cleaning, maintenance and safety.
Is a training certificate included?
Yes. A complimentary professional training certificate is provided after successful completion of the training program.
What is the adjustable vacuum range?
The Hydro Dermabrasion system provides adjustable vacuum pressure from 0 to 100KPa.
Which skin concerns can be addressed?
The available technologies support professional programs for congestion, dehydration, fine lines, uneven-looking texture, acne-prone skin, dullness, eye-area concerns and general facial rejuvenation.
Is the system suitable for sensitive skin?
Protocols can be customized using lower vacuum, energy and exfoliation settings. Every client still requires a professional skin assessment before treatment.
What does the warranty cover?
The main machine includes a 36-month warranty. Individual treatment handles and eligible parts include 12-month coverage, subject to the official warranty policy.
Is lifetime technical support included?
Yes. Lifetime technical support is included for operating questions, troubleshooting and equipment guidance.
Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included.
Add a Complete Hydra Facial System to Your Business
The WikBeauty 15-in-1 Hydra Beauty Skin System combines:
-
Fifteen professional treatment technologies
-
A 14-inch touchscreen and adjustable vacuum control
-
Personal professional training and certification
-
Customizable facial and skin-care programs
-
Three-year main-machine warranty and lifetime support
Contact Wikbeauty to order the system or receive more information about its treatment technologies, training program and package contents.
Order Your 15-in-1 Hydra Beauty Skin System and Request Pricing
Receives in 8 days.
$2,499.00
Professional 17-in-1 Facial Care System
Seventeen Technologies for Customized Facial and Skin-Care Treatments
The 17-in-1 Facial Care Machine is a multifunctional professional platform developed for beauty salons, medical spas, skin-care clinics, dermatology centers and beauty academies.
The system combines 17 facial technologies for cleansing, exfoliation, hydration, blackhead-removal support, skin firming, product application, acne-prone skin care and facial rejuvenation.
Its modern touchscreen, interchangeable treatment heads, adjustable professional settings and wheeled trolley design allow practitioners to create customized protocols for different skin types and concerns.
Seventeen facial technologies | Multiple treatment heads | Professional touchscreen | Three-year warranty
Seventeen Technologies on One Professional Platform
Skin Scrubber
The Skin Scrubber uses ultrasonic vibration to support surface cleansing and removal of loosened skin debris.
Common applications include:
-
Pore cleansing
-
Surface exfoliation
-
Oil and debris removal
-
Skin-care preparation
-
Oily-skin programs
-
General facial cleansing
Oxygen Bubble
The Oxygen Bubble function supports professional cleansing, refreshing and hydration-focused facial programs.
Common applications include:
-
Skin refreshing
-
Gentle surface cleansing
-
Hydration support
-
Dull-looking skin
-
Facial preparation
-
General skin conditioning
Bipolar RF
The Bipolar RF Handle delivers controlled radiofrequency energy for professional skin-firming programs.
Common applications include:
-
Skin-firming support
-
Fine-line appearance
-
Mature-looking skin
-
Facial rejuvenation
-
Elasticity-focused treatments
-
General anti-aging services
Bubble Cleaning
The Bubble Cleaning function provides a foaming facial-cleansing treatment for suitable skin types.
Common applications include:
-
Deep-cleansing programs
-
Congested-looking skin
-
Oily-skin care
-
Pore-care treatments
-
Facial preparation
-
General skin purification
High-Pressure Spray
The High-Pressure Spray Handle produces a fine liquid mist for hydration and cosmetic-solution application.
Common applications include:
-
Skin hydration
-
Cooling and refreshing
-
Facial-solution application
-
Dull-looking complexion
-
Post-cleansing care
-
General skin conditioning
Diamond Microdermabrasion
Diamond Microdermabrasion provides controlled mechanical exfoliation using interchangeable diamond tips.
Common applications include:
-
Surface skin polishing
-
Uneven-looking texture
-
Rough-looking skin
-
Dull complexion
-
Facial preparation
-
Professional exfoliation
Ultrasonic Therapy
The Ultrasonic Handle supports professional facial massage and cosmetic-product application.
Common applications include:
-
Product-application support
-
Facial massage
-
Hydration treatments
-
Skin-conditioning programs
-
General rejuvenation
-
Customized facial services
Plasma Technology
The Plasma Handle supports professionally planned skin-conditioning and rejuvenation protocols.
Common applications include:
-
General skin rejuvenation
-
Texture-refinement programs
-
Acne-prone skin care
-
Dull-looking complexion
-
Localized facial treatments
-
Customized professional services
Microcurrent V-Face
The Microcurrent V-Face Handle provides controlled electrical stimulation for suitable facial areas.
Common applications include:
-
Facial-toning support
-
Contour-refinement programs
-
Jawline treatments
-
Mature-looking skin
-
General facial conditioning
-
Professional firming services
Cold Hammer
The Cold Hammer provides controlled cooling for post-treatment comfort and calming protocols.
Common applications include:
-
Cooling after facial treatments
-
Temporary redness
-
Skin-comfort programs
-
Post-extraction support
-
Pore-care finishing steps
-
Facial-treatment completion
Electric Microneedle
The Electric Microneedle creates controlled microchannels for professional skin-remodeling programs.
Common applications include:
-
Uneven-looking texture
-
Fine-line appearance
-
Acne-scar appearance
-
Collagen-remodeling programs
-
Professional skin renewal
-
Customized rejuvenation
Blackhead Removal
The Blackhead Removal Handle provides targeted vacuum suction for suitable congested facial areas.
Common applications include:
-
Blackhead-removal support
-
T-zone cleansing
-
Pore-care treatments
-
Congested-looking skin
-
Localized vacuum treatments
-
Professional extraction protocols
LED Light Therapy
The LED Handle provides selectable light programs for different professional skin-care objectives.
Common applications include:
-
Anti-aging programs
-
Acne-prone skin care
-
Brightening treatments
-
Calming protocols
-
General facial rejuvenation
-
Post-treatment support
Photon Rejuvenation
The Photon function provides additional light-based skin-care programs for suitable facial concerns.
Common applications include:
-
Dull-looking complexion
-
General rejuvenation
-
Mature-looking skin
-
Brightening programs
-
Skin-conditioning treatments
-
Professional maintenance care
Electrospray
The Electrospray function supports professional application of compatible cosmetic liquids and serums.
Common applications include:
-
Hydration support
-
Cosmetic-solution application
-
Skin-conditioning programs
-
Post-cleansing care
-
Customized facial services
-
Maintenance treatments
Color Light Masks
The Color Light Mask function provides broad facial coverage using selected light modes.
Common applications include:
-
Full-face LED programs
-
Calming treatments
-
Brightening services
-
Acne-prone skin care
-
Anti-aging protocols
-
General facial wellness
Multi-Modality Integration
The system allows practitioners to combine suitable technologies in a structured treatment sequence.
Common applications include:
-
Customized facial programs
-
Multi-concern treatments
-
Deep-cleansing packages
-
Anti-aging services
-
Hydration and brightening programs
-
Complete professional facials
The appropriate technology, treatment head, settings, products and session duration should be selected according to the client’s skin condition, sensitivity and professional protocol.
Select the Right Facial Program for Each Client
The system supports customized treatment pathways using one or more of its 17 technologies.
Program 1: Deep Cleansing and Pore Care
A cleansing-focused program for suitable oily, congested or blackhead-prone skin.
Recommended technologies:
-
Skin Scrubber
-
Oxygen Bubble
-
Bubble Cleaning
-
Blackhead Removal
-
Cold Hammer
Recommended for:
-
Congested-looking skin
-
Oily-skin programs
-
Blackhead-removal support
-
Professional pore-care services
Program 2: Hydration and Brightening
A moisture-focused program designed to support refreshed and radiant-looking skin.
Recommended technologies:
-
Oxygen Bubble
-
High-Pressure Spray
-
Ultrasonic Therapy
-
Electrospray
-
LED Light Therapy
Recommended for:
-
Dry-looking skin
-
Dull complexion
-
Skin-brightening services
-
Hydration-focused facials
Program 3: Anti-Aging and Firming
A rejuvenation program for mature-looking skin, fine lines and facial-contour concerns.
Recommended technologies:
-
Bipolar RF
-
Microcurrent V-Face
-
Electric Microneedle
-
LED Light Therapy
-
Photon Rejuvenation
Recommended for:
-
Mature-looking skin
-
Fine-line appearance
-
Skin-firming programs
-
Professional anti-aging services
Program 4: Texture and Acne-Prone Skin Care
A customized program for uneven-looking texture and suitable acne-prone skin.
Recommended technologies:
-
Diamond Microdermabrasion
-
Skin Scrubber
-
Plasma Technology
-
Electric Microneedle
-
Color Light Mask
Recommended for:
-
Uneven-looking texture
-
Acne-prone skin
-
Acne-scar appearance
-
Professional skin-renewal programs
Adjustable Technology Settings for Customized Treatments
The 17-in-1 Facial Care Machine provides adjustable settings for its compatible treatment technologies.
| Treatment Setting | Recommended Application |
|---|---|
| Gentle Setting | Sensitive-looking skin and first-time clients |
| Standard Setting | General professional facial treatments |
| Advanced Setting | Appropriately selected intensive protocols |
| Customized Setting | Technology-specific programs based on professional assessment |
The adjustable controls give trained practitioners greater flexibility over vacuum pressure, RF energy, microcurrent intensity, light mode and treatment duration.
New clients should begin with conservative settings before treatment intensity is increased gradually.
Adjustable Facial Treatment Areas
The treatment handles support professional care across multiple facial and upper-body skin areas.
Full-Face Treatments
-
Forehead
-
Cheeks
-
Nose
-
Chin
-
Jawline
-
General facial skin
Delicate-Area Treatments
-
Suitable under-eye areas
-
Outer eye area
-
Upper cheeks
-
Lip-contour area
-
Other professionally assessed zones
Neck and Upper-Body Treatments
-
Neck
-
Décolletage
-
Upper chest
-
Suitable hand areas
-
Other appropriate skin zones
Professional Facial and Skin-Care Applications
The available treatments depend on the selected technology, treatment head, products, intensity and professional protocol.
| Skin Concern | Applicable Technology | Intended Skin-Care Application |
|---|---|---|
| Congested-looking skin | Scrubber, Bubble and Vacuum | Deep-cleansing support |
| Blackheads and visible pores | Blackhead Removal and Cold Hammer | Pore-care programs |
| Dry-looking skin | Oxygen, Spray and Electrospray | Hydration-focused care |
| Fine-line appearance | RF, Microcurrent or Microneedle | Anti-aging support |
| Acne-prone skin | Plasma, LED and High-Frequency protocols | Clarifying skin care |
| Dull-looking complexion | Photon, LED and Spray | Brightening programs |
| Uneven-looking texture | Diamond or Microneedle | Surface-refinement programs |
| Temporary post-treatment redness | Cold Hammer | Cooling and comfort support |
Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete skin consultation should be performed before every treatment.
How a Professional Facial Session Works
1. Client Consultation
The practitioner reviews the client’s skin concerns, treatment history, current products, sensitivity and contraindications. The appropriate technologies are then selected.
2. System Preparation
The required handles, tips, masks and cosmetic products are installed according to the operating manual. The practitioner confirms that all connections are secure.
3. Parameter Selection
RF energy, microcurrent intensity, vacuum level, light mode, microneedling depth and other available parameters are selected according to the client’s skin condition.
4. Facial Treatment
The practitioner performs the selected facial steps in the appropriate sequence. A complete professional session generally lasts approximately 60–90 minutes.
5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After treatment, the skin is assessed and suitable moisturizer and sunscreen are applied where appropriate. The client receives customized aftercare instructions.
Temporary redness, dryness, sensitivity, tingling or mild swelling may occur depending on the selected technologies.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The system combines 17 facial technologies with touchscreen controls and a mobile trolley design.
Key operating advantages include:
-
Seventeen professional treatment functions
-
Multiple interchangeable heads
-
Modern LCD touchscreen
-
Preset treatment programs
-
Adjustable technology settings
-
Face, neck and décolletage applications
-
Safety monitoring systems
-
Professional wheeled trolley design
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | 17-in-1 Facial Care Machine |
| Product Type | Professional multifunctional facial system |
| Number of Technologies | 17 |
| Primary Technologies | Cleansing, RF, microcurrent, ultrasound, plasma, microneedling, vacuum and LED |
| Treatment Heads | Multiple interchangeable professional heads |
| Skin Programs | Sensitive, normal, oily, combination, large-pore and blackhead-focused protocols |
| Display Interface | Modern LCD touchscreen |
| Session Duration | Approximately 60–90 minutes |
| Treatment Areas | Face, neck and décolletage |
| Power Supply | 110V and 220V |
| Design | Professional wheeled trolley |
| Safety Features | Automatic shut-off, temperature sensors, overload protection and adjustable intensity |
| Warranty | Three-year parts warranty |
| Support | Professional training and technical assistance |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
What Is Included?
The package includes the main control system, professional treatment heads and required operating accessories.
Standard Equipment
-
One 17-in-1 Facial Care main unit
-
Skin Scrubber
-
Oxygen Bubble components
-
Bipolar RF Handle
-
Bubble Cleaning Handle
-
High-Pressure Spray Gun
-
Diamond Microdermabrasion Handle and tips
-
Ultrasonic Therapy Handle
-
Plasma Treatment Handle
-
Microcurrent V-Face Handle
-
Cold Hammer
-
Electric Microneedling Pen
-
Blackhead-Removal Handle
-
LED Light Therapy Handle
-
Photon Rejuvenation components
-
Electrospray Handle
-
Color Light Mask
-
Required connection components
-
Power cable
-
English user manual
Documentation and Training
-
English operating manual
-
Remote professional training
-
Machine installation guidance
-
Treatment-handle setup
-
Technology-selection guidance
-
RF and microcurrent settings
-
Vacuum and ultrasound operation
-
Light-mode selection
-
Microneedling guidance
-
Customized facial protocols
-
Safety and contraindication instructions
-
Cleaning and maintenance guidance
-
Basic troubleshooting assistance
-
Training certificate after completion
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Professional training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen navigation
-
Operation of all 17 technologies
-
Treatment-handle installation
-
Client skin assessment
-
Treatment-program selection
-
RF and microcurrent adjustment
-
Ultrasound and plasma operation
-
Vacuum settings
-
LED and Photon programs
-
Microneedling operation
-
Cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Safety procedures
-
Basic troubleshooting
A professional training certificate is provided after successful completion.
Three-Year Warranty
The 17-in-1 Facial Care Machine is supported by a three-year parts warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered:
-
Main machine unit
-
Internal electronic components
-
LCD touchscreen
-
Internal pumps and control components
-
Original treatment handles
-
Light-therapy components
-
Handle-connection components
-
Other eligible parts supplied with the machine
Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the support team will assist with:
-
Remote inspection and fault identification
-
Guided troubleshooting
-
Confirmation of the affected component
-
Warranty-eligibility review
-
Replacement-part assistance when covered
-
Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Damage caused by misuse
-
Incorrect treatment-handle operation
-
Unauthorized repairs or modifications
-
Incorrect voltage or electrical connection
-
Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance
-
Normal wear of tips, needles, filters and consumables
-
Damage caused by incompatible products
-
Blockages caused by incorrect cleaning
-
Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization
The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service.
Full coverage remains subject to the official warranty policy.
Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional facial equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel.
A complete skin consultation and contraindication assessment must be completed before treatment.
Treatment suitability depends on the selected technology. Some functions may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Metal implants in the facial area
-
Active cancer
-
Active herpes simplex
-
Open wounds or active skin infections
-
Severe inflammatory acne
-
Severe sunburn
-
Recent surgery
-
Recent injectable treatments
-
Recent laser treatments or chemical peels
-
Photosensitivity or photosensitizing medication
-
Bleeding disorders
-
Poor wound healing
-
Reduced skin sensation
-
Other contraindications listed in the operating manual
Microneedling tips must be handled according to professional hygiene and infection-control requirements.
RF energy, microcurrent, ultrasound, plasma, vacuum, light intensity and microneedling depth must be selected according to the client’s skin condition and tolerance.
This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain.
Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for:
-
Beauty salons
-
Professional spas
-
Skin-care clinics
-
Medical spas
-
Dermatology centers
-
Beauty academies
-
Facial specialists
-
Estheticians
-
Trained independent practitioners
This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use.
Why Choose the 17-in-1 Facial Care Machine?
Access Seventeen Facial Technologies
One professional platform supports cleansing, exfoliation, hydration, RF, microcurrent, ultrasound, plasma, microneedling, vacuum and light therapy.
Create Customized Facial Programs
Practitioners can combine suitable technologies for deep cleansing, hydration, anti-aging, acne-care, brightening and texture-refinement services.
Treat Different Skin Types
Interchangeable heads and adjustable settings support customized protocols for sensitive, normal, oily, combination and large-pore skin.
Improve Professional Workflow
The touchscreen interface, preset programs and mobile trolley design support organized and efficient treatments.
Protect Your Investment
The system includes a three-year parts warranty, CE and ISO certificates, professional training and technical support.
Frequently Asked Questions
What technologies are included?
The system includes Skin Scrubbing, Oxygen Bubble, Bipolar RF, Bubble Cleaning, High-Pressure Spray, Diamond Microdermabrasion, Ultrasound, Plasma, Microcurrent V-Face, Cold Hammer, Electric Microneedling, Blackhead Removal, LED, Photon Rejuvenation, Electrospray, Color Light Masks and Multi-Modality Integration.
How long does a professional facial take?
A typical complete facial lasts approximately 60–90 minutes. The duration depends on the selected technologies and client concerns.
Can treatments be customized?
Yes. Practitioners can select and combine appropriate technologies according to the client’s skin type, sensitivity and treatment objectives.
Is the system suitable for sensitive skin?
Gentler heads and lower settings can be selected for some sensitive-skin clients. Every client still requires a professional assessment before treatment.
Can the system support acne and blackhead treatments?
The Skin Scrubber, Bubble Cleaning, Blackhead Removal and suitable LED or Plasma functions can be incorporated into professional clarifying and pore-care protocols.
What is the difference between RF and microcurrent?
RF delivers controlled thermal energy for skin-firming support. Microcurrent provides low-level electrical stimulation for professional facial-toning programs.
Is there downtime?
Recovery depends on the selected technologies and treatment intensity. Temporary redness, dryness, sensitivity or mild swelling may occur.
Is professional training included?
Professional training covers machine setup, all 17 technologies, treatment programs, safety, cleaning and maintenance. A training certificate is provided.
What does the three-year warranty cover?
The three-year parts warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Consumables, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded.
Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included.
Add Complete 17-in-1 Facial Care to Your Business
The 17-in-1 Facial Care Machine combines:
-
Seventeen professional treatment technologies
-
Multiple interchangeable treatment heads
-
A modern touchscreen and mobile trolley
-
Customizable facial and skin-care programs
-
Three-year parts warranty and professional support
Contact Wikbeauty to order the machine or receive more information about its treatment technologies, package contents and professional training.
Order Your 17-in-1 Facial Care Machine and Request Pricing
Receives in 8 days.
Answer a few quick questions and we'll recommend the right Lipo Laser setup for you.
$999.00
Professional Vibration Massage and Recovery System
Four Treatment Heads for Muscle Relaxation and Professional Wellness Programs
The Wikbeauty G8 Vibration Massage Machine is a professional percussion and oscillation therapy system developed for spas, wellness centers, gyms, recovery studios and physiotherapy clinics.
Its adjustable 5Hz–100Hz frequency range and customizable intensity settings allow trained operators to create different protocols for muscle relaxation, post-workout recovery, circulation support and general wellness.
Four treatment-head options allow the operator to select the size and treatment pattern that best match the target area and professional service.
Four treatment heads | 5Hz–100Hz adjustable frequency | Full-body applications | Three-year warranty
Four Treatment Heads on One Professional Platform
Small Treatment Head
The small treatment head is designed for precise applications and smaller muscle areas.
Its concentrated treatment pattern allows the operator to work accurately on localized areas requiring controlled vibration.
Common treatment areas include:
-
Forearms
-
Hands
-
Feet
-
Calves
-
Small shoulder areas
-
Localized muscle groups
Medium Treatment Head
The medium treatment head is designed for general massage and recovery treatments.
It provides balanced coverage for common muscle groups and medium-sized treatment areas.
Common treatment areas include:
-
Arms
-
Shoulders
-
Neck muscles
-
Lower legs
-
Upper back
-
General muscle groups
Large Treatment Head
The large treatment head provides broader coverage for larger muscle areas.
It is suitable for professional treatments requiring efficient vibration across wide treatment zones.
Common treatment areas include:
-
Back
-
Thighs
-
Gluteal muscles
-
Hamstrings
-
Quadriceps
-
Larger body areas
Flexible Treatment Head
The flexible treatment head is designed to adapt to body contours and areas requiring a more adaptable treatment surface.
Common treatment applications include:
-
Curved body areas
-
General relaxation
-
Broad muscle groups
-
Body-contour massage
-
Wellness treatments
-
Customized full-body protocols
The appropriate treatment head should be selected according to the target area, muscle condition, client comfort and professional protocol.
Select the Right Treatment Head for Each Service
The system supports four treatment heads. The appropriate option should be selected according to the size of the treatment area, required intensity and intended wellness application.
Option 1: Small Treatment Head
A precision-focused attachment for localized muscle groups and smaller treatment areas.
Recommended applications:
-
Localized muscle tension
-
Hands and feet
-
Calves and forearms
-
Precision recovery treatments
Recommended for:
-
Targeted wellness protocols
-
Smaller muscle areas
-
Detailed massage services
-
Localized vibration treatments
Option 2: Medium Treatment Head
A versatile attachment for general massage, relaxation and recovery programs.
Recommended applications:
-
Arms and shoulders
-
Upper-back treatments
-
Lower-leg treatments
-
General muscle relaxation
Recommended for:
-
Spa massage services
-
Wellness programs
-
General recovery treatments
-
Regular maintenance sessions
Option 3: Large Treatment Head
A broad-coverage attachment for larger muscle groups and body areas.
Recommended applications:
-
Back treatments
-
Thigh and leg treatments
-
Gluteal muscles
-
Athletic recovery programs
Recommended for:
-
Gyms and recovery centers
-
Sports-wellness businesses
-
Full-body massage services
-
High-volume professional treatments
Option 4: Flexible Treatment Head
An adaptable attachment for curved body areas and customized wellness protocols.
Recommended applications:
-
Contoured body areas
-
Broad relaxation treatments
-
Flexible full-body protocols
-
General massage services
Recommended for:
-
Professional spas
-
Wellness centers
-
Customized treatment programs
-
Businesses offering varied massage services
Adjustable Frequency for Customized Vibration Treatments
The G8 Vibration Massage Machine provides an adjustable frequency range from 5Hz to 100Hz. Each frequency and intensity setting should be selected according to the treatment area, client comfort and professional objective.
| Frequency Setting | Recommended Application |
|---|---|
| Lower Frequency | Gentle relaxation and comfort-focused treatments |
| Moderate Frequency | General muscle massage and wellness programs |
| Higher Frequency | Muscle stimulation and recovery-oriented treatments |
| Customized Frequency | Professional protocols for specific muscle groups |
The adjustable settings give trained operators greater control over treatment intensity and client comfort.
New clients should begin with a lower frequency and intensity before either setting is increased gradually.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Different treatment heads and frequency settings support different professional applications.
Upper-Body Treatments
-
Back
-
Shoulders
-
Arms
-
Forearms
-
Suitable neck muscles
-
Upper-body recovery programs
Lower-Body Treatments
-
Thighs
-
Hamstrings
-
Quadriceps
-
Calves
-
Gluteal muscles
-
Feet
Full-Body Wellness Treatments
-
General muscle relaxation
-
Post-workout recovery
-
Circulation support
-
Fatigue-relief programs
-
Stress-reduction services
-
Maintenance-oriented wellness sessions
Professional Recovery and Wellness Applications
The available treatments depend on the selected treatment head, frequency, intensity and professional protocol.
| Treatment Area | Applicable Treatment Head | Intended Wellness Application |
|---|---|---|
| Back | Large or flexible head | Broad muscle relaxation |
| Shoulders | Small or medium head | Localized tension support |
| Arms and forearms | Small or medium head | General massage and recovery |
| Thighs and legs | Medium or large head | Post-workout recovery |
| Calves | Small or medium head | Tired-muscle relaxation |
| Gluteal muscles | Large or flexible head | Broad recovery treatment |
| Hands and feet | Small head | Targeted relaxation |
| Full body | Multiple heads | Customized wellness program |
Treatment suitability and expected responses vary between clients. A complete consultation should be performed before every professional treatment.
How a Professional Session Works
1. Client Consultation
The operator reviews the client’s concerns, medical history, target muscle groups, comfort level and treatment goals. The appropriate treatment head, frequency and intensity are then selected.
2. System Preparation
The selected treatment head is installed according to the operating manual. The operator confirms that the attachment is secure before beginning the session.
3. Parameter Selection
Frequency, intensity, session duration and treatment pattern are selected according to the target area and professional protocol.
4. Treatment Application
The operator applies the treatment head to the selected muscle groups using light to moderate pressure and controlled movement. A typical session lasts approximately 15–20 minutes.
5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After treatment, the client receives suitable hydration, recovery and aftercare guidance.
Some clients may return to their normal activities shortly after treatment. Temporary tenderness, sensitivity, tingling or muscle fatigue may occur.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The machine combines digital controls with adjustable percussion and oscillation technology for streamlined use in professional settings.
Key operating advantages include:
-
Digital control display
-
Adjustable 5Hz–100Hz frequency range
-
Customizable intensity settings
-
Four treatment-head options
-
Percussion and oscillation technology
-
Full-body treatment capability
-
Quiet operation below 70dB
-
Lightweight and portable design
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty G8 Vibration Massage Machine |
| Product Type | Professional vibration massage and recovery system |
| Technology | Percussion and oscillation vibration therapy |
| Frequency Range | 5Hz–100Hz adjustable |
| Power Output | 50W–150W |
| Treatment Heads | Small, medium, large and flexible |
| Session Duration | Approximately 15–20 minutes |
| Treatment Areas | Back, legs, arms, shoulders, neck muscles, feet and other suitable muscle groups |
| Control Interface | Digital frequency and intensity controls |
| Noise Level | Less than 70dB |
| Safety Features | Automatic shut-off, temperature control, intensity limits and overload protection |
| Power Supply | 110V–240V |
| Portability | Lightweight design with cordless option available |
| Warranty | Three-year parts and labor warranty |
| Support | Professional training and lifetime technical support |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
What Is Included?
The package includes the main control system, four treatment heads and the required operating accessories.
Standard Equipment
-
One G8 Vibration Massage Machine
-
One small treatment head
-
One medium treatment head
-
One large treatment head
-
One flexible treatment head
-
Treatment-head connection components
-
Power cable
-
Rechargeable battery where included with the selected model
-
English user manual
-
Operating guidance
Documentation and Training
-
English operating manual
-
Remote professional training
-
Machine setup guidance
-
Treatment-head installation instructions
-
Frequency-selection guidance
-
Intensity-adjustment guidance
-
Treatment-protocol information
-
Safety and contraindication instructions
-
Cleaning and maintenance guidance
-
Basic troubleshooting assistance
-
Training certificate after completion
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides remote guidance to help buyers understand:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Treatment-head installation
-
Digital-control operation
-
Frequency adjustment
-
Intensity selection
-
Treatment-area planning
-
Client positioning
-
Basic wellness and recovery protocols
-
Cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Safety procedures
-
Basic troubleshooting
A professional training certificate is provided after completion.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty G8 Vibration Massage Machine is supported by a three-year parts and labor warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered:
-
Main machine unit
-
Internal electronic components
-
Digital display and control system
-
Original treatment heads
-
Treatment-head connection components
-
Original power components
-
Other eligible parts supplied with the machine
Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the Wikbeauty support team will assist with:
-
Remote inspection and fault identification
-
Guided troubleshooting
-
Confirmation of the affected component
-
Replacement-part assistance when covered
-
Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Damage caused by misuse
-
Incorrect treatment-head operation
-
Unauthorized repairs or modifications
-
Incorrect voltage or electrical connection
-
Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance
-
Normal wear of treatment heads and external components
-
Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual
-
Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization
The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service.
Full coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy.
Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional vibration-massage equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel.
A complete consultation and contraindication assessment must be completed before treatment.
Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Active or suspected blood clots
-
Severe cardiovascular conditions
-
Acute inflammation or infection
-
Open wounds in the treatment area
-
Recent fractures
-
Recent surgery
-
Severe osteoporosis
-
Bleeding disorders
-
Uncontrolled medical conditions
-
Severe nerve impairment
-
Reduced sensation
-
Other contraindications listed in the operating manual
The machine should not be applied directly over the front or side of the neck, eyes, head, spine, kidneys, open wounds, recent injuries or other prohibited areas.
The selected frequency, intensity and pressure must remain comfortable throughout the session.
This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain.
Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for:
-
Beauty salons
-
Professional spas
-
Wellness centers
-
Gyms and fitness facilities
-
Sports-recovery centers
-
Physiotherapy clinics
-
Massage professionals
-
Corporate wellness providers
-
Trained independent practitioners
-
Businesses expanding their recovery services
This machine is not intended for unsupervised use by untrained individuals.
Why Choose the G8 Vibration Massage Machine?
Select the Appropriate Treatment Head
Four treatment-head options allow practitioners to select the appropriate coverage and treatment pattern for different muscle groups and body areas.
Treat Multiple Body Areas
The system supports professional treatments for the back, shoulders, arms, legs, thighs, calves, feet and other suitable muscle groups.
Customize Every Session
The adjustable 5Hz–100Hz frequency range and customizable intensity settings allow treatments to be adapted to client comfort and professional objectives.
Expand Your Service Menu
The machine can support muscle-relaxation services, athletic-recovery programs, general wellness treatments and suitable add-on massage services.
Protect Your Investment
The system includes a three-year parts and labor warranty, professional training, a training certificate and lifetime technical support.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is vibration massage therapy?
Vibration massage uses controlled percussion and oscillation movements to stimulate selected muscle groups. The frequency and intensity can be adjusted according to the treatment area and client comfort.
What is the adjustable frequency range?
The G8 Vibration Massage Machine provides an adjustable frequency range from 5Hz to 100Hz.
What is the difference between the four treatment heads?
The small head supports precise treatments, the medium head supports general massage, the large head provides broad coverage, and the flexible head adapts to curved body areas.
Which body areas can be treated?
Suitable treatment areas include the back, shoulders, arms, forearms, thighs, legs, calves, gluteal muscles, hands and feet.
How long does a treatment take?
A typical professional session lasts approximately 15–20 minutes. Treatment time varies according to the target area, frequency, intensity and professional protocol.
Is vibration massage uncomfortable?
The frequency and intensity are adjustable. Clients should feel controlled vibration and muscle stimulation without pain. The operator should reduce the settings or stop treatment if discomfort occurs.
Can the machine support athletic recovery programs?
Yes. The G8 Machine can be incorporated into professionally planned pre-workout activation, post-workout relaxation and general sports-recovery programs.
Can it be offered as an add-on service?
Yes. Short vibration-massage sessions may be added to suitable massage, body-care, fitness and wellness services.
Is training included?
Remote professional training and operating guidance are included. A professional training certificate is provided after completion.
What does the three-year warranty cover?
The three-year parts and labor warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded.
Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included.
Add Professional Vibration Massage to Your Business
The Wikbeauty G8 Vibration Massage Machine combines:
-
Four professional treatment heads
-
Adjustable 5Hz–100Hz frequency
-
Percussion and oscillation technology
-
Full-body recovery and wellness applications
-
Three-year warranty and lifetime support
Contact Wikbeauty to order the system or receive more information about its treatment heads, frequency settings and professional training.
Order Your G8 Vibration Massage Machine and Request a Quote
Receives in 8 days.
From $1,249.00
Professional Thermal Shaping, Sculpting, HIFU and Microneedling System
Four Configurations for Professional Body Contouring and Facial Rejuvenation
The Wikbeauty Hot Plastic & Fine Carving Multifunctional HIFU Machine is a configurable professional aesthetic platform developed for beauty salons, med spas and aesthetic clinics.
Its touchscreen console is available with four handle configurations, allowing buyers to select the treatment technologies that best match their services. Depending on the configuration, the system supports thermal body shaping, skin firming, facial HIFU treatments and microneedling-based skin rejuvenation.
Choose a single-handle system for a specialized service or a dual-handle configuration for a more comprehensive treatment menu.
Four configurations | Touchscreen control | Face and body applications | Three-year warranty
Four Technologies Available on One Professional Platform
Thermal Shaping
The Thermal Shaping handle is designed for non-invasive body-contouring treatments on areas with localized fat accumulation.
It offers three adjustable energy-output patterns and two cartridge depths, allowing the operator to adapt treatments according to the selected body area and tissue thickness.
Common treatment areas include:
-
Abdomen
-
Waist and flanks
-
Upper and lower back
-
Upper arms
-
Thighs
-
Legs
-
Buttocks
Sculpting
The Sculpting handle delivers focused thermal energy at selectable depths to support skin firming and body-contour refinement.
Cartridges in 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm depths allow trained operators to adapt treatments for different areas and professional protocols.
US-Version HIFU
The US-Version HIFU handle is designed for non-surgical facial lifting and skin-tightening treatments.
Common applications include:
-
Facial contouring
-
Jawline definition
-
Brow-area lifting
-
Neck treatments
-
Improvement in the appearance of fine lines
-
Overall skin-firming programs
Microneedling
The Microneedling handle is supplied with multiple pin configurations for customized skin-rejuvenation treatments.
Available options include:
-
10-needle cartridge
-
25-needle cartridge
-
64-needle cartridge
-
Microcrystal tip
The appropriate cartridge should be selected according to the treatment area, skin condition and professional protocol.
Select the Right Configuration for Your Business
The system is offered in four configurations. The included handles and cartridges depend on the option selected at the time of purchase.
Configuration 1: Thermal Shaping
A body-focused configuration for non-invasive contouring treatments.
Included technology:
-
One Thermal Shaping handle
-
0.8 mm cartridge
-
13 mm cartridge
-
576-dot, 360-dot and 300-dot output patterns
Recommended for:
-
Body-contouring studios
-
Abdomen and waist treatments
-
Back, arm and thigh contouring
-
Businesses adding a specialized body-shaping service
Configuration 2: Sculpting
A focused configuration for skin firming and contour refinement.
Included technology:
-
One Sculpting handle
-
1.5 mm cartridge
-
3.0 mm cartridge
-
4.5 mm cartridge
Recommended for:
-
Skin-firming treatments
-
Contour-refinement services
-
Face and body treatment programs
-
Clinics focused on non-surgical tightening
Configuration 3: Sculpting and Thermal Shaping
The complete Hot Plastic and Fine Carving combination for clinics that want to offer both body shaping and skin firming.
Included technology:
-
One Thermal Shaping handle
-
0.8 mm and 13 mm Thermal Shaping cartridges
-
One Sculpting handle
-
1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm Sculpting cartridges
Recommended for:
-
Comprehensive body-contouring programs
-
Localized body-shaping treatments
-
Skin-firming services
-
Clinics expanding their non-invasive treatment menu
Configuration 4: US-Version HIFU and Microneedling
A face-focused configuration combining HIFU lifting with customizable microneedling treatments.
Included technology:
-
One US-Version HIFU handle
-
1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm HIFU cartridges
-
One Microneedling handle
-
10-needle, 25-needle and 64-needle cartridges
-
Microcrystal tip
Recommended for:
-
Facial lifting treatments
-
Jawline and neck contouring
-
Fine-line treatments
-
Skin-texture and rejuvenation programs
Precision Output for Customized Thermal Shaping
The Thermal Shaping handle offers three output-dot patterns. Each pattern is intended for a different treatment requirement.
| Output pattern | Recommended application |
|---|---|
| 576 dots | Full treatment pattern for broader body areas |
| 360 dots | More targeted output for the navel area |
| 300 dots | Areas where the fat layer is under 25 mm thick |
The available patterns give trained operators greater control over treatment coverage and energy placement.
The correct pattern must be selected following consultation and assessment of the intended treatment area.
Adjustable Treatment Depths
Different cartridges are provided for different technologies and treatment depths.
Thermal Shaping Cartridges
-
0.8 mm
-
13 mm
Sculpting Cartridges
-
1.5 mm
-
3.0 mm
-
4.5 mm
US-Version HIFU Cartridges
-
1.5 mm
-
3.0 mm
-
4.5 mm
Professional Face and Body Applications
The available treatments depend on the configuration selected.
| Treatment area | Applicable technology | Intended aesthetic application |
|---|---|---|
| Abdomen and waist | Thermal Shaping | Non-invasive body contouring |
| Back and flanks | Thermal Shaping | Localized contour refinement |
| Arms and thighs | Thermal Shaping or Sculpting | Body shaping and firming |
| Buttocks and legs | Thermal Shaping or Sculpting | Contouring and skin firming |
| Face and jawline | US-Version HIFU | Facial contouring and tightening |
| Brow and neck | US-Version HIFU | Non-surgical lifting treatments |
| Facial skin | Microneedling | Texture and tone improvement |
| Targeted skin areas | Microneedling | Professional rejuvenation protocols |
Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete consultation should be performed before every treatment.
How a Professional Session Works
1. Client Consultation
The operator reviews the client’s concerns, medical history, treatment goals and suitability. The appropriate technology and cartridge are then selected.
2. System Preparation
The selected handle and cartridge are installed according to the operating manual. The operator confirms that the handle is correctly connected before beginning the session.
3. Parameter Selection
Treatment depth, energy level, output pattern and other relevant settings are selected according to the treatment area and professional protocol.
4. Treatment Application
The operator applies the selected handle to the treatment area following the recommended technique. Session duration varies according to the technology, selected area and protocol.
5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After the treatment, the area is cleaned and the client receives appropriate aftercare instructions.
Some clients may return to their normal activities shortly after treatment. Temporary redness, sensitivity, swelling or other expected responses may occur, particularly after HIFU or microneedling procedures.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The machine combines a clean touchscreen interface with configurable treatment technologies for streamlined use in a professional setting.
Key operating advantages include:
-
Touchscreen control panel
-
Four selectable handle configurations
-
Face and body treatment options
-
Multiple cartridge depths
-
Three Thermal Shaping output patterns
-
Single- and dual-handle configurations
-
Compact multifunctional platform
-
Treatment flexibility for different business models
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product type | Multifunctional professional HIFU and aesthetic system |
| Available configurations | Thermal Shaping; Sculpting; Sculpting with Thermal Shaping; US-Version HIFU with Microneedling |
| Control interface | Touchscreen control panel |
| Thermal Shaping cartridges | 0.8 mm and 13 mm |
| Thermal Shaping patterns | 576 dots, 360 dots and 300 dots |
| Sculpting cartridges | 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm |
| Sculpting thermal setting | Up to 65°C, according to the supplied specification |
| US-Version HIFU cartridges | 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm |
| Microneedling options | 10-needle, 25-needle, 64-needle and microcrystal tip |
| Intended applications | Body contouring, skin firming, facial HIFU and skin rejuvenation |
| Warranty | Three-year limited warranty |
| Documentation | English user manual and operating guidance |
| Training | Remote video training and setup assistance |
| Declared compliance | CE and RoHS documentation available according to the ordered model |
Machine dimensions, weight, power input and other specifications may vary by configuration. Contact Wikbeauty for the complete technical datasheet before ordering.
What Is Included?
Package contents depend on the selected configuration.
Standard Equipment
-
One touchscreen main unit
-
Handle or handles included with the selected configuration
-
Applicable treatment cartridges or microneedling tips
-
Treatment-handle connection components
-
Power cable
-
Starter conductive gel, where applicable
-
English user manual
-
Operating guidance
Documentation and Training
-
English operating manual
-
Remote video training
-
Machine setup guidance
-
Safety and operating instructions
-
Treatment-protocol guidance
-
Basic cleaning and maintenance instructions
Please confirm your preferred configuration before ordering to ensure that the correct handles and cartridges are included.
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides remote guidance to help buyers understand:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Handle and cartridge installation
-
Control-interface operation
-
Treatment-parameter selection
-
Basic treatment protocols
-
Cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Safety procedures
-
Basic troubleshooting
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Multifunctional HIFU Machine is supported by a three-year limited warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered:
-
Main machine unit
-
Internal electronic components
-
Touchscreen and control system
-
Original treatment handles
-
Handle-connection components
-
Other eligible parts supplied with the machine
Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the Wikbeauty support team will assist with:
-
Remote inspection and fault identification
-
Guided troubleshooting
-
Confirmation of the affected component
-
Replacement-part assistance when covered
-
Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Damage caused by misuse
-
Incorrect treatment-handle operation
-
Unauthorized repairs or modifications
-
Incorrect voltage or electrical connection
-
Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance
-
Normal wear of cartridges, tips and consumable items
-
Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual
-
Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization
The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service.
Full coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy.
Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional aesthetic equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel.
A complete consultation and contraindication assessment must be completed before treatment.
Depending on the selected technology, treatment may not be suitable for individuals with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Implanted electronic or metallic devices
-
Active cancer
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Blood-clotting disorders
-
Uncontrolled medical conditions
-
Active infection or inflammation
-
Open wounds in the treatment area
-
Severe skin disorders
-
Photosensitivity or photosensitizing medication
-
Recent surgery in the proposed treatment area
-
Conditions affecting normal healing
-
Other contraindications listed in the operating manual
Microneedling cartridges and tips must be handled according to professional hygiene and infection-control requirements.
This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain.
Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for:
-
Beauty salons
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Medical spas
-
Body-contouring studios
-
Skin-rejuvenation professionals
-
Trained independent practitioners
-
Businesses expanding their face and body treatment services
This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use.
Why Choose This Multifunctional System?
Select Only the Technologies You Need
Four configurations allow buyers to match the equipment to their current service menu and budget.
Combine Face and Body Treatments
Choose a body-focused system, a facial-rejuvenation system or a dual-technology body-contouring configuration.
Work at Multiple Treatment Depths
A range of cartridges supports different treatment areas and professional protocols.
Expand Your Service Menu
One configurable platform can support body contouring, skin firming, facial HIFU or microneedling services, depending on the option ordered.
Protect Your Investment
The system includes a three-year limited warranty, remote training and ongoing technical support.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the difference between the four configurations?
Configuration 1 includes Thermal Shaping for body contouring. Configuration 2 includes Sculpting for skin firming. Configuration 3 combines Thermal Shaping and Sculpting. Configuration 4 combines US-Version HIFU with Microneedling for facial rejuvenation.
Which configuration is best for body contouring?
Configuration 3 offers the most complete body-focused combination because it includes both Thermal Shaping and Sculpting technologies.
Which configuration is best for facial treatments?
Configuration 4 is the face-focused option. It combines the US-Version HIFU handle with multiple microneedling cartridge options.
Is this machine a replacement for surgical liposuction?
No. This is professional aesthetic equipment intended for non-invasive body-contouring treatments. It should not be represented as equivalent to or a replacement for surgical liposuction.
Do treatments require downtime?
Downtime depends on the technology, treatment intensity and individual client response. Some clients may resume normal activities shortly after treatment, while temporary redness, sensitivity or swelling may occur.
How quickly will clients see results?
Results vary according to the treatment performed, client condition, treatment parameters and individual biological response. A fixed result or treatment timeline should not be guaranteed.
Is training included?
Remote setup and operating guidance are included. Operators must also meet any training, qualification and licensing requirements applicable in their market.
What does the three-year warranty cover?
The limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects in approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Consumables, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded.
Does the machine include CE and RoHS documentation?
CE and RoHS is included
Build the Right Treatment System for Your Business
Choose the configuration that best matches your professional treatment menu:
-
Thermal Shaping
-
Sculpting
-
Sculpting and Thermal Shaping
-
US-Version HIFU and Microneedling
Contact Wikbeauty before ordering if you need help comparing the handles, cartridges or intended applications.
Select Your Configuration and Request a Quote
Receives in 8 days.
$1,299.00
Professional Three-in-One Pressotherapy System
Far-Infrared Heat, Pneumatic Compression and EMS Muscle Stimulation
The 3-in-1 Pressotherapy Machine is a multifunctional wellness platform developed for beauty salons, medical spas, wellness clinics, postpartum recovery centers and sports-recovery studios.
The system combines far-infrared heat, pneumatic air-pressure massage and electrical muscle stimulation. Its full-body compression suit contains 20 air chambers for controlled sequential pressure across multiple body areas.
Four operating modes and independent temperature and pressure controls allow trained operators to customize treatments according to the client’s comfort and professional wellness objectives.
Three treatment technologies | Twenty air chambers | Four operating modes | Three-year warranty
Four Professional Functions on One Pressotherapy Platform
Far-Infrared Heat
The far-infrared function provides adjustable warmth across suitable areas covered by the treatment suit.
Common applications include:
-
General body warming
-
Muscle relaxation
-
Circulation-focused wellness
-
Body-care programs
-
Relaxation treatments
-
Recovery-oriented sessions
Pneumatic Compression Massage
Twenty air chambers inflate and deflate in programmed sequences to provide controlled compression across the body.
Common applications include:
-
Lymphatic-drainage support
-
Tired-leg programs
-
Temporary water-retention support
-
General circulation-focused wellness
-
Full-body relaxation
-
Recovery-oriented treatments
EMS Muscle Stimulation
The EMS function applies controlled electrical impulses to suitable muscle groups.
Common applications include:
-
Muscle-stimulation programs
-
General muscle conditioning
-
Body-toning support
-
Post-workout wellness
-
Fitness-oriented services
-
Customized recovery protocols
Independent Zone Control
Temperature and pressure can be adjusted independently for different body zones.
Common operating applications include:
-
Customized upper-body pressure
-
Customized lower-body pressure
-
Independent temperature adjustment
-
Client-comfort management
-
Targeted wellness programs
-
Personalized treatment sequences
The appropriate operating mode, pressure, temperature, EMS intensity and session duration should be selected according to the client’s condition, tolerance and professional protocol.
Select the Right Operating Mode for Each Client
The system provides four customizable operating modes. The appropriate mode should be selected following consultation and contraindication assessment.
Mode A: Gentle Relaxation
A lower-intensity program designed for comfort-focused and first-time treatments.
Recommended applications:
-
General relaxation
-
Light compression massage
-
First-time sessions
-
Gentle body-wellness programs
Recommended for:
-
New clients
-
Fatigued professionals
-
Relaxation-focused spa clients
-
Clients who prefer gentle pressure
Mode B: Lymphatic-Drainage Support
A sequential compression program for professionally planned fluid-movement and circulation-focused treatments.
Recommended applications:
-
Tired-leg programs
-
Temporary water-retention support
-
General lymphatic wellness
-
Full-body compression massage
Recommended for:
-
Wellness-center clients
-
Beauty-spa programs
-
Suitable recovery services
-
Maintenance-oriented treatments
Mode C: Body-Conditioning Support
A moderate-intensity program combining compression, heat and suitable EMS settings.
Recommended applications:
-
Body-toning support
-
General muscle stimulation
-
Circulation-focused body care
-
Wellness and fitness programs
Recommended for:
-
Weight-management clients
-
Fitness and wellness centers
-
Body-care packages
-
Professionally assessed users
Mode D: Recovery Program
A customizable program designed for appropriately selected athletic and muscle-recovery applications.
Recommended applications:
-
Post-workout wellness
-
Tired-muscle relaxation
-
Lower-body recovery
-
General fatigue-relief programs
Recommended for:
-
Athletes
-
Sports-recovery studios
-
Fitness facilities
-
Active-lifestyle clients
Twenty Air Chambers for Customized Compression
The full-body pressotherapy suit contains 20 air chambers that inflate and deflate according to the selected mode.
| Compression Zone | Recommended Application |
|---|---|
| Lower Legs | Tired-leg and recovery-focused treatments |
| Thighs | Lower-body compression and circulation support |
| Waist and Abdomen | Appropriately selected body-wellness programs |
| Arms and Upper Body | General compression and relaxation |
| Full Body | Comprehensive professional pressotherapy sessions |
Independent zone control gives trained operators greater flexibility over pressure, temperature and treatment coverage.
New clients should begin with gentler pressure, lower temperature and reduced EMS intensity before the settings are increased gradually.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
The full-body suit supports professional treatment of multiple body zones.
Upper-Body Treatments
-
Arms
-
Upper back
-
Waist
-
Suitable torso areas
-
Other professionally assessed zones
Lower-Body Treatments
-
Thighs
-
Lower legs
-
Calves
-
Feet
-
Gluteal areas
-
Suitable lower-body zones
Full-Body Programs
-
General relaxation
-
Lymphatic-drainage support
-
Muscle-stimulation programs
-
Recovery-oriented sessions
-
Body-care treatments
-
Wellness-maintenance programs
Professional Wellness and Recovery Applications
The available treatments depend on the selected operating mode, pressure, temperature, EMS intensity and professional protocol.
| Client Objective | Applicable Technology | Intended Wellness Application |
|---|---|---|
| General relaxation | Infrared and pneumatic compression | Full-body comfort and relaxation |
| Tired legs | Pneumatic compression | Lower-body recovery support |
| Temporary water retention | Sequential compression | Fluid-movement support |
| Muscle conditioning | EMS | Controlled muscle stimulation |
| Post-workout recovery | Compression, heat and EMS | Athletic wellness support |
| Body-care programs | Three-in-one treatment | General contour and wellness support |
| Postpartum wellness | Gentle customized program | Professionally cleared recovery support |
| Fatigue relief | Heat and compression | Relaxation and body comfort |
Treatment suitability and expected responses vary between clients. A complete health consultation should be performed before every treatment.
How a Professional Session Works
1. Client Consultation
The operator reviews the client’s health history, treatment objectives, current condition and contraindications. The appropriate operating mode and treatment zones are then selected.
2. Suit Preparation
The client is positioned comfortably, and the full-body suit is fitted correctly. Air hoses, EMS connections and temperature-control components are connected according to the operating manual.
3. Parameter Selection
The operator selects Mode A, B, C or D and adjusts the pressure, temperature, EMS intensity and session duration according to the client’s comfort.
4. Three-in-One Treatment
The system delivers controlled far-infrared warmth, sequential pneumatic compression and EMS stimulation according to the selected program. A typical session lasts approximately 30–45 minutes.
5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After treatment, the suit is removed and the client receives appropriate hydration, activity and aftercare guidance.
Temporary warmth, pressure marks, increased urination, tingling, muscle fatigue or mild soreness may occur.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The machine combines three wellness technologies with intelligent touchscreen controls for streamlined professional operation.
Key operating advantages include:
-
Far-infrared heat
-
Pneumatic compression massage
-
EMS muscle stimulation
-
Full-body suit with 20 air chambers
-
Four operating modes
-
Independent zone control
-
Adjustable temperature and pressure
-
Professional touchscreen interface
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | 3-in-1 Pressotherapy Machine |
| Product Type | Professional multifunctional pressotherapy system |
| Primary Technologies | Far-infrared heat, pneumatic compression and EMS |
| Pressotherapy Suit | Full-body compression suit |
| Air Chambers | 20 |
| Operating Modes | Four modes: A, B, C and D |
| Zone Control | Independent temperature and pressure settings |
| Session Duration | Approximately 30–45 minutes |
| Maximum Power | 350W |
| Voltage Options | 100–110V and 220–240V |
| Electrical Frequency | 50Hz and 60Hz |
| Control Interface | Professional touchscreen |
| Suit Material | Soft, breathable treatment material |
| Safety Features | Automatic deflation, overheat protection and pressure regulation |
| Warranty | Three-year parts warranty |
| Support | Professional training and technical assistance |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
What Is Included?
The package includes the main pressotherapy unit, full-body treatment suit and required operating accessories.
Standard Equipment
-
One 3-in-1 Pressotherapy control system
-
One full-body 20-air-chamber suit
-
Pneumatic air hoses
-
EMS connection components
-
Temperature-control components
-
Suit connectors and accessories
-
Power cable
-
English user manual
-
Operating guidance
Documentation and Training
-
English operating manual
-
Remote professional training
-
Machine setup guidance
-
Suit-fitting instructions
-
Air-hose connection guidance
-
Mode-selection guidance
-
Pressure and temperature adjustment
-
EMS-intensity guidance
-
Independent zone-control training
-
Safety and contraindication instructions
-
Cleaning and maintenance guidance
-
Basic troubleshooting assistance
-
Training certificate after completion
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides professional guidance to help buyers understand:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen navigation
-
Full-body suit fitting
-
Air-hose installation
-
EMS connection and placement
-
Operation of Modes A–D
-
Pressure adjustment
-
Temperature adjustment
-
Independent zone control
-
Client-comfort monitoring
-
Cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Safety procedures
-
Basic troubleshooting
A professional training certificate is provided after successful completion.
Three-Year Warranty
The 3-in-1 Pressotherapy Machine is supported by a three-year parts warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered:
-
Main machine unit
-
Internal electronic components
-
Touchscreen and control system
-
Internal air compressor
-
Temperature-control components
-
EMS control components
-
Original air hoses and connectors
-
Other eligible parts supplied with the machine
Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the Wikbeauty support team will assist with:
-
Remote inspection and fault identification
-
Guided troubleshooting
-
Confirmation of the affected component
-
Warranty-eligibility review
-
Replacement-part assistance when covered
-
Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Damage caused by misuse
-
Incorrect suit or connector operation
-
Unauthorized repairs or modifications
-
Incorrect voltage or electrical connection
-
Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance
-
Normal wear of the suit, EMS pads and consumable items
-
Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual
-
Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization
The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service.
Full coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy.
Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional pressotherapy and EMS equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel.
A complete health assessment and contraindication review must be completed before treatment.
Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Active or suspected blood clots
-
Deep-vein thrombosis
-
Severe cardiovascular conditions
-
Severe varicose veins
-
Unexplained edema
-
Acute inflammation or fever
-
Active cancer
-
Open wounds or active infections
-
Recent surgery
-
Severe heat sensitivity
-
Reduced sensation
-
Uncontrolled medical conditions
-
Other contraindications listed in the operating manual
Postpartum clients require appropriate medical clearance before treatment. Abdominal pressure, infrared heat and EMS settings must be selected carefully according to recovery status.
The selected pressure, temperature and EMS intensity must remain comfortable throughout treatment.
This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain.
Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for:
-
Beauty salons
-
Medical spas
-
Wellness clinics
-
Postpartum recovery centers
-
Sports-recovery studios
-
Fitness facilities
-
Professional massage providers
-
Trained independent practitioners
-
Businesses expanding their wellness services
This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use.
Why Choose the Three-in-One Pressotherapy Machine?
Combine Three Wellness Technologies
The system combines far-infrared heat, pneumatic compression and EMS muscle stimulation in one professional platform.
Provide Full-Body Coverage
The treatment suit includes 20 air chambers for controlled compression across multiple upper- and lower-body zones.
Customize Every Session
Four operating modes and independent zone controls allow pressure, temperature and EMS intensity to be adapted to the client’s comfort.
Expand Your Service Menu
The machine supports relaxation, lymphatic-drainage, muscle-stimulation, body-care and recovery-oriented programs.
Protect Your Investment
The system includes a three-year parts warranty, CE and ISO certificates, professional training and technical support.
Frequently Asked Questions
How does the three-in-one system work?
The machine combines adjustable far-infrared warmth, sequential pneumatic compression and EMS muscle stimulation in one treatment platform.
What do the 20 air chambers provide?
The chambers inflate and deflate in programmed sequences to deliver controlled compression across multiple body areas.
What is the difference between Modes A, B, C and D?
The four modes provide different pressure sequences and intensity patterns. Operators select the appropriate mode according to client comfort and treatment objectives.
How long does a treatment take?
A typical professional session lasts approximately 30–45 minutes. The exact duration depends on the selected mode and customized settings.
Can temperature and pressure be adjusted separately?
Yes. Independent zone controls allow trained operators to customize pressure and temperature for different body areas.
Can postpartum clients receive treatment?
Postpartum treatment requires appropriate medical clearance. The recovery stage, delivery type and current health must be considered before applying compression, heat or EMS.
Is the treatment uncomfortable?
Pressure, heat and EMS intensity are adjustable. The treatment should remain comfortable, and the operator should reduce the settings or stop treatment if discomfort occurs.
Is there downtime?
Many suitable clients can resume normal activities shortly after treatment. Temporary warmth, pressure marks, tingling, increased urination or mild muscle fatigue may occur.
Is professional training included?
Remote professional training covers machine setup, suit fitting, operating modes, pressure, temperature, EMS settings, zone control, cleaning and safety. A training certificate is provided.
What does the three-year warranty cover?
The three-year parts warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Consumables, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded.
Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included.
Add Three-in-One Pressotherapy to Your Business
The 3-in-1 Pressotherapy Machine combines:
-
Far-infrared heat therapy
-
Twenty-chamber pneumatic compression
-
EMS muscle stimulation
-
Four customizable operating modes
-
Three-year parts warranty and professional support
Contact Wikbeauty to order the machine or receive more information about its operating modes, full-body suit and professional training.
Order Your 3-in-1 Pressotherapy Machine and Request Pricing
Receives in 8 days.
$1,199.00
Professional 5-in-1 Body Sculpting and Skin-Rejuvenation System
Ultrasonic Cavitation, Radiofrequency, Vacuum, LED, and Massage Technology
The Wikbeauty Vacuum RF Cavitation Device is a professional 5-in-1 beauty system that combines ultrasonic cavitation, radiofrequency, vacuum therapy, LED light, and massage functions on one platform.
The machine is available with either a 30K or 40K cavitation configuration. Its five specialized treatment handles support customizable body-contouring, skin-tightening, facial-rejuvenation, and vacuum-massage programs.
With adjustable treatment settings, an intelligent touchscreen, pre-programmed protocols, universal 110V–240V power compatibility, and a 30kg professional design, the machine is suitable for beauty salons, spas, and body-contouring clinics.
30K or 40K cavitation | Five beauty technologies | Five specialized handles | Universal voltage | Three-year warranty
Five Professional Technologies on One Platform
Ultrasonic Cavitation
The cavitation function delivers ultrasonic energy to selected body areas as part of a professional body-contouring program.
Customers can choose between:
-
30K cavitation operating at 30,000Hz
-
40K cavitation operating at 40,000Hz
Common applications include:
-
Abdomen contouring
-
Waistline treatments
-
Thigh contouring
-
Buttock-area programs
-
Upper-arm contouring
-
Localized body-shaping treatments
Radiofrequency
Radiofrequency energy provides controlled thermal stimulation within the selected treatment area. The machine includes different RF handpieces for facial and body applications.
Common applications include:
-
Facial skin tightening
-
Body skin-firming treatments
-
Collagen-remodeling programs
-
Fine-line and wrinkle care
-
Improved skin texture
-
Post-cavitation skin tightening
Vacuum Therapy
The adjustable vacuum function provides controlled suction for professional body massage and contouring programs.
Common applications include:
-
Vacuum massage
-
Tissue mobilization
-
Cellulite-appearance programs
-
Body-contouring support
-
Lymphatic-style beauty treatments
-
Post-treatment massage
LED Light Therapy
Integrated LED light can be incorporated into suitable facial and body-care programs.
Common applications include:
-
Skin-rejuvenation treatments
-
Facial beauty programs
-
Skin-comfort support
-
Combined RF and LED treatments
-
Post-treatment skincare programs
Multipolar RF Massage
Multipolar RF handpieces combine controlled thermal energy with professional massage movements across selected treatment areas.
Common applications include:
-
Facial firming
-
Upper-arm tightening
-
Leg skin treatments
-
Abdomen and waist programs
-
Buttock and thigh treatments
-
General skin-texture improvement
Select the Right Program for Each Client
Body-Contouring Program
Uses the selected 30K or 40K cavitation handpiece for targeted body treatments.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdomen contouring
-
Waistline shaping
-
Thigh treatments
-
Buttock-area contouring
-
Upper-arm programs
Recommended for:
-
Clients concerned about localized body areas
-
Clients seeking non-invasive body contouring
-
Clients following balanced wellness programs
Skin-Tightening Program
Uses the appropriate radiofrequency handpiece to provide controlled thermal stimulation.
Recommended applications:
-
Loose-looking body skin
-
Reduced facial firmness
-
Upper-arm skin tightening
-
Abdomen and waist firming
-
General collagen-remodeling programs
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking firmer-looking skin
-
Clients combining cavitation and RF
-
Clients receiving age-management beauty treatments
Facial-Rejuvenation Program
Uses the smaller tripolar RF handpiece and suitable LED settings for controlled facial treatments.
Recommended applications:
-
Facial skin tightening
-
Fine-line care
-
Texture improvement
-
Facial collagen support
-
General anti-aging treatments
Recommended for:
-
Clients concerned about early signs of aging
-
Clients seeking non-invasive facial care
-
Clients requiring a smaller treatment applicator
Vacuum-Massage Program
Uses adjustable suction and controlled massage movements on suitable body areas.
Recommended applications:
-
Body massage
-
Tissue mobilization
-
Cellulite-appearance programs
-
Lymphatic-style beauty treatments
-
Combined body-contouring services
Recommended for:
-
Clients receiving multi-stage body treatments
-
Clients seeking massage-based body care
-
Clients combining vacuum with cavitation or RF
Adjustable Cavitation, RF, and Vacuum Settings
The machine allows professionals to personalize treatments according to the selected technology, treatment area, and client comfort.
| Setting | Available Configuration | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| Cavitation Option | 30K or 40K | Selected ultrasonic body-contouring configuration |
| 30K Frequency | 30,000Hz | Professional cavitation treatments |
| 40K Frequency | 40,000Hz | Professional cavitation treatments |
| RF Frequency | 1–10MHz adjustable | Facial and body thermal treatments |
| RF Configurations | Monopolar, tripolar, quadrupolar, and hexapolar | Different treatment areas |
| Vacuum Pressure | Adjustable | Personalized suction and massage |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–40 minutes | Flexible treatment planning |
| Control System | Intelligent touchscreen | Protocol and setting management |
Settings should be adjusted progressively according to client comfort, treatment objectives, and the supplied operating protocols.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Abdomen and Waist
The cavitation, RF, vacuum, and massage functions can be incorporated into customized midsection treatments.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Abdomen contouring
-
Waistline shaping
-
Skin-firming support
-
Vacuum massage
-
Combined cavitation and RF treatment
Buttocks and Thighs
Larger treatment handles support structured lower-body contouring and skin-care programs.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Buttock-area contouring
-
Inner-thigh treatments
-
Outer-thigh treatments
-
Cellulite-appearance programs
-
Skin-firming and massage
Face, Arms, and Legs
Smaller and medium-sized multipolar RF handles support treatments for additional facial and body areas.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Facial rejuvenation
-
Upper-arm contouring
-
Arm skin tightening
-
Leg treatments
-
General skin-texture improvement
Professional Treatment Applications
| Treatment Area | Primary Objective | Recommended Technology |
|---|---|---|
| Face | Skin tightening and rejuvenation | Tripolar RF and LED |
| Upper Arms | Contouring and skin firming | Cavitation and quadrupolar RF |
| Abdomen | Body contouring and tightening | Cavitation, RF, and vacuum |
| Waist | Contour definition and massage | Cavitation, RF, and vacuum |
| Buttocks | Contouring and skin-firming support | Cavitation and hexapolar RF |
| Thighs | Body contouring and cellulite-appearance care | Cavitation, vacuum, and RF |
| Legs | Skin firming and massage | Quadrupolar RF and vacuum |
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, treatment objectives, target areas, previous procedures, and possible contraindications. Explain the treatment process and establish realistic expectations.
Step 2: Technology and Handle Selection
Choose the 30K or 40K cavitation function, appropriate RF handpiece, vacuum setting, LED function, or combined treatment sequence.
Step 3: Treatment Preparation
Clean the selected treatment area and apply the correct treatment medium when required. Configure the machine according to the area and client comfort.
Step 4: Active Treatment
Move the selected handpiece continuously according to the supplied protocol. Monitor the client’s skin response, temperature, suction level, and comfort throughout the session.
Step 5: Treatment Completion
Remove the treatment medium, inspect and clean the treated area, record the selected settings, and provide appropriate aftercare recommendations.
Designed for Professional Beauty Environments
The Wikbeauty Vacuum RF Cavitation Device combines five complementary beauty technologies within one professional platform.
Key advantages include:
-
Choice of 30K or 40K ultrasonic cavitation
-
Five integrated beauty technologies
-
Five specialized treatment handles
-
Facial and body treatment capability
-
Adjustable 1–10MHz RF frequency
-
Monopolar and multipolar RF configurations
-
Adjustable vacuum pressure
-
Integrated LED light
-
Professional massage function
-
Intelligent touchscreen controls
-
Pre-programmed treatment protocols
-
Approximately 20–40-minute sessions
-
30kg professional system
-
Universal 110V–240V power compatibility
-
Three-year professional warranty
-
Professional training and ongoing support
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty Vacuum RF Cavitation Device |
| Technology | Cavitation, radiofrequency, vacuum, LED, and massage |
| Cavitation Options | 30K or 40K |
| 30K Frequency | 30,000Hz |
| 40K Frequency | 40,000Hz |
| RF Frequency Range | 1–10MHz adjustable |
| RF Configurations | Monopolar, tripolar, quadrupolar, and hexapolar |
| Vacuum Pressure | Adjustable |
| Treatment Handles | Five |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–40 minutes |
| Display | Intelligent touchscreen |
| Treatment Programs | Pre-programmed and adjustable |
| Treatment Areas | Face, arms, abdomen, waist, buttocks, thighs, and legs |
| Weight | 30kg |
| Power Supply | 110V–240V |
| Warranty | Three-year professional warranty |
| Support | Professional training and ongoing technical assistance |
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty Vacuum RF Cavitation main unit
-
1 × 30K or 40K cavitation handpiece
-
1 × Standard RF handpiece
-
1 × Tripolar RF facial handpiece
-
1 × Quadrupolar RF handpiece
-
1 × Hexapolar RF body handpiece
-
Integrated vacuum function
-
Integrated LED light function
-
Intelligent touchscreen control system
-
Pre-programmed treatment protocols
-
1 × Universal 110V–240V power cable
-
Standard machine accessories
The selected 30K or 40K cavitation configuration should be confirmed when placing the order.
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Installation and operating guide
-
Safety and maintenance instructions
-
Professional video training
-
30K or 40K cavitation guidance
-
RF handpiece-selection guidance
-
Vacuum-treatment protocols
-
Facial treatment protocols
-
Body-contouring protocols
-
Client-consultation materials
-
Cleaning and maintenance guidance
-
Professional training certificate
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty Vacuum RF Cavitation Device includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use all five technologies safely and consistently.
Training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen operation
-
Client consultation and screening
-
30K or 40K cavitation operation
-
Treatment-handpiece selection
-
RF frequency and energy adjustment
-
Vacuum-pressure adjustment
-
LED and massage functions
-
Facial treatment protocols
-
Body-contouring protocols
-
Combined treatment sequences
-
Equipment cleaning and maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Vacuum RF Cavitation Device includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period.
Consumable accessories and components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement.
Technical Support Process
-
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team.
-
Provide the machine model and order information.
-
Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested.
-
A technician will assess the reported issue remotely.
-
Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged.
-
Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable accessories, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual.
Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation and health-history review should be completed before every treatment. The machine should only be operated according to the supplied instructions and applicable local requirements.
Treatment may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Metal implants within the treatment area
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Active cancer or tumors
-
Active infection or inflammation
-
Open wounds within the treatment area
-
Serious liver or kidney conditions
-
Blood-clotting disorders
-
Reduced or impaired skin sensation
-
Recent surgery within the treatment area
-
Medical conditions requiring physician supervision
Cavitation should not be applied over the heart, head, neck, breasts, bones, joints, reproductive organs, or other prohibited areas identified in the operating manual.
Facial treatments should only use suitable facial handpieces and settings. The cavitation handpiece should not be used on the face.
Operating Precautions
-
Inspect the machine, handpieces, cables, and accessories before use.
-
Select the correct handpiece for the treatment area.
-
Begin with conservative energy and vacuum settings.
-
Keep cavitation and RF handpieces moving during treatment.
-
Use the correct treatment medium where required.
-
Monitor skin response and client comfort.
-
Avoid prohibited anatomical areas.
-
Do not leave an active handpiece stationary on the skin.
-
Clean and disinfect reusable handpieces after every client.
-
Follow the supplied maintenance schedule.
-
Stop treatment if unexpected pain or skin reaction occurs.
Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty Vacuum RF Cavitation Device is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in:
-
Beauty salons
-
Medical spas
-
Body-contouring clinics
-
Wellness centers
-
Skin-rejuvenation studios
-
Professional spas
-
Aesthetic treatment facilities
-
Home-based beauty businesses
Professional operators should review local licensing, insurance, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering treatments.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty Vacuum RF Cavitation Device?
Choice of 30K or 40K Cavitation
Businesses can select the cavitation frequency that best matches their preferred treatment protocols and service requirements.
Five Technologies on One Platform
Cavitation, radiofrequency, vacuum, LED, and massage functions support a broad range of facial and body treatments.
Five Specialized Treatment Handles
Different handpiece configurations support treatments for the face, arms, abdomen, waist, thighs, buttocks, and legs.
Customizable Professional Settings
Adjustable RF frequency, vacuum pressure, treatment programs, and different handpiece configurations allow professionals to personalize each session.
Complete Professional Support
The package includes step-by-step training, treatment guidance, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty Vacuum RF Cavitation Device?
It is a professional 5-in-1 beauty system combining ultrasonic cavitation, radiofrequency, vacuum therapy, LED light, and massage functions.
Can I choose between 30K and 40K cavitation?
Yes. The machine is available with either a 30K or 40K cavitation configuration. The selected option should be confirmed when placing the order.
What is the difference between 30K and 40K?
The specified difference is the ultrasonic frequency. The 30K configuration operates at 30,000Hz, while the 40K configuration operates at 40,000Hz. Treatment selection should follow the appropriate professional training and protocol.
How many treatment handles are included?
The package includes five specialized handles: one selected cavitation handpiece and four RF handpiece configurations.
Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the face, upper arms, abdomen, waist, buttocks, thighs, and legs. The correct handpiece and protocol must be selected for each area.
How long does one treatment take?
A typical session takes approximately 20–40 minutes, depending on the treatment area, selected technologies, and treatment sequence.
How many sessions are recommended?
The supplied information indicates that visible changes may be noticed after three to five sessions. Individual outcomes vary, and the final treatment plan should be personalized following consultation.
Can cavitation and RF be used in the same program?
Yes. Suitable clients may receive cavitation followed by RF as part of a combined body-contouring and skin-firming program.
What does the vacuum function do?
The adjustable vacuum function provides controlled suction and massage for suitable body areas. It can be incorporated into body-care, cellulite-appearance, and combined-treatment programs.
Can the machine be used for facial treatments?
Yes. The smaller tripolar RF handpiece and suitable LED function can support professional facial treatments. The cavitation handpiece should not be used on the face.
What does a treatment feel like?
Cavitation may produce an audible sensation, RF creates controlled warmth, and vacuum produces suction. Settings should remain within a comfortable and professionally monitored range.
Is there downtime?
Clients can generally continue normal daily activities following a suitable treatment. Temporary warmth, redness, or sensitivity may occur depending on the selected technology and intensity.
Are results guaranteed?
No. Outcomes vary according to the treatment area, body composition, skin condition, number of sessions, lifestyle, selected settings, and individual response.
What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues.
Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers cavitation, RF, vacuum, LED, massage, handpiece selection, treatment protocols, client screening, cleaning, maintenance, and troubleshooting.
Add Professional 5-in-1 Body Sculpting to Your Business
The Wikbeauty Vacuum RF Cavitation Device enables salons, spas, and beauty clinics to provide customizable body-contouring, facial-rejuvenation, skin-tightening, and vacuum-massage services using one professional platform.
Five key benefits:
-
Choice of 30K or 40K ultrasonic cavitation
-
Five complementary beauty technologies
-
Five specialized facial and body handpieces
-
Adjustable settings with universal 110V–240V power
-
Professional training and a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, cavitation configuration, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Receives in 8 days.
Buy 2+ machines and save up to 15% — get a personalized quote within 24 hours.
$1,999.00
Professional 360-Degree Cryolipolysis System
Multiple Applicators for Non-Invasive Body Contouring Treatments
The Wikbeauty 360 Cryolipolysis Machine is a professional controlled-cooling system developed for medical spas, body-contouring studios, aesthetic clinics and professional beauty centers.
Its 360-degree applicator design provides consistent cooling coverage across the selected treatment area. Multiple applicator sizes allow trained operators to create customized protocols for the abdomen, waist, flanks, back, thighs and upper arms.
The system is designed for non-invasive treatment of suitable localized fat deposits without surgery, needles or anesthesia.
360-degree cooling | Multiple applicator sizes | Adjustable temperature | Three-year warranty
Four Body-Contouring Applications on One Professional Platform
Abdomen Treatments
Cryolipolysis applicators can be positioned over suitable localized fat deposits on the abdomen.
An appropriately sized applicator should be selected according to the dimensions, thickness and shape of the treatment area.
Common applications include:
-
Upper-abdomen contouring
-
Lower-abdomen contouring
-
Localized abdominal fat
-
Central body-contouring programs
-
Multi-session abdominal protocols
-
Customized abdomen treatments
Waist and Flank Treatments
The system supports professional contouring treatments for suitable localized fat deposits around the waist and flanks.
Common applications include:
-
Waist-contour refinement
-
Love-handle treatments
-
Side-body contouring
-
Lower-back treatments
-
Flank-reduction programs
-
Customized waist protocols
Thigh Treatments
Multiple applicator sizes support professional treatments for suitable areas of the inner and outer thighs.
Common applications include:
-
Inner-thigh contouring
-
Outer-thigh contouring
-
Upper-thigh treatments
-
Localized thigh areas
-
Lower-body contouring
-
Multi-area thigh protocols
Upper-Arm and Back Treatments
Smaller applicators may be selected for suitable localized fat deposits on the upper arms, back and bra-line areas.
Common applications include:
-
Upper-arm contouring
-
Upper-back treatments
-
Lower-back treatments
-
Bra-line areas
-
Small localized fat deposits
-
Customized body-contouring programs
The appropriate applicator should be selected according to the treatment area, tissue thickness, client suitability and professional protocol.
Select the Right Applicator for Each Treatment Area
The system supports multiple applicator sizes. The appropriate applicator should be selected according to the size, shape and thickness of the intended treatment area.
Application 1: Abdomen
A body-contouring application for suitable localized abdominal fat deposits.
Recommended applications:
-
Upper abdomen
-
Lower abdomen
-
Central abdominal areas
-
Broader treatment zones
Recommended for:
-
Abdominal-contouring programs
-
Multi-session body treatments
-
Clients with suitable localized fat
-
Clinics offering focused abdomen services
Application 2: Waist and Flanks
A targeted application for localized fat deposits around the sides of the body.
Recommended applications:
-
Waist
-
Love handles
-
Flanks
-
Lower back
Recommended for:
-
Waist-contouring treatments
-
Side-body refinement
-
Multi-area body packages
-
Clinics offering torso-contouring services
Application 3: Thighs
A lower-body application for suitable inner- and outer-thigh areas.
Recommended applications:
-
Inner thighs
-
Outer thighs
-
Upper thighs
-
Localized lower-body areas
Recommended for:
-
Thigh-contouring programs
-
Lower-body packages
-
Multi-area treatments
-
Body-contouring clinics
Application 4: Upper Arms and Back
A targeted application for smaller localized fat deposits.
Recommended applications:
-
Upper arms
-
Upper back
-
Lower back
-
Bra-line areas
Recommended for:
-
Smaller treatment zones
-
Targeted contouring services
-
Customized treatment packages
-
Clinics expanding their body-treatment menu
Precision Cooling for Customized Cryolipolysis Treatments
The 360 Cryolipolysis Machine provides an adjustable cooling range from 5°C to −11°C. Each setting should be selected according to the applicator, treatment area, tissue condition and professional protocol.
| Cooling Level | Recommended Application |
|---|---|
| Mild Cooling | Initial assessment and comfort-focused protocols |
| Moderate Cooling | General professional body-contouring treatments |
| Lower Temperature | Appropriately selected protocols for suitable tissue |
| Customized Cooling | Treatment-specific settings based on professional assessment |
The adjustable cooling system gives trained operators greater control over treatment temperature and client comfort.
The correct temperature, suction level and treatment duration must be selected following consultation and assessment of the intended treatment area.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Different applicators support different body areas and professional contouring protocols.
Torso Treatments
-
Upper abdomen
-
Lower abdomen
-
Waist
-
Flanks
-
Upper back
-
Lower back
Lower-Body Treatments
-
Inner thighs
-
Outer thighs
-
Upper thighs
-
Other suitable localized areas
-
Multi-area lower-body programs
Smaller Treatment Areas
-
Upper arms
-
Bra-line areas
-
Small back areas
-
Other appropriately selected localized fat deposits
Professional Body-Contouring Applications
The available treatments depend on the selected applicator, cooling temperature, suction setting and professional protocol.
| Treatment Area | Applicable Applicator | Intended Aesthetic Application |
|---|---|---|
| Upper abdomen | Suitable large applicator | Abdominal-contour refinement |
| Lower abdomen | Suitable large applicator | Localized body contouring |
| Waist and flanks | Medium or contoured applicator | Side-body contour refinement |
| Inner thighs | Suitable medium applicator | Lower-body contouring |
| Outer thighs | Suitable medium or large applicator | Thigh-contour refinement |
| Upper arms | Suitable small applicator | Targeted arm contouring |
| Upper and lower back | Suitable applicator | Localized back treatment |
| Bra-line area | Suitable small applicator | Targeted contour refinement |
Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete consultation should be performed before every treatment.
How a Professional Session Works
1. Client Consultation
The operator reviews the client’s medical history, treatment goals, tissue condition and suitability. The intended areas are measured and an appropriate treatment plan is created.
2. Skin and Applicator Preparation
The selected area is exposed and prepared according to the operating protocol. A protective antifreeze membrane is placed correctly over the skin before applicator attachment.
3. Parameter Selection
The operator selects the applicator, cooling temperature, suction level, session duration and other available settings according to the treatment area and professional protocol.
4. Controlled Cooling Treatment
The applicator is positioned securely over the localized fat deposit. The system applies controlled cooling for approximately 30–60 minutes, depending on the selected area and protocol.
5. Post-Treatment Guidance
The applicator and protective membrane are removed. The operator inspects the treated area and performs the recommended post-treatment procedure.
Temporary redness, firmness, bruising, tenderness, tingling, numbness or sensitivity may occur following treatment.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The machine combines digital controls with adjustable 360-degree cooling technology for streamlined use in professional body-contouring settings.
Key operating advantages include:
-
Digital control display
-
Adjustable 5°C to −11°C cooling range
-
360-degree applicator coverage
-
Multiple applicator sizes
-
Adjustable treatment parameters
-
Automatic temperature control
-
Protective skin membranes
-
110V–240V power compatibility
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty 360 Cryolipolysis Machine |
| Product Type | Professional non-invasive body-contouring system |
| Technology | Controlled cryolipolysis cooling |
| Cooling Range | 5°C to −11°C |
| Coverage Design | 360-degree applicator cooling |
| Applicator Options | Multiple sizes for different body areas |
| Session Duration | Approximately 30–60 minutes per treatment area |
| Recommended Protocol | Commonly 1–3 sessions per area, depending on assessment |
| Treatment Areas | Abdomen, waist, flanks, back, thighs and upper arms |
| Safety Features | Automatic temperature control, protective membranes and safety monitoring |
| Control Interface | Digital display with preset cryolipolysis programs |
| Power Supply | 110V–240V |
| Warranty | Three-year parts warranty |
| Support | Professional training and lifetime technical support |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
What Is Included?
The package includes the main cryolipolysis system, treatment applicators and required operating accessories.
Standard Equipment
-
One 360 Cryolipolysis control system
-
Multiple treatment applicators
-
Applicator connection components
-
Protective antifreeze membranes
-
Required treatment accessories
-
Power cable
-
English user manual
-
Operating guidance
Documentation and Training
-
English operating manual
-
Remote professional training
-
Machine setup guidance
-
Applicator installation instructions
-
Treatment-area assessment guidance
-
Cooling and suction parameter guidance
-
Protective-membrane instructions
-
Safety and contraindication information
-
Cleaning and maintenance guidance
-
Basic troubleshooting assistance
-
Training certificate after completion
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides remote guidance to help buyers understand:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Applicator installation
-
Digital-control operation
-
Applicator-size selection
-
Cooling-temperature adjustment
-
Suction-level selection
-
Treatment-area assessment
-
Protective-membrane application
-
Basic body-contouring protocols
-
Cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Safety procedures
-
Basic troubleshooting
A professional training certificate is provided after completion.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty 360 Cryolipolysis Machine is supported by a three-year parts warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered:
-
Main machine unit
-
Internal electronic components
-
Digital display and control system
-
Internal cooling components
-
Original treatment applicators
-
Applicator connection components
-
Other eligible parts supplied with the machine
Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the Wikbeauty support team will assist with:
-
Remote inspection and fault identification
-
Guided troubleshooting
-
Confirmation of the affected component
-
Replacement-part assistance when covered
-
Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Damage caused by misuse
-
Incorrect applicator operation
-
Unauthorized repairs or modifications
-
Incorrect voltage or electrical connection
-
Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance
-
Normal wear of membranes and consumable items
-
Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual
-
Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization
The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service.
Full coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy.
Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional cryolipolysis equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel.
A complete consultation, tissue assessment and contraindication review must be completed before treatment.
Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Cryoglobulinemia
-
Cold agglutinin disease
-
Paroxysmal cold hemoglobinuria
-
Severe cold sensitivity
-
Raynaud’s disease
-
Uncontrolled cardiovascular conditions
-
Severe circulation disorders
-
Open wounds or active infections
-
Severe skin conditions in the treatment area
-
Impaired sensation
-
Bleeding disorders
-
Recent surgery
-
Hernia in or near the treatment area
-
Other contraindications listed in the operating manual
The protective antifreeze membrane must be positioned correctly before cooling begins. The skin and applicator contact must be monitored throughout the session.
Possible treatment responses include temporary redness, bruising, swelling, firmness, tenderness, cramping, tingling, numbness and changes in skin sensitivity.
This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain.
Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for:
-
Medical spas
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Body-contouring studios
-
Professional beauty centers
-
Wellness clinics
-
Trained body-contouring practitioners
-
Qualified healthcare professionals
-
Businesses expanding their non-invasive body services
This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty 360 Cryolipolysis Machine?
Treat Multiple Body Areas
Multiple applicator sizes support professional treatments for the abdomen, waist, flanks, back, thighs and upper arms.
Provide Consistent Cooling Coverage
The 360-degree applicator design distributes cooling across the selected treatment area for consistent professional application.
Customize Every Treatment
Adjustable cooling, suction, duration and applicator selection allow treatments to be adapted to tissue condition and professional objectives.
Expand Your Service Menu
The system allows clinics to add non-invasive body-contouring treatments, multi-area packages and customized treatment programs.
Protect Your Investment
The system includes a three-year parts warranty, professional training, a training certificate and lifetime technical support.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is cryolipolysis?
Cryolipolysis is a non-invasive body-contouring treatment that applies controlled cooling to suitable localized fat tissue. The body gradually processes affected cells following treatment.
What does 360-degree cooling mean?
The applicator distributes cooling around the treatment surface, providing consistent coverage across the selected localized area.
Which body areas can be treated?
Suitable areas may include the abdomen, waist, flanks, upper and lower back, inner and outer thighs and upper arms.
How long does a treatment take?
A typical session lasts approximately 30–60 minutes per treatment area. The exact duration depends on the applicator, treatment zone and professional protocol.
How many sessions are recommended?
A professional treatment course may include approximately 1–3 sessions per area, commonly spaced several weeks apart. The final protocol depends on tissue condition, treatment goals and individual response.
When may clients notice changes?
Changes may develop gradually over several weeks as the body processes the affected cells. The result and timeline vary according to the treatment area, tissue thickness and individual response.
Is cryolipolysis uncomfortable?
Clients commonly feel cold, pulling or pressure when treatment begins, followed by temporary numbness. Tenderness, bruising or sensitivity may occur after treatment.
Is there downtime?
Many suitable clients can resume normal activities shortly after treatment. Temporary redness, swelling, bruising, tenderness or numbness may occur.
Are results permanent?
Affected fat cells processed by the body do not regenerate in the same way. However, remaining fat cells can enlarge with future weight gain, so stable weight and healthy lifestyle habits remain important.
Is professional training included?
Remote professional training and operating guidance are included. A professional training certificate is provided after completion.
What does the three-year warranty cover?
The three-year parts warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Consumables, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded.
Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included.
Add Professional Cryolipolysis to Your Business
The Wikbeauty 360 Cryolipolysis Machine combines:
-
360-degree controlled cooling
-
Multiple professional applicator sizes
-
Adjustable 5°C to −11°C temperature settings
-
Professional multi-area body-contouring applications
-
Three-year parts warranty and lifetime support
Contact Wikbeauty to order the system or receive more information about its applicators, treatment protocols and professional training.
Order Your 360 Cryolipolysis Machine and Request a Quote
Receives in 8 days.
$2,500.00
Professional 360° Cryolipolysis Fat-Freezing System
Surround Cooling Technology for Dual-Area Fat Reduction and Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty 360 Fat Freezing Cryolipolysis Machine is a professional body-contouring system developed for controlled fat-freezing treatments across multiple body areas.
Its 360° applicators distribute cooling around the treatment chamber rather than limiting cooling to two contact surfaces. This design supports consistent temperature distribution across suitable tissue held inside the applicator.
With adjustable temperatures from 5°C to −15°C, dual-handle operation, multiple applicator sizes, real-time temperature monitoring, and a 10–12-inch intelligent touchscreen, the system is suitable for slimming clinics, beauty salons, medical spas, and wellness centers.
360° surround cooling | Dual-handle operation | 5°C to −15°C range | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Functions on One Platform
360° Surround Cooling
The applicator delivers controlled cooling around suitable subcutaneous tissue held within the treatment chamber.
Common applications include:
-
Abdomen treatments
-
Waist and flank contouring
-
Upper-arm programs
-
Inner- and outer-thigh treatments
-
Back and bra-line treatments
-
Suitable submental-area treatments
Dual-Handle Cryolipolysis
Two handles can operate during the same appointment, supporting simultaneous treatment of two suitable areas.
Common benefits include:
-
Two-area treatment capability
-
Bilateral body treatments
-
Customized applicator combinations
-
Improved clinic scheduling
-
Flexible body-contouring programs
-
Efficient professional operation
Intelligent Temperature and Safety Control
The system combines adjustable cooling with real-time monitoring and skin-protection measures.
Common features include:
-
Adjustable cooling temperature
-
Real-time temperature monitoring
-
Intelligent treatment protocols
-
Antifreeze membrane protection
-
Automatic safety controls
-
Touchscreen parameter management
Select the Right Program for Each Client
Abdomen and Waist Program
Uses appropriately sized applicators for suitable abdominal, waist, or flank tissue.
Recommended applications:
-
Upper-abdomen treatments
-
Lower-abdomen treatments
-
Waistline contouring
-
Flank and love-handle areas
-
General midsection programs
Recommended for:
-
Clients with suitable pinchable subcutaneous fat
-
Clients seeking non-invasive midsection contouring
-
Clients with stable and realistic treatment goals
Arms and Back Program
Uses suitable small or medium applicators for upper-arm, underarm, back, or bra-line areas.
Recommended applications:
-
Upper-arm contouring
-
Underarm-area treatments
-
Upper-back programs
-
Lower-back contouring
-
Bra-line treatments
Recommended for:
-
Clients concerned about localized upper-body areas
-
Clients suitable for controlled cooling
-
Clients seeking targeted body contouring
Thigh and Buttock Program
Uses suitable applicators for professionally assessed inner-thigh, outer-thigh, or lower-buttock areas.
Recommended applications:
-
Inner-thigh contouring
-
Outer-thigh treatments
-
Upper-leg body contouring
-
Lower-buttock fold treatments
-
Bilateral lower-body programs
Recommended for:
-
Clients with suitable thigh-area tissue
-
Clients seeking lower-body contouring
-
Clients receiving bilateral treatment plans
Submental and Follow-Up Program
Uses a suitable small applicator for professionally assessed submental areas or provides additional treatment after reassessment.
Recommended applications:
-
Double-chin-area contouring
-
Small localized areas
-
Follow-up treatments
-
Multi-area treatment planning
-
Long-term body-contouring support
Recommended for:
-
Clients with suitable submental tissue
-
Clients completing an initial treatment
-
Clients requiring professionally assessed follow-up care
Adjustable Cooling and Treatment Settings
The Wikbeauty 360 Fat Freezing Cryolipolysis Machine allows practitioners to personalize treatments according to the applicator, body area, tissue condition, and client tolerance.
| Setting | Available Configuration | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| Technology | 360° surround cryolipolysis | Controlled fat-freezing treatment |
| Cooling Range | 5°C to −15°C | Adjustable treatment temperature |
| Handle Operation | Dual handle | Simultaneous two-area treatment |
| Applicators | Multiple sizes | Different body and submental areas |
| Session Duration | Approximately 30–60 minutes per area | Customized treatment planning |
| Treatment Course | Commonly one to three sessions per area | Progressive body-contouring program |
| Temperature Monitoring | Real-time | Treatment safety and consistency |
| Control System | 10–12-inch touchscreen | Protocol and parameter management |
Temperature, suction, and treatment duration should be selected according to the applicator, tissue thickness, skin condition, client response, and supplied protocols.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Abdomen, Waist, and Flanks
Different applicator sizes support controlled cooling across suitable midsection areas.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Upper-abdomen contouring
-
Lower-abdomen contouring
-
Waistline definition
-
Love-handle treatments
-
General midsection shaping
Arms, Back, and Buttocks
Suitable applicators can be selected for localized upper-body and posterior body areas.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Upper-arm contouring
-
Bra-line treatments
-
Upper- and lower-back areas
-
Lower-buttock fold treatments
-
Localized body shaping
Thighs and Double Chin
Small, medium, or specialized applicators support professionally assessed lower-body and submental treatments.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Inner-thigh contouring
-
Outer-thigh treatments
-
Upper-leg shaping
-
Double-chin-area contouring
-
Bilateral body treatments
Professional Treatment Applications
| Treatment Area | Primary Objective | Recommended Applicator |
|---|---|---|
| Abdomen | Localized midsection contouring | Medium or large applicator |
| Waist and Flanks | Waistline and love-handle treatment | Suitable curved applicator |
| Upper Arms | Localized arm contouring | Small or medium applicator |
| Back and Bra Line | Targeted back-area treatment | Suitable medium applicator |
| Inner Thighs | Lower-body contouring | Small or medium applicator |
| Outer Thighs | Thigh-area body contouring | Suitable applicator |
| Buttock Fold | Localized contouring | Small or curved applicator |
| Double Chin | Submental-area treatment | Specialized small applicator |
Applicator availability and final configuration depend on the selected machine package.
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, body-contouring objectives, target areas, previous procedures, skin condition, and possible contraindications. Confirm that the selected areas contain suitable tissue for cryolipolysis.
Step 2: Area and Applicator Selection
Mark one or two treatment areas and select applicators that match the tissue size, shape, and anatomical location.
Step 3: Skin Protection and Placement
Apply a new approved antifreeze membrane correctly over each complete treatment area. Position the applicators and adjust suction according to the supplied protocol.
Step 4: Controlled Cooling Treatment
Begin the selected cooling program for approximately 30–60 minutes. Monitor temperature, applicator seals, skin condition, and client comfort throughout the session.
Step 5: Treatment Completion
Remove the applicators and protective membranes, inspect the skin, and perform the recommended post-treatment massage when appropriate. Document the settings and provide aftercare guidance.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Wikbeauty 360 Fat Freezing Cryolipolysis Machine combines surround cooling, dual-handle operation, and intelligent safety controls.
Key advantages include:
-
Professional 360° cryolipolysis technology
-
Surround cooling within the applicator chamber
-
Adjustable cooling from 5°C to −15°C
-
Dual-handle operation
-
Simultaneous two-area treatment
-
Multiple applicator sizes
-
Treatments for several body areas
-
10–12-inch intelligent touchscreen
-
Real-time temperature monitoring
-
Antifreeze membrane protection
-
Approximately 30–60-minute sessions
-
110V and 220V compatibility
-
CE and ISO certificates
-
Three-year professional warranty
-
Professional training and ongoing support
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty 360 Fat Freezing Cryolipolysis Machine |
| Technology | 360° surround cooling cryolipolysis |
| Cooling Range | 5°C to −15°C adjustable |
| Handle Operation | Dual handle |
| Treatment Applicators | Multiple sizes, package-dependent |
| Primary Functions | Non-invasive fat reduction and body contouring |
| Treatment Areas | Double chin, arms, waist, abdomen, thighs, back, and buttocks |
| Session Duration | Approximately 30–60 minutes per area |
| Recommended Course | Commonly one to three sessions per area |
| Treatment Interval | Approximately four to six weeks |
| Results Timeline | Progressive changes over approximately three to twelve weeks |
| Display | 10–12-inch intelligent touchscreen |
| Temperature Monitoring | Real-time |
| Safety Features | Antifreeze membrane protection and intelligent controls |
| Power Supply | 110V or 220V |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
| Warranty | Three-year professional warranty |
| Support | Professional training and ongoing technical assistance |
The supplied product information lists potential fat-reduction figures of 20–40% per treated area. These figures should not be presented as guaranteed outcomes because individual results vary.
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty 360 Fat Freezing Cryolipolysis main unit
-
Multiple 360° cooling applicators according to the selected package
-
Dual-handle connection system
-
Applicator connection hoses
-
Applicator-positioning accessories
-
10–12-inch intelligent touchscreen
-
Real-time temperature-monitoring system
-
Antifreeze membranes and gel starter supply
-
1 × Region-compatible power cable
-
Standard machine accessories
-
Warranty card
The exact number, size, and shape of included applicators should follow the selected machine configuration.
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Installation and operating guide
-
Safety and maintenance instructions
-
Professional video training
-
360° applicator-selection guidance
-
Dual-handle operation guidance
-
Cooling-temperature guidance
-
Suction-adjustment guidance
-
Body-area treatment protocols
-
Submental-treatment guidance
-
Client-consultation materials
-
Aftercare instructions
-
Cleaning and maintenance guidance
-
Professional training certificate
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty 360 Fat Freezing Cryolipolysis Machine includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use the system safely and consistently.
Training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen operation
-
Client consultation and screening
-
Tissue and treatment-area assessment
-
Applicator selection
-
Dual-handle treatment planning
-
Correct antifreeze membrane placement
-
Suction adjustment
-
Cooling-temperature selection
-
Treatment-duration selection
-
Body and submental protocols
-
Client monitoring
-
Post-treatment massage
-
Aftercare guidance
-
Equipment cleaning and maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty 360 Fat Freezing Cryolipolysis Machine includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period.
Antifreeze membranes, gels, applicator seals, hoses, filters, and other components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement.
Technical Support Process
-
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team.
-
Provide the machine model and order information.
-
Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested.
-
A technician will assess the reported issue remotely.
-
Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged.
-
Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable accessories, cold injury caused by incorrect membrane placement or operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual.
Safety and Contraindications
A detailed consultation and health-history review must be completed before every treatment. Cryolipolysis should only be performed by appropriately trained professionals.
Treatment may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or breastfeeding
-
Cryoglobulinemia
-
Cold agglutinin disease
-
Paroxysmal cold hemoglobinuria
-
Severe cold sensitivity or cold urticaria
-
Raynaud’s disease or serious circulation disorders
-
Active hernia within or near the treatment area
-
Active infection or open wounds
-
Severe skin conditions within the treatment area
-
Reduced or impaired sensation
-
Recent surgery within the treatment area
-
Serious liver or kidney conditions
-
Blood-clotting disorders
-
Medical conditions requiring physician supervision
The system is intended for suitable subcutaneous fat and should not be presented as a treatment for obesity or as a replacement for weight management.
Cryolipolysis carries risks, including cold injury, prolonged numbness, bruising, contour irregularity, pain, and rare paradoxical adipose hyperplasia. Clients must receive appropriate risk information and provide informed consent.
Operating Precautions
-
Inspect the machine, applicators, hoses, seals, and accessories before use.
-
Confirm client suitability before every treatment.
-
Select the correct applicator for each treatment area.
-
Use a new approved antifreeze membrane for every applicator.
-
Ensure each membrane covers the complete cooling area.
-
Begin with professionally selected cooling and suction settings.
-
Monitor temperature, applicator contact, skin condition, and client comfort.
-
Continuously monitor both areas during dual-handle operation.
-
Do not treat prohibited or unsuitable anatomical areas.
-
Never reuse a single-use antifreeze membrane.
-
Record applicators, temperatures, suction, duration, and treatment areas.
-
Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client.
-
Follow the supplied maintenance schedule.
-
Stop treatment if unexpected pain or skin changes occur.
Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty 360 Fat Freezing Cryolipolysis Machine is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in:
-
Slimming clinics
-
Body-contouring centers
-
Medical spas
-
Beauty salons
-
Wellness centers
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Professional spas
-
Physiotherapy and recovery centers
Operators should review applicable local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before providing cryolipolysis treatments.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty 360 Fat Freezing Cryolipolysis Machine?
360° Surround Cooling
The applicator distributes controlled cooling around suitable tissue held within the treatment chamber.
Dual-Handle Operation
Two applicators can support simultaneous treatment of two suitable areas during one professionally monitored appointment.
Multiple Applicator Options
Different applicator sizes support customized treatments for the abdomen, waist, arms, thighs, back, buttocks, and suitable submental areas.
Intelligent Safety Controls
Real-time temperature monitoring, antifreeze membranes, touchscreen settings, and intelligent protection features support professional operation.
Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating training, applicator guidance, dual-handle protocols, CE and ISO certificates, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty 360 Fat Freezing Cryolipolysis Machine?
It is a professional controlled-cooling system with 360° applicators, dual-handle operation, and multiple applicator sizes for non-invasive body-contouring treatments.
How does 360° cryolipolysis differ from two-sided cooling?
A 360° applicator distributes cooling around the tissue held inside its treatment chamber, while a traditional applicator may cool primarily from limited contact surfaces.
Does 360° cooling guarantee better results?
No. Treatment outcomes depend on applicator fit, tissue suitability, temperature, duration, membrane placement, number of sessions, and individual response.
Can two areas be treated simultaneously?
Yes. The dual-handle system supports treatment of two suitable areas during the same appointment. Both areas require correct membrane placement and continuous monitoring.
What cooling temperatures are available?
The machine provides adjustable cooling from 5°C to −15°C.
Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the abdomen, waist, flanks, upper arms, thighs, back, buttock fold, and suitable double-chin areas.
How long does one treatment take?
A standard treatment takes approximately 30–60 minutes per area, depending on the applicator and selected protocol.
How many sessions are recommended?
One to three sessions per area, commonly spaced four to six weeks apart. The final plan should follow professional reassessment.
When may clients notice changes?
Thet visible changes may begin after approximately three to four weeks, with progressive changes developing over eight to twelve weeks.
Is the treatment painful?
Clients commonly experience suction, strong cooling, pulling, and temporary numbness. Some clients may experience temporary discomfort during or after treatment.
Is there downtime?
Many clients can resume normal activities after treatment. Temporary redness, swelling, bruising, tenderness, tingling, cramping, or numbness may occur.
Are treated fat cells permanently removed?
Fat cells processed after treatment do not regenerate in the same way. However, remaining fat cells can enlarge with weight gain, and individual contour changes are not guaranteed to be permanent.
Is cryolipolysis a weight-loss treatment?
No. Cryolipolysis is intended for localized body contouring and is not a treatment for obesity or a replacement for balanced nutrition and exercise.
What results are supplied for this machine?
The supplied information lists potential fat-reduction figures of 20–40% in treated areas. These figures are not guaranteed and vary by client and protocol.
What is an antifreeze membrane?
It is a protective barrier applied between the skin and cooling applicator. Correct placement and complete coverage are essential to reduce the risk of cold injury.
Are results guaranteed?
No. Results vary according to tissue thickness, applicator fit, treatment settings, number of sessions, body composition, lifestyle, and individual response.
What certificates are included?
The machine includes CE and ISO certificates.
What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues.
Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers machine operation, client screening, applicator selection, dual-handle use, membrane placement, cooling and suction settings, aftercare, cleaning, maintenance, and troubleshooting.
Add Professional 360° Cryolipolysis to Your Business
The Wikbeauty 360 Fat Freezing Cryolipolysis Machine enables slimming clinics, medical spas, and body-contouring professionals to provide dual-area controlled fat-freezing treatments.
Five key benefits:
-
360° surround cooling applicator technology
-
Dual-handle operation for simultaneous two-area treatment
-
Adjustable cooling from 5°C to −15°C
-
Real-time temperature monitoring and antifreeze membrane protection
-
CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, applicator configuration, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Receives in 8 days.
$3,999.00
Professional Four-Handle NEO EMShape Body-Sculpting System
Straight and Curved Electromagnetic Applicators for Muscle Conditioning and Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine is a professional body-sculpting system developed for electromagnetic muscle conditioning, fat-reduction support, and improved definition across multiple body areas.
The system combines EMShape electromagnetic technology with four ergonomic applicators: two straight handles for conventional placement and two curved handles designed for improved contact across contoured anatomical areas.
With approximately 20,000 contractions per session, adjustable treatment settings, a 12-inch intelligent touchscreen, air-and-water cooling, and a professional vertical design, the machine is suitable for body-sculpting clinics, medical spas, slimming centers, fitness facilities, and wellness studios.
EMShape technology | Two straight and two curved handles | Vertical design | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Functions on One Platform
EMShape Electromagnetic Muscle Stimulation
EMShape technology delivers high-intensity electromagnetic energy to targeted muscle groups, producing repeated involuntary contractions throughout the treatment program.
Common applications include:
-
Abdominal muscle conditioning
-
Buttock muscle stimulation
-
Thigh muscle conditioning
-
Upper-arm toning
-
Waistline definition
-
Calf muscle stimulation
Straight and Curved Applicator Treatment
The system includes two straight and two curved handles for different body shapes and placement requirements.
Common benefits include:
-
Conventional straight-handle placement
-
Improved contact on curved body areas
-
Focused muscle stimulation
-
Bilateral treatment capability
-
Multi-area treatment flexibility
-
Customized applicator positioning
Multi-Area Body Contouring
Four applicators can be positioned across suitable muscle groups according to the client’s anatomy and treatment objectives.
Common applications include:
-
Abdomen and thigh treatments
-
Arms and abdomen
-
Buttocks and thighs
-
Waistline and love-handle areas
-
Bilateral calf treatments
-
Customized multi-area programs
Select the Right Program for Each Client
Abdominal and Waistline Program
Uses suitable straight or curved applicators to stimulate abdominal muscles and support midsection definition.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdominal muscle conditioning
-
Core-area stimulation
-
Waistline sculpting
-
Love-handle-area programs
-
General midsection definition
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking improved abdominal tone
-
Fitness clients wanting additional muscle stimulation
-
Clients following healthy lifestyle programs
Buttock and Thigh Program
Positions multiple applicators over suitable buttock and thigh muscle areas for lower-body treatment.
Recommended applications:
-
Buttock muscle stimulation
-
Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning
-
Bilateral lower-body treatments
-
Shape-enhancement programs
-
Lower-body definition
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking improved buttock or thigh tone
-
Clients combining treatment with exercise
-
Clients receiving comprehensive lower-body programs
Arm and Calf Program
Uses the available applicators for suitable upper-arm and calf muscle-conditioning programs.
Recommended applications:
-
Upper-arm muscle stimulation
-
Biceps and triceps conditioning
-
Calf muscle stimulation
-
Bilateral limb treatments
-
Improved-looking muscle definition
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking improved arm or calf tone
-
Fitness and body-contouring clients
-
Clients requiring smaller-area placement
Multi-Area Maintenance Program
Provides periodic treatment after completion of the client’s initial NEO EMSlim course.
Recommended applications:
-
Muscle-tone maintenance
-
Body-contour maintenance
-
Multi-area conditioning
-
Fitness-program support
-
Seasonal body-sculpting treatments
Recommended for:
-
Returning NEO EMSlim clients
-
Clients completing six to eight initial sessions
-
Clients combining treatment with regular exercise
Adjustable Energy and Treatment Settings
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine allows practitioners to customize treatments according to applicator type, body area, client tolerance, and professional protocol.
| Setting | Available Configuration | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| Technology | EMShape electromagnetic stimulation | Muscle-conditioning treatments |
| Treatment Handles | Four | Multi-area treatment capability |
| Straight Handles | Two | Conventional and precise placement |
| Curved Handles | Two | Contoured and ergonomic placement |
| Contractions per Session | Approximately 20,000 | Intensive muscle activation |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–30 minutes | Efficient treatment scheduling |
| Treatment Course | Six to eight sessions | Structured body-sculpting program |
| Energy Intensity | Adjustable | Personalized client comfort |
| Cooling System | Air and water circulation | Supports continuous operation |
Settings should be increased progressively according to client comfort, muscle response, treatment objectives, and the supplied operating protocols.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Abdomen and Waistline
Straight or curved handles can be positioned over suitable abdominal and waist muscle groups for focused or combined treatments.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Abdominal muscle activation
-
Core-area conditioning
-
Waistline definition
-
Love-handle-area treatment
-
Multi-zone midsection sculpting
Buttocks and Thighs
Curved and straight applicators support customized placement across suitable lower-body areas.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Buttock muscle stimulation
-
Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning
-
Bilateral lower-body treatment
-
Improved-looking definition
-
Lower-body sculpting
Arms and Calves
The applicator selection supports suitable upper-arm and lower-leg treatment programs.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Upper-arm muscle stimulation
-
Arm definition
-
Calf muscle conditioning
-
Bilateral limb treatment
-
Customized smaller-area programs
Professional Treatment Applications
| Treatment Area | Primary Objective | Recommended Applicator Configuration |
|---|---|---|
| Abdomen | Muscle conditioning and midsection definition | Straight or curved handles |
| Waistline | Contouring and core-area stimulation | Curved-handle placement |
| Love Handles | Side-body conditioning | Curved-handle placement |
| Buttocks | Toning and shape-enhancement support | Bilateral curved or straight handles |
| Inner and Outer Thighs | Lower-body conditioning | Suitable bilateral placement |
| Upper Arms | Arm muscle stimulation and definition | Straight handles |
| Calves | Lower-leg muscle conditioning | Suitable straight or curved handles |
| Multiple Areas | Comprehensive body-sculpting program | Up to four handles |
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, fitness level, target areas, body-sculpting objectives, previous procedures, and possible contraindications. Explain the treatment sensation and establish realistic expectations.
Step 2: Applicator Selection and Placement
Select straight or curved handles according to the treatment area and client anatomy. Position and secure the applicators over suitable muscle groups.
Step 3: Treatment Preparation
Choose the appropriate program and begin with conservative energy settings. Adjust the intensity according to the body area, client comfort, and muscle response.
Step 4: EMShape Treatment
The system delivers electromagnetic energy for approximately 20–30 minutes. Monitor the client’s comfort, muscle response, and applicator position throughout the session.
Step 5: Treatment Completion
Stop the program, remove the applicators, inspect the treatment areas, document the selected settings, and provide suitable hydration, recovery, or lifestyle recommendations.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine combines EMShape technology with straight and curved applicator options.
Key advantages include:
-
Professional EMShape technology
-
Four ergonomic treatment handles
-
Two straight applicators
-
Two curved applicators
-
Approximately 20,000 contractions per session
-
Focused, bilateral, and multi-area configurations
-
Treatments for the abdomen, thighs, arms, buttocks, waistline, and calves
-
Vertical professional design
-
Adjustable energy intensity
-
12-inch intelligent touchscreen
-
Air-and-water circulation cooling
-
Approximately 20–30-minute sessions
-
Six- to eight-session treatment programs
-
110V and 220V compatibility
-
CE and ISO certificates
-
Three-year professional warranty
-
Professional training and ongoing support
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine |
| Technology | HI-EMT with EMShape technology |
| Design | Vertical tower |
| Treatment Handles | Four ergonomic applicators |
| Straight Handles | Two |
| Curved Handles | Two |
| Contractions per Session | Approximately 20,000 |
| Primary Functions | Muscle conditioning and body contouring |
| Supplied Performance Figures | Up to 30% increased muscle definition and 20% fat reduction |
| Treatment Areas | Abdomen, thighs, arms, buttocks, waistline, love handles, and calves |
| Treatment Configuration | Focused, bilateral, or multi-area |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–30 minutes |
| Recommended Course | Six to eight sessions |
| Recommended Frequency | Commonly twice weekly |
| Energy Intensity | Adjustable |
| Cooling System | Air and water circulation |
| Display | 12-inch intelligent touchscreen |
| Power Supply | 110V or 220V |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
| Warranty | Three-year professional warranty |
| Support | Professional training and ongoing technical assistance |
Performance figures are supplied product claims and should not be presented as guaranteed outcomes. Individual results vary.
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim main unit
-
2 × Straight EMShape treatment applicators
-
2 × Curved EMShape treatment applicators
-
Applicator connection cables
-
Applicator-positioning accessories
-
12-inch intelligent touchscreen control system
-
Adjustable energy controls
-
Air-and-water circulation cooling system
-
1 × Region-compatible power cable
-
Standard machine accessories
-
Warranty card
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Installation and operating guide
-
Safety and maintenance instructions
-
Professional video training
-
Straight-handle placement guidance
-
Curved-handle placement guidance
-
Energy-adjustment guidance
-
Abdominal and waistline protocols
-
Arm-treatment protocols
-
Buttock-treatment protocols
-
Thigh-treatment protocols
-
Calf-treatment protocols
-
Multi-area treatment guidance
-
Client-consultation materials
-
Post-treatment guidance
-
Professional training certificate
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use the system safely and consistently.
Training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen operation
-
Client consultation and screening
-
Treatment-area assessment
-
Straight-handle placement
-
Curved-handle placement
-
Applicator selection by body area
-
Energy-level adjustment
-
Abdominal and waistline protocols
-
Arm-treatment protocols
-
Buttock-treatment protocols
-
Thigh-treatment protocols
-
Calf-treatment protocols
-
Multi-area treatment planning
-
Client monitoring
-
Post-treatment guidance
-
Cooling-system maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period.
Applicator covers, straps, cables, connectors, cooling-system fluids, and other components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement.
Technical Support Process
-
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team.
-
Provide the machine model and order information.
-
Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested.
-
A technician will assess the reported issue remotely.
-
Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged.
-
Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable accessories, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper cooling-system maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual.
Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation and health-history review should be completed before every treatment. The machine should only be operated by appropriately trained professionals.
Treatment may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Metal implants within or near the treatment area
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Cardiac rhythm disorders
-
Epilepsy or seizure disorders
-
Active muscle injury
-
Severe inflammation
-
Open wounds within the treatment area
-
Recent surgery within the treatment area
-
Serious neurological or muscular conditions
-
Reduced or impaired sensation
-
Medical conditions requiring physician supervision
Clients with recent surgery should receive appropriate professional or medical clearance before treatment.
Do not position applicators over the head, neck, chest, heart, spine, reproductive organs, bones, joints, or other prohibited areas identified in the operating manual.
Operating Precautions
-
Inspect the machine, applicators, cables, straps, and accessories before use.
-
Check the air-and-water cooling system before operation.
-
Remove metal objects from each treatment area.
-
Select the correct straight or curved applicator.
-
Confirm correct applicator placement before activation.
-
Secure all handles according to the supplied instructions.
-
Begin with conservative energy levels.
-
Increase intensity progressively according to client comfort.
-
Monitor muscle response and client condition throughout treatment.
-
Do not position applicators over prohibited anatomical areas.
-
Record applicator type, treatment area, duration, and energy settings.
-
Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client.
-
Follow the supplied maintenance schedule.
-
Stop treatment if unexpected pain or discomfort occurs.
Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in:
-
Premium body-sculpting clinics
-
Medical spas
-
Slimming centers
-
Aesthetic salons
-
Fitness facilities
-
Gyms
-
Wellness centers
-
Professional body-contouring studios
Operators should review applicable local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering EMShape or HI-EMT treatments.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine?
Straight and Curved Applicators
Two straight and two curved handles support customized placement across different body shapes and treatment areas.
Professional EMShape Technology
The system provides approximately 20,000 electromagnetic muscle contractions during a professional treatment session.
Multiple Treatment Areas
One machine supports customized programs for the abdomen, thighs, arms, buttocks, waistline, love handles, and calves.
Professional Cooling and Controls
The 12-inch touchscreen and combined air-and-water cooling system support efficient professional operation.
Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating training, straight- and curved-handle guidance, treatment protocols, CE and ISO certificates, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine?
It is a professional electromagnetic body-sculpting system with two straight and two curved applicators.
What is EMShape technology?
EMShape is the supplied electromagnetic muscle-stimulation technology used by this system to produce repeated involuntary muscle contractions.
What is different about the curved handles?
The curved applicators are designed to improve placement and contact across suitable contoured body areas. Correct selection depends on the client’s anatomy and treatment area.
Do curved handles guarantee deeper muscle engagement?
No. Treatment depth and response depend on the electromagnetic output, applicator position, client anatomy, settings, and individual response.
How many applicators are included?
The package includes four handles: two straight applicators and two curved applicators.
Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the abdomen, thighs, arms, buttocks, waistline, love handles, and calves.
Can all four handles be used simultaneously?
The four-handle system supports suitable multi-area operation according to the selected protocol and machine configuration.
How long does one session take?
A standard treatment takes approximately 20–30 minutes.
How many sessions are recommended?
The supplied protocol recommends six to eight sessions, commonly scheduled twice weekly with appropriate recovery time between treatments.
What does the treatment feel like?
Clients experience strong, repeated muscle contractions. Energy levels can be increased progressively according to individual comfort and muscle response.
Is there downtime?
Clients can generally continue normal daily activities after treatment. Temporary muscle fatigue or soreness similar to that experienced after exercise may occur.
Can EMShape replace regular exercise?
EMShape treatments should complement rather than replace regular exercise, balanced nutrition, and healthy lifestyle habits.
When may clients notice changes?
Some clients may notice increased muscle activation during the initial sessions. Visible changes vary and may develop progressively during and after the treatment course.
What performance figures are supplied?
The muscle-definition improvement of up to 30% and fat reduction of up to 20%. These figures are not guaranteed outcomes.
How long can results last?
A possible duration of six to twelve months with maintenance and healthy lifestyle habits. Individual longevity varies.
Are results guaranteed?
No. Results vary according to baseline muscle condition, body composition, applicator selection, treatment consistency, energy settings, diet, exercise, and individual response.
What cooling system does the machine use?
The machine uses combined air-and-water circulation cooling to support continuous professional operation.
What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates.
What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues.
Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers machine operation, client screening, straight- and curved-handle placement, energy adjustment, treatment protocols, safety, cooling-system maintenance, and troubleshooting.
Add Curved-Handle EMShape Body Sculpting to Your Business
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle NEO EMSlim Machine enables body-sculpting clinics, medical spas, and wellness professionals to provide customized electromagnetic muscle-conditioning treatments using straight and curved applicators.
Five key benefits:
-
Professional EMShape electromagnetic technology
-
Two straight and two curved ergonomic applicators
-
Approximately 20,000 contractions per session
-
A 12-inch touchscreen with air-and-water cooling
-
CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, applicator details, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Receives in 8 days.
$3,799.00
Professional Four-Handle Vertical HI-EMT Body-Sculpting System
Space-Saving Electromagnetic Technology for Multi-Area Muscle Conditioning and Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle Vertical EMSlim Machine is a professional body-sculpting system developed for electromagnetic muscle conditioning, body contouring, and improved definition across multiple treatment areas.
High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic Technology produces approximately 30,000 supramaximal muscle contractions during a 20–30-minute session. Its four ergonomic applicators support focused, bilateral, multi-area, or suitable dual-client treatments.
With a space-saving vertical tower design, adjustable energy settings, a 12-inch intelligent touchscreen, and combined air-and-water cooling, the system is suitable for body-contouring clinics, slimming salons, medical spas, physiotherapy centers, gyms, and wellness facilities.
HI-EMT technology | Four ergonomic handles | Vertical tower design | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Functions on One Platform
High-Intensity Electromagnetic Muscle Stimulation
HI-EMT technology delivers focused electromagnetic energy to targeted muscle groups, producing powerful involuntary contractions throughout the treatment program.
Common applications include:
-
Abdominal muscle conditioning
-
Buttock muscle stimulation
-
Thigh muscle conditioning
-
Upper-arm toning
-
Waistline definition
-
Professional fitness treatments
Multi-Area Body Contouring
Four applicators can be positioned across suitable muscle groups according to the client’s anatomy, treatment objectives, and selected protocol.
Common applications include:
-
Abdomen and thigh treatments
-
Arms and abdomen treatments
-
Buttocks and thighs
-
Waistline and abdomen
-
Bilateral muscle stimulation
-
Customized four-area programs
Flexible Professional Operation
The four-handle configuration supports one-client multi-area treatment or suitable dual-client operation.
Common benefits include:
-
Single-client focused treatment
-
Single-client multi-area treatment
-
Bilateral treatment capability
-
Suitable dual-client operation
-
Flexible applicator allocation
-
Efficient clinic scheduling
Select the Right Program for Each Client
Abdominal-Conditioning Program
Uses suitable applicator placement to stimulate the abdominal muscles and support improved midsection definition.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdominal muscle conditioning
-
Core-area stimulation
-
Midsection definition
-
Waistline sculpting
-
General abdominal programs
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking improved abdominal tone
-
Fitness clients wanting additional muscle stimulation
-
Clients following healthy lifestyle programs
Buttock and Thigh Program
Positions multiple applicators over suitable buttock and thigh muscle areas for bilateral lower-body treatment.
Recommended applications:
-
Buttock muscle stimulation
-
Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning
-
Bilateral lower-body treatments
-
Shape-enhancement programs
-
Lower-body definition
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking improved buttock or thigh tone
-
Clients combining treatment with exercise
-
Clients receiving comprehensive lower-body programs
Upper-Body and Multi-Area Program
Uses the four applicators for customized upper- and lower-body treatment combinations.
Recommended applications:
-
Upper-arm muscle stimulation
-
Abdomen and arm treatments
-
Waistline and abdomen
-
Buttocks and thighs
-
Customized multi-area treatment
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking improved arm definition
-
Clients with multiple body-conditioning objectives
-
Premium body-sculpting clients
Dual-Client or Maintenance Program
The applicators can be divided between two suitable clients or used for periodic maintenance following an initial course.
Recommended applications:
-
Simultaneous two-client treatments
-
Muscle-tone maintenance
-
Body-contour maintenance
-
Fitness-program support
-
Seasonal body-sculpting treatments
Recommended for:
-
High-volume professional facilities
-
Returning EMSlim clients
-
Clients completing four to six initial sessions
Each client requires individual consultation, screening, applicator placement, settings, documentation, and continuous professional monitoring.
Adjustable Energy and Treatment Settings
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle Vertical EMSlim Machine allows practitioners to customize treatments according to the selected body areas, client tolerance, and professional protocol.
| Setting | Available Configuration | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| Technology | HI-EMT | Focused electromagnetic muscle stimulation |
| Treatment Handles | Four | Focused, bilateral, multi-area, or dual-client treatment |
| Contractions per Session | Approximately 30,000 | Intensive muscle activation |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–30 minutes | Efficient treatment scheduling |
| Treatment Course | Four to six sessions | Structured body-sculpting program |
| Treatment Frequency | Commonly twice weekly | Progressive muscle conditioning |
| Energy Intensity | Adjustable | Personalized client comfort |
| Cooling System | Air and water circulation | Supports continuous professional operation |
Settings should be increased progressively according to client comfort, muscle response, treatment objectives, and the supplied operating protocols.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Abdomen and Waistline
Multiple handles can be positioned over suitable abdominal and waist muscle groups for focused or combined midsection treatments.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Abdominal muscle activation
-
Core-area conditioning
-
Waistline definition
-
Improved abdominal tone
-
Multi-zone midsection treatment
Buttocks and Thighs
The applicators support balanced lower-body treatments across suitable buttock and thigh muscle groups.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Buttock muscle stimulation
-
Inner- and outer-thigh conditioning
-
Bilateral lower-body treatments
-
Improved-looking definition
-
Lower-body body sculpting
Arms and Multiple Body Areas
Four handles allow professionals to create customized upper- and lower-body treatment combinations.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Upper-arm muscle stimulation
-
Arm definition
-
Simultaneous arm and abdomen treatment
-
Simultaneous thigh and buttock treatment
-
Customized multi-area programs
Professional Treatment Applications
| Treatment Area | Primary Objective | Recommended Configuration |
|---|---|---|
| Abdomen | Muscle conditioning and midsection definition | Two or more handles |
| Waistline | Contouring and core-area stimulation | Targeted or combined placement |
| Buttocks | Toning and shape-enhancement support | Bilateral handle placement |
| Inner Thighs | Lower-body conditioning | Bilateral treatment |
| Outer Thighs | Thigh definition and muscle stimulation | Bilateral treatment |
| Upper Arms | Arm muscle stimulation and definition | Bilateral treatment |
| Multiple Areas | Comprehensive body-sculpting program | Up to four handles |
| Dual Clients | Simultaneous independent treatment plans | Handles divided between two clients |
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review each client’s health history, fitness level, target areas, body-sculpting objectives, previous procedures, and possible contraindications. Explain the treatment sensation and establish realistic expectations.
Step 2: Applicator Placement
Select the treatment areas and position the applicators securely over suitable muscle groups. Correct placement is essential for balanced muscle stimulation.
Step 3: Treatment Preparation
Choose the appropriate treatment program and begin with conservative energy settings. Adjust the intensity according to the body area, client comfort, and muscle response.
Step 4: HI-EMT Treatment
The system delivers focused electromagnetic energy for approximately 20–30 minutes. Monitor every client’s comfort, muscle response, and applicator position throughout the session.
Step 5: Treatment Completion
Stop the program, remove the applicators, inspect the treatment areas, document the selected settings, and provide suitable hydration, recovery, or lifestyle recommendations.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle Vertical EMSlim Machine combines multi-area HI-EMT performance with a space-efficient professional tower design.
Key advantages include:
-
Professional HI-EMT technology
-
Four ergonomic treatment handles
-
Approximately 30,000 contractions per session
-
Focused, bilateral, and multi-area configurations
-
Suitable dual-client capability
-
Treatments for the abdomen, arms, thighs, buttocks, and waistline
-
Vertical space-saving construction
-
Adjustable energy intensity
-
12-inch intelligent touchscreen
-
Air-and-water circulation cooling
-
Approximately 20–30-minute sessions
-
Four- to six-session treatment programs
-
110V and 220V compatibility
-
CE and ISO certificates
-
Three-year professional warranty
-
Professional training and ongoing support
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty Four-Handle Vertical EMSlim Machine |
| Technology | High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic Technology |
| Design | Vertical standing tower |
| Treatment Handles | Four ergonomic applicators |
| Contractions per Session | Approximately 30,000 |
| Primary Functions | Muscle conditioning and body contouring |
| Supplied Performance Figures | Up to 15–20% muscle growth and 20–25% fat reduction |
| Treatment Areas | Abdomen, waistline, arms, thighs, and buttocks |
| Treatment Configuration | Focused, bilateral, multi-area, or suitable dual-client |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–30 minutes |
| Recommended Course | Four to six sessions |
| Recommended Frequency | Commonly twice weekly |
| Energy Intensity | Adjustable |
| Cooling System | Air and water circulation |
| Display | 12-inch intelligent touchscreen |
| Power Supply | 110V or 220V |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
| Warranty | Three-year professional warranty |
| Support | Professional training and ongoing technical assistance |
Performance figures are supplied product claims and should not be presented as guaranteed outcomes. Individual results vary.
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty Four-Handle Vertical EMSlim main unit
-
4 × Ergonomic HI-EMT treatment applicators
-
Applicator connection cables
-
Applicator-positioning accessories
-
12-inch intelligent touchscreen control system
-
Adjustable energy controls
-
Air-and-water circulation cooling system
-
1 × Region-compatible power cable
-
Standard machine accessories
-
Warranty card
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Installation and operating guide
-
Safety and maintenance instructions
-
Professional video training
-
Applicator-placement guidance
-
Energy-adjustment guidance
-
Abdominal treatment protocols
-
Waistline treatment protocols
-
Arm-treatment protocols
-
Buttock-treatment protocols
-
Thigh-treatment protocols
-
Multi-area and dual-client guidance
-
Client-consultation materials
-
Post-treatment guidance
-
Professional training certificate
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty Four-Handle Vertical EMSlim Machine includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use the system safely and consistently.
Training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen operation
-
Client consultation and screening
-
Treatment-area assessment
-
Correct applicator placement
-
Single-client multi-area operation
-
Suitable dual-client treatment setup
-
Energy-level adjustment
-
Abdominal and waistline protocols
-
Arm-treatment protocols
-
Buttock-treatment protocols
-
Thigh-treatment protocols
-
Multi-client monitoring
-
Post-treatment guidance
-
Cooling-system maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle Vertical EMSlim Machine includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period.
Applicator covers, straps, cables, connectors, cooling-system fluids, and other components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement.
Technical Support Process
-
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team.
-
Provide the machine model and order information.
-
Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested.
-
A technician will assess the reported issue remotely.
-
Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged.
-
Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable accessories, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper cooling-system maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual.
Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation and health-history review should be completed before every treatment. The machine should only be operated by appropriately trained professionals.
Treatment may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Metal implants within or near the treatment area
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Cardiac rhythm disorders
-
Epilepsy or seizure disorders
-
Active muscle injury
-
Severe inflammation
-
Open wounds within the treatment area
-
Recent surgery within the treatment area
-
Serious neurological or muscular conditions
-
Reduced or impaired sensation
-
Medical conditions requiring physician supervision
Clients with recent surgery should receive appropriate professional or medical clearance before treatment.
Do not position applicators over the head, neck, chest, heart, spine, reproductive organs, bones, joints, or other prohibited areas identified in the operating manual.
Operating Precautions
-
Inspect the machine, applicators, cables, straps, and accessories before use.
-
Check the air-and-water cooling system before operation.
-
Complete separate screening for every client.
-
Remove metal objects from each treatment area.
-
Confirm correct applicator placement before activation.
-
Secure all handles according to the supplied instructions.
-
Begin with conservative energy levels.
-
Increase intensity progressively according to client comfort.
-
Monitor muscle response and client condition throughout treatment.
-
Continuously monitor both clients during dual-client operation.
-
Do not position applicators over prohibited anatomical areas.
-
Record treatment areas, duration, and energy settings.
-
Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client.
-
Follow the supplied maintenance schedule.
-
Stop treatment if unexpected pain or discomfort occurs.
Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle Vertical EMSlim Machine is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in:
-
Body-sculpting clinics
-
Slimming salons
-
Medical spas
-
Wellness centers
-
Fitness centers
-
Gyms
-
Physiotherapy facilities
-
High-volume treatment centers
Operators should review applicable local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, staffing, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering HI-EMT or dual-client treatments.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty Four-Handle Vertical EMSlim Machine?
Space-Saving Vertical Design
The standing tower configuration reduces the required floor footprint while creating a professional equipment presentation.
Four Ergonomic Applicators
Four handles support focused, bilateral, multi-area, and suitable dual-client treatment programs.
Advanced HI-EMT Technology
The system provides approximately 30,000 electromagnetic muscle contractions during a professional treatment session.
Professional Cooling and Controls
The 12-inch touchscreen and combined air-and-water cooling system support efficient professional operation.
Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating training, applicator-placement guidance, treatment protocols, CE and ISO certificates, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty Four-Handle Vertical EMSlim Machine?
It is a professional HI-EMT body-sculpting system with four applicators and a space-saving vertical tower design.
What makes the vertical design different?
The vertical tower configuration is designed to reduce the machine’s floor footprint while maintaining four-handle treatment capability and a professional clinic appearance.
How does HI-EMT technology work?
The machine delivers focused electromagnetic energy to targeted muscle groups, producing repeated involuntary contractions during treatment.
How many applicators are included?
The package includes four ergonomic HI-EMT treatment handles.
Can all four handles be used on one client?
Yes. All four handles can be positioned across suitable treatment areas according to the client’s individual treatment plan.
Can two clients be treated simultaneously?
The supplied information describes dual-client capability. Each client requires individual screening, settings, applicator placement, documentation, and continuous monitoring.
Which areas can be treated?
Common treatment areas include the abdomen, waistline, arms, thighs, and buttocks.
How long does one session take?
A standard session takes approximately 20–30 minutes.
How many sessions are recommended?
The supplied protocol recommends four to six sessions, commonly scheduled twice weekly with appropriate recovery time between treatments.
What does the treatment feel like?
Clients experience strong, repeated muscle contractions. Energy levels can be increased progressively according to individual comfort and muscle response.
Is there downtime?
Clients can generally continue normal daily activities after treatment. Temporary muscle fatigue or soreness similar to that experienced following exercise may occur.
Can HI-EMT replace regular exercise?
HI-EMT treatments should complement rather than replace regular exercise, balanced nutrition, and healthy lifestyle habits.
When may clients notice changes?
Some clients may notice increased muscle activation during the initial sessions. Visible changes vary and may develop progressively during and after the treatment course.
What performance figures are supplied?
The supplied information lists potential muscle-growth figures of 15–20% and fat-reduction figures of 20–25%. These figures are not guaranteed outcomes.
How long can results last?
The supplied information indicates a possible duration of six to twelve months with maintenance and healthy lifestyle habits. Individual longevity varies.
Are results guaranteed?
No. Results vary according to baseline muscle condition, body composition, treatment consistency, energy settings, diet, exercise, and individual response.
What cooling system does the machine use?
The machine uses combined air-and-water circulation cooling to support continuous professional operation.
What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates.
What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues.
Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers machine operation, client screening, applicator placement, multi-area and dual-client protocols, energy adjustment, safety, cooling-system maintenance, and troubleshooting.
Add Vertical Multi-Area HI-EMT Body Sculpting to Your Business
The Wikbeauty Four-Handle Vertical EMSlim Machine enables body-sculpting clinics, medical spas, fitness centers, and wellness professionals to provide focused or multi-area muscle-conditioning treatments using a space-efficient platform.
Five key benefits:
-
Professional HI-EMT with approximately 30,000 contractions per session
-
Four ergonomic applicators for multi-area treatment
-
Space-saving vertical tower construction
-
A 12-inch touchscreen with air-and-water cooling
-
CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, package details, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Receives in 8 days.
From $1,799.00
Professional Gold 4D HIFU 4-in-1 System
Four Dedicated Technologies for Facial Lifting, Skin Refinement and Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty Gold 4D HIFU 4-in-1 Machine combines four professional aesthetic treatment handles within one premium desktop platform.
The system includes a multi-line 4D HIFU handle, a Single-Point HIFU and RF handle, a Skin Knife handle and a Thermal Shaping handle. Together, they support professional services focused on facial lifting, skin firming, contour refinement and non-invasive body treatments.
A 15-inch intelligent touchscreen, multiple cartridge depths and pre-programmed protocols provide trained operators with greater treatment flexibility from one compact system.
Four dedicated handles | 1.5–13 mm depth range | 15-inch touchscreen | Three-year warranty
Four Professional Technologies in One Machine
Multi-Line 4D HIFU Handle
The 4D HIFU handle delivers multiple treatment lines with each activation, supporting more efficient coverage than a conventional single-line HIFU system.
It includes facial and body cartridges ranging from 1.5 mm to 9.0 mm.
Facial cartridges:
-
1.5 mm
-
2.0 mm
-
3.0 mm
-
4.5 mm
Body cartridges:
-
6.0 mm
-
9.0 mm
The available depths allow trained operators to create protocols for facial skin firming, jawline definition, neck treatments and suitable body areas.
Single-Point HIFU and RF Handle
The Single-Point handle combines focused ultrasound and radiofrequency delivery within a targeted treatment format.
Available cartridge depths include:
-
1.5 mm
-
3.0 mm
-
4.5 mm
-
9.0 mm
This handle is designed for controlled energy placement on appropriately selected facial or body areas.
The exact HIFU and RF parameters must be selected according to professional training, the treatment area and client suitability.
Skin Knife Handle
The Skin Knife handle uses blade-style cartridges designed to distribute energy across broader treatment areas.
Available depths include:
-
1.5 mm
-
2.0 mm
-
3.0 mm
-
4.5 mm
It can be incorporated into professional programs focused on skin firming, texture refinement and overall facial rejuvenation.
Despite its name, the Skin Knife handle is not a surgical blade and does not cut the skin.
Thermal Shaping Handle
The Thermal Shaping handle extends the machine’s applications to professional body-contouring treatments.
Available cartridge depths include:
-
8.0 mm
-
13.0 mm
These deeper cartridges are intended for appropriately selected areas with sufficient tissue depth, including the abdomen, waist, back, arms and thighs.
Multiple Delivery Formats for Customized Treatments
Each handle provides a different method of energy delivery.
| Handle | Delivery format | Primary application |
|---|---|---|
| Multi-Line 4D HIFU | Multiple treatment lines per activation | Facial lifting and efficient area coverage |
| Single-Point HIFU and RF | Targeted point delivery | Precise facial and body protocols |
| Skin Knife | Broader blade-style delivery | Skin firming and texture refinement |
| Thermal Shaping | Deeper body-treatment delivery | Professional body contouring |
Handle and cartridge selection must be based on client anatomy, tissue thickness, treatment goals and professional training.
Multi-Line HIFU for Efficient Coverage
The 4D HIFU handle is designed to deliver up to 12 treatment lines per activation, depending on the selected settings and cartridge.
Compared with a conventional single-line system, multi-line delivery may provide:
-
More efficient treatment-area coverage
-
More consistent line distribution
-
Reduced repetitive handle repositioning
-
Greater flexibility for larger facial areas
-
More streamlined professional workflows
The supplied specifications indicate a cartridge capacity of up to 10,000 shots. Actual capacity depends on the cartridge and operating configuration.
Higher line output does not remove the need for correct spacing, safe energy selection and knowledge of facial anatomy.
Treatment Depths from 1.5 mm to 13 mm
| Cartridge depth | Compatible handle | Intended professional application |
|---|---|---|
| 1.5 mm | 4D HIFU, Single-Point, Skin Knife | Superficial facial protocols |
| 2.0 mm | 4D HIFU, Skin Knife | Precision facial applications |
| 3.0 mm | 4D HIFU, Single-Point, Skin Knife | Facial and neck treatments |
| 4.5 mm | 4D HIFU, Single-Point, Skin Knife | Deeper facial and SMAS-focused protocols |
| 6.0 mm | 4D HIFU | Shallow body applications |
| 8.0 mm | Thermal Shaping | Medium-depth body treatments |
| 9.0 mm | 4D HIFU or Single-Point | Body-contouring protocols |
| 13.0 mm | Thermal Shaping | Deeper body applications |
This table provides general positioning information. The correct depth must be selected according to the treatment area, tissue thickness and approved professional protocol.
Professional Face and Body Applications
| Treatment category | Common areas | Applicable technology |
|---|---|---|
| Facial skin firming | Forehead, cheeks and lower face | 4D HIFU or Skin Knife |
| Fine-line treatments | Suitable facial areas | Skin Knife or Single-Point |
| Jawline contouring | Lower face and jawline | 4D HIFU or Single-Point |
| Neck firming | Neck and submental area | 4D HIFU |
| Skin-texture refinement | Face and suitable neck areas | Skin Knife |
| Body contouring | Abdomen, waist and back | Thermal Shaping |
| Body firming | Arms, thighs, hips and buttocks | Thermal Shaping or body HIFU |
A complete client consultation and contraindication assessment must be performed before treatment.
How HIFU and RF Technologies Work
HIFU stands for High-Intensity Focused Ultrasound.
HIFU delivers controlled ultrasound energy to a defined depth below the skin’s surface. When applied correctly, the focused thermal points support the body’s natural tissue-remodeling and collagen-response processes.
Radiofrequency uses controlled electrical energy to generate heat within suitable tissue layers. The Single-Point handle combines HIFU and RF delivery for targeted professional protocols.
The Thermal Shaping handle uses deeper cartridge options for appropriately selected body areas.
Individual outcomes vary according to age, skin condition, tissue thickness, treatment settings and biological response.
Build a Complete Professional Service Menu
Multi-Line Facial HIFU
Use the 4D HIFU handle for structured facial lifting and firming treatments with efficient multi-line coverage.
Targeted HIFU and RF Treatments
The Single-Point handle supports focused protocols for suitable areas requiring precise energy placement.
Skin-Firming and Refinement Services
The Skin Knife handle provides broader energy delivery for professional skin-firming and texture-focused treatments.
Body-Contouring Services
The Thermal Shaping handle adds professional body treatments for appropriately selected areas such as the abdomen, waist, arms and thighs.
Combination Treatment Plans
Qualified operators may develop treatment plans using more than one handle when appropriate. Compatibility, sequence and treatment intervals must follow professional training and manufacturer protocols.
Premium Desktop Design
The gold desktop housing combines four technologies within a compact professional format.
Key design features include:
-
Gold professional housing
-
15-inch intelligent color touchscreen
-
Four dedicated treatment handles
-
Multiple facial and body cartridges
-
Pre-programmed operating protocols
-
Adjustable energy and depth controls
-
Automatic shut-off function
-
AC 110–220 V compatibility
-
Approximately 21 kg net weight
The machine should be installed on a stable, level treatment trolley or work surface with sufficient ventilation.
How a Professional Treatment Session Works
1. Consultation and Assessment
The operator reviews the client’s concerns, treatment goals, medical history, skin condition, tissue thickness and contraindications.
2. Handle Selection
The appropriate treatment handle is selected according to whether the protocol focuses on lifting, targeted energy delivery, skin refinement or body contouring.
3. Cartridge Selection
The cartridge depth is selected according to the treatment area and client anatomy.
4. Treatment Preparation
The treatment area is cleansed and marked where required. Conductive gel or the recommended coupling material is applied.
5. Parameter Selection
Energy, depth, delivery mode and other available settings are adjusted according to the selected protocol.
6. Controlled Treatment
The operator delivers energy using the correct technique while monitoring client comfort and tissue response.
7. Post-Treatment Care
The area is cleaned and the client receives appropriate aftercare instructions.
Temporary redness, swelling, sensitivity, tenderness, tingling or numbness may occur. Recovery experience varies according to the technology and individual response.
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product type | Professional 4-in-1 HIFU and body-contouring system |
| Machine design | Gold desktop housing |
| Control interface | 15-inch intelligent color touchscreen |
| Treatment handles | Four |
| Included technologies | Multi-Line 4D HIFU, Single-Point HIFU and RF, Skin Knife and Thermal Shaping |
| 4D HIFU facial cartridges | 1.5 mm, 2.0 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm |
| 4D HIFU body cartridges | 6.0 mm and 9.0 mm |
| Single-Point cartridges | 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm, 4.5 mm and 9.0 mm |
| Skin Knife cartridges | 1.5 mm, 2.0 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm |
| Thermal Shaping cartridges | 8.0 mm and 13.0 mm |
| Multi-line output | Up to 12 lines per activation |
| Cartridge capacity | Up to 10,000 shots, depending on cartridge |
| Rated power | 200 W |
| Input voltage | AC 110–220 V |
| Machine dimensions | 54 × 45 × 52 cm |
| Net weight | Approximately 21 kg |
| Safety functions | Automatic shut-off and adjustable operating limits |
| Certifications | CE and RoHS certified |
| Warranty | Three-year limited warranty covering eligible parts and labor |
Specifications may be updated according to the final production configuration.
What Is Included?
Main Equipment
-
One Gold 4D HIFU 4-in-1 touchscreen console
-
One Multi-Line 4D HIFU handle
-
One Single-Point HIFU and RF handle
-
One Skin Knife handle
-
One Thermal Shaping handle
-
Power cable suitable for the selected market
-
Starter conductive gel
Multi-Line 4D HIFU Cartridges
-
1.5 mm
-
2.0 mm
-
3.0 mm
-
4.5 mm
-
6.0 mm
-
9.0 mm
Single-Point HIFU and RF Cartridges
-
1.5 mm
-
3.0 mm
-
4.5 mm
-
9.0 mm
Skin Knife Cartridges
-
1.5 mm
-
2.0 mm
-
3.0 mm
-
4.5 mm
Thermal Shaping Cartridges
-
8.0 mm
-
13.0 mm
Documentation and Certification
-
English user manual
-
CE certificate
-
RoHS certificate
-
Setup guidance
-
Remote video training
-
Treatment-protocol guidance
-
Cleaning and maintenance instructions
-
Basic troubleshooting assistance
Final cartridge quantities and package contents should be confirmed on the order quotation.
CE and RoHS Certified
The Wikbeauty Gold 4D HIFU 4-in-1 Machine comes with:
-
CE Certificate
-
RoHS Certificate
These certificates are included with the machine and support its professional positioning and international distribution.
Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides remote training and operating guidance covering:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen operation
-
Handle and cartridge installation
-
Multi-Line HIFU operation
-
Single-Point HIFU and RF operation
-
Skin Knife operation
-
Thermal Shaping operation
-
Basic treatment-parameter selection
-
Facial and body protocols
-
Cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Safety procedures
-
Basic troubleshooting
Training materials support equipment familiarization but do not replace anatomy training, professional qualifications or licenses required in the operator’s jurisdiction.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Gold 4D HIFU 4-in-1 Machine is supported by a three-year limited warranty covering eligible parts and labor.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty conditions, coverage may include eligible manufacturing defects affecting:
-
Main machine unit
-
Internal electronic components
-
Touchscreen and control system
-
Original treatment handles
-
Handle connectors
-
Other eligible original machine components
-
Eligible repair labor during the warranty period
Cartridges and other limited-use components may have separate warranty conditions.
Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty will assist with:
-
Remote technical assessment
-
Guided diagnostic testing
-
Identification of the affected component
-
Confirmation of warranty eligibility
-
Replacement-part or repair assistance where applicable
-
Remote installation guidance
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Incorrect operation or misuse
-
Unauthorized repair or modification
-
Incorrect voltage or electrical connection
-
Improper cleaning or storage
-
Damage caused by dropping a handle
-
Normal cartridge depletion
-
Incorrect cartridge installation
-
Unauthorized transportation damage
-
Failure to follow the operating manual
Order information, the machine serial number, photographs and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting warranty service.
All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy.
Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional aesthetic equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel.
A complete consultation and contraindication assessment must be completed before every treatment.
Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Implanted electronic devices
-
Metallic implants in or near the treatment area
-
Active cancer
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Blood-clotting disorders
-
Uncontrolled medical conditions
-
Active infection or inflammation
-
Open wounds in the treatment area
-
Severe skin disorders
-
Conditions affecting normal healing
-
Recent surgery in the treatment area
-
Recent injectable treatments
-
Other contraindications listed in the operating manual
Energy must not be applied over the eyes, thyroid, major nerves, large blood vessels, bones or other prohibited anatomical structures.
This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the supplied manual, professional training requirements and applicable local regulations. Medical guidance should be obtained when treatment suitability is uncertain.
Intended Professional Users
The Gold 4D HIFU 4-in-1 Machine is suitable for:
-
Beauty salons
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Medical spas
-
Facial-rejuvenation studios
-
Body-contouring centers
-
Qualified independent practitioners
-
Businesses expanding their face and body services
The system is not intended for casual or unsupervised home use.
Why Choose the Gold 4D HIFU 4-in-1 Machine?
Four Dedicated Technologies
Combine multi-line HIFU, targeted HIFU and RF, Skin Knife treatments and Thermal Shaping within one professional platform.
Efficient Multi-Line Delivery
The 4D HIFU handle can deliver up to 12 treatment lines per activation for more efficient coverage.
Complete Face and Body Depth Range
Cartridge options extend from 1.5 mm for superficial facial applications to 13 mm for deeper body protocols.
Premium Desktop Design
The gold housing and 15-inch touchscreen create a refined presentation in a professional treatment room.
Professional Certifications
The machine comes with CE and RoHS certificates.
Long-Term Equipment Support
Remote training, technical assistance and a three-year limited warranty covering eligible parts and labor are included.
Frequently Asked Questions
What does “4-in-1” mean?
The system combines four dedicated technologies: Multi-Line 4D HIFU, Single-Point HIFU and RF, Skin Knife and Thermal Shaping.
How is 4D HIFU different from conventional single-line HIFU?
The 4D handle can deliver multiple treatment lines per activation. This provides more efficient coverage than repeatedly delivering one line at a time.
What does the Single-Point HIFU and RF handle do?
It combines targeted focused ultrasound and radiofrequency delivery for precise professional protocols. Settings and treatment placement must follow the supplied training.
Does the Skin Knife cut the skin?
No. “Skin Knife” is the name used for its blade-style treatment cartridge. It is not a surgical blade and does not cut the skin.
What is the Thermal Shaping handle used for?
The Thermal Shaping handle includes 8.0 mm and 13.0 mm cartridges for professional body-contouring treatments on appropriately selected areas.
Is treatment painful?
Client experience varies according to the technology, area, cartridge depth and energy setting. Warmth, tingling, tenderness or temporary discomfort may occur.
Is there any downtime?
Recovery experience varies. Some clients may return to normal activities shortly after treatment, while temporary redness, swelling, tenderness or sensitivity may occur.
How many sessions will a client need?
Treatment frequency depends on the technology, treatment area, client condition and professional protocol. A fixed number of sessions or guaranteed outcome should not be promised.
Is training included?
Yes. Remote setup assistance, video training and operating guidance for all four handles are included.
What does the three-year warranty cover?
The limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components and eligible repair labor. Cartridges, normal wear, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded.
Does the machine come with CE and RoHS certificates?
Yes. The Wikbeauty Gold 4D HIFU 4-in-1 Machine comes with CE and RoHS certificates.
Expand Your Face and Body Treatment Services
The Wikbeauty Gold 4D HIFU 4-in-1 Machine brings four complementary treatment technologies into one premium desktop platform:
-
Multi-Line 4D HIFU
-
Single-Point HIFU and RF
-
Skin Knife
-
Thermal Shaping
Contact Wikbeauty for current pricing, voltage selection, delivery information and purchasing assistance.
Request Pricing and Product Consultation
Receives in 8 days.
$1,799.00
Professional 4D HIFU Facial and Body Treatment System
Multi-Depth Focused Ultrasound for Skin Tightening, Facial Lifting, and Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty 4D HIFU Machine is a professional non-invasive aesthetic system developed for facial lifting, wrinkle care, skin tightening, collagen stimulation, and body-contouring treatments.
High-Intensity Focused Ultrasound technology delivers concentrated ultrasound energy at selected tissue depths. Its multi-depth cartridge system supports customized treatments for superficial facial areas, deeper facial structures, and suitable body areas.
With treatment depths from 1.5mm to 13mm, eight treatment cartridges, adjustable energy settings, intelligent touchscreen controls, and dual-voltage compatibility, the system is suitable for beauty salons, aesthetic clinics, and professional wellness centers.
4D HIFU technology | 1.5–13mm treatment depths | Eight cartridges | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Functions on One Platform
Multi-Depth Focused Ultrasound
The system delivers focused ultrasound energy at selected depths without requiring incisions or injectable products. Different cartridges allow professionals to target superficial, middle, and deeper tissue levels.
Common applications include:
-
Facial skin tightening
-
Fine-line and wrinkle care
-
Jawline contouring
-
Neck and décolletage treatments
-
Body skin-firming programs
-
Professional body-contouring treatments
Facial Lifting and Collagen Stimulation
Facial cartridges are designed to deliver focused ultrasound energy at depths suitable for different layers of facial tissue.
Common applications include:
-
Reduced facial firmness
-
Fine lines and wrinkles
-
Lower-face laxity
-
Jawline definition
-
Double-chin-area treatments
-
Neck skin tightening
Body Contouring and Skin Firming
Deeper cartridge configurations support professional treatments for suitable body areas.
Common applications include:
-
Abdomen contouring
-
Upper-arm treatments
-
Thigh contouring
-
Buttock-area programs
-
Body skin tightening
-
Cellulite-appearance improvement
Select the Right Program for Each Client
Facial-Rejuvenation Program
Uses suitable facial cartridges and customized energy settings for general facial lifting and skin-rejuvenation treatments.
Recommended applications:
-
Fine lines and wrinkles
-
Reduced facial firmness
-
Uneven-looking skin texture
-
Early signs of aging
-
General collagen-stimulation programs
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking non-invasive facial rejuvenation
-
Clients concerned about visible signs of aging
-
Clients wanting progressive skin-quality improvement
Facial-Lifting and Jawline Program
Uses suitable middle and deeper facial treatment depths to support lower-face tightening and contour definition.
Recommended applications:
-
Lower-face laxity
-
Reduced jawline definition
-
Jowl-area treatments
-
Double-chin concerns
-
Neck skin tightening
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking a firmer-looking lower face
-
Clients concerned about facial contours
-
Clients interested in non-surgical lifting programs
Body-Contouring Program
Uses deeper body cartridges for suitable body areas requiring contouring and skin-firming treatments.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdomen contouring
-
Upper-arm treatments
-
Thigh contouring
-
Buttock-area programs
-
Body skin tightening
Recommended for:
-
Clients concerned about localized body areas
-
Clients seeking non-invasive body treatments
-
Clients combining treatment with healthy lifestyle habits
Maintenance Program
Provides periodic treatment following completion of the client’s initial HIFU program.
Recommended applications:
-
Facial-lifting maintenance
-
Skin-firming maintenance
-
Body-contour maintenance
-
Continued collagen-stimulation programs
Recommended for:
-
Returning HIFU clients
-
Clients completing an initial treatment plan
-
Clients seeking periodic professional maintenance
Adjustable Treatment Depths and Energy Settings
The Wikbeauty 4D HIFU Machine provides multiple treatment depths for different facial and body applications.
| Treatment Depth | General Treatment Level | Possible Applications |
|---|---|---|
| 1.5mm | Superficial facial tissue | Fine lines, texture, and delicate facial areas |
| 3.0mm | Dermal facial layer | Collagen stimulation and skin tightening |
| 4.5mm | Deeper facial layer | Facial lifting, jawline, and lower-face treatments |
| 6.0mm | Shallow body treatment | Small body areas and skin-firming programs |
| 8.0mm | Medium body treatment | Arms and selected body areas |
| 10.0mm | Deeper body treatment | Abdomen, thighs, and body contouring |
| 13.0mm | Maximum listed body depth | Larger body areas and professional contouring protocols |
Energy settings should be selected according to the cartridge, treatment area, tissue condition, client comfort, and professional protocol.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Face, Chin, and Jawline
Facial cartridges support customized treatments across suitable areas of the face.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Facial lifting
-
Fine-line care
-
Wrinkle reduction
-
Jawline definition
-
Double-chin-area treatment
Neck and Décolletage
Suitable cartridge depths and controlled energy settings can support professional tightening and rejuvenation programs.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Neck skin tightening
-
Reduced appearance of neck lines
-
Improved-looking firmness
-
Décolletage rejuvenation
-
Collagen-stimulation support
Arms, Abdomen, Thighs, and Buttocks
Deeper cartridge configurations support selected body-contouring and skin-firming treatments.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Upper-arm contouring
-
Abdomen treatments
-
Thigh contouring
-
Buttock-area programs
-
Body skin firming
Professional Treatment Applications
| Treatment Area | Primary Objective | Recommended Depth Category |
|---|---|---|
| Face | Lifting, tightening, and wrinkle care | 1.5mm, 3.0mm, or 4.5mm |
| Chin and Jawline | Contour definition and lower-face tightening | Suitable facial depth |
| Neck | Skin tightening and line care | Suitable facial depth |
| Décolletage | Texture and firmness improvement | Professionally selected depth |
| Upper Arms | Skin firming and contouring | Suitable body depth |
| Abdomen | Body contouring and tightening | Suitable deeper body depth |
| Thighs | Contouring and cellulite-appearance care | Suitable body depth |
| Buttocks | Skin-firming and contouring support | Suitable body depth |
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, skin condition, previous aesthetic procedures, target areas, treatment objectives, and possible contraindications. Explain the treatment process and establish realistic expectations.
Step 2: Cartridge Selection
Select the appropriate facial or body cartridge according to the treatment area, target depth, tissue condition, and professional protocol.
Step 3: Treatment Preparation
Clean the treatment area and apply suitable ultrasound gel. Configure the energy level and treatment parameters according to the selected cartridge and client tolerance.
Step 4: HIFU Treatment
Position the handpiece correctly and deliver focused ultrasound energy according to the mapped treatment plan. Monitor client comfort and tissue response throughout the session.
Step 5: Treatment Completion
Remove the ultrasound gel, inspect and clean the treated area, record the cartridge and settings used, and provide appropriate post-treatment skincare guidance.
Designed for Professional Beauty Environments
The Wikbeauty 4D HIFU Machine combines multi-depth facial and body treatment capability with straightforward professional operation.
Key advantages include:
-
Professional 4D HIFU technology
-
Treatment depths from 1.5mm to 13mm
-
Eight-cartridge package
-
Facial and body treatment capability
-
Adjustable energy settings
-
Intelligent touchscreen controls
-
Approximately 30–60-minute sessions
-
Facial lifting and wrinkle-care programs
-
Jawline and chin contouring
-
Neck and décolletage treatments
-
Body-contouring and skin-firming programs
-
110V and 220V compatibility
-
CE and ISO certificates
-
Three-year professional warranty
-
Professional training and ongoing support
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty 4D HIFU Machine |
| Technology | 4D High-Intensity Focused Ultrasound |
| Treatment Package | Eight multi-depth cartridges |
| Listed Treatment Depths | 1.5mm, 3.0mm, 4.5mm, 6.0mm, 8.0mm, 10.0mm, and 13.0mm |
| Facial Depths | 1.5mm, 3.0mm, and 4.5mm |
| Body Depths | 6.0mm, 8.0mm, 10.0mm, and 13.0mm |
| Primary Functions | Skin tightening, facial lifting, wrinkle care, and body contouring |
| Treatment Areas | Face, neck, chin, jawline, arms, abdomen, thighs, and buttocks |
| Session Duration | Approximately 30–60 minutes |
| Treatment Frequency | Personalized according to client assessment |
| Energy Settings | Adjustable |
| Display | Intelligent touchscreen |
| Power Supply | 110V or 220V |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
| Warranty | Three-year professional warranty |
| Support | Professional training and ongoing technical assistance |
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty 4D HIFU main unit
-
1 × Professional HIFU treatment handpiece
-
8 × Treatment cartridges
-
Facial treatment cartridge configurations
-
Body treatment cartridge configurations
-
Intelligent touchscreen control system
-
Adjustable energy controls
-
1 × Region-compatible power cable
-
Standard machine accessories
-
Warranty card
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Installation and operating guide
-
Safety and maintenance instructions
-
Professional video training
-
Cartridge-selection guidance
-
Energy-adjustment guidance
-
Facial treatment protocols
-
Jawline and neck protocols
-
Body-contouring protocols
-
Client-consultation materials
-
Post-treatment guidance
-
Professional training certificate
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty 4D HIFU Machine includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use the system safely and consistently.
Training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen operation
-
Client consultation and screening
-
Facial and body assessment
-
Treatment-area mapping
-
Cartridge selection
-
Energy-level adjustment
-
Handpiece positioning
-
Facial-lifting protocols
-
Jawline and neck protocols
-
Body-contouring protocols
-
Post-treatment care
-
Equipment cleaning and maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty 4D HIFU Machine includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period.
Cartridges and other components subject to normal use or shot limitations are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement.
Technical Support Process
-
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team.
-
Provide the machine model and order information.
-
Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested.
-
A technician will assess the reported issue remotely.
-
Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged.
-
Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable cartridges, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual.
Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation, health-history review, and skin assessment should be completed before every treatment. The machine should only be operated by appropriately trained professionals.
Treatment may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or breastfeeding
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Metal implants within the treatment area
-
Active skin infection
-
Herpes, open wounds, or sores
-
Active eczema, psoriasis, or dermatitis in the area
-
Severe or recent sunburn
-
Recent surgery within the treatment area
-
Recent injectable or aggressive skin treatments
-
Serious cardiovascular or medical conditions
-
Reduced or impaired skin sensation
-
Medical conditions requiring physician supervision
Clients who have recently received fillers, botulinum toxin, chemical peels, or other professional aesthetic procedures should be assessed before treatment. An appropriate waiting period should be determined by a qualified practitioner.
HIFU should not be applied over the eyes, thyroid gland, major nerves, bones, reproductive organs, or other prohibited areas identified in the operating manual.
Operating Precautions
-
Inspect the machine, handpiece, cartridges, cables, and accessories before use.
-
Confirm the cartridge and treatment depth before beginning.
-
Map the treatment area carefully.
-
Apply sufficient ultrasound gel.
-
Begin with conservative energy settings.
-
Monitor client comfort and tissue response.
-
Do not deliver energy over prohibited anatomical areas.
-
Do not repeatedly treat the same point outside the protocol.
-
Record the cartridge, depth, energy, and treatment area.
-
Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client.
-
Follow the supplied maintenance schedule.
-
Stop treatment if unexpected pain or skin reaction occurs.
Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty 4D HIFU Machine is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in:
-
Beauty salons
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Medical spas
-
Skin-rejuvenation studios
-
Body-contouring clinics
-
Professional spas
-
Anti-aging treatment centers
-
Wellness facilities
Operators should review applicable local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering HIFU treatments.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty 4D HIFU Machine?
Multi-Depth HIFU Technology
Treatment depths spanning 1.5mm to 13mm support superficial facial treatments, deeper facial lifting, and selected body applications.
Facial and Body Versatility
One system supports treatments for the face, neck, chin, jawline, arms, abdomen, thighs, and buttocks.
Eight Treatment Cartridges
The eight-cartridge package supports different treatment depths and allows professionals to select suitable configurations for facial and body areas.
Adjustable Professional Settings
Interchangeable cartridges and adjustable energy controls allow professionals to customize treatments according to the target area and client.
Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating training, cartridge guidance, treatment protocols, CE and ISO certificates, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty 4D HIFU Machine?
It is a professional High-Intensity Focused Ultrasound system developed for facial lifting, skin tightening, wrinkle care, collagen stimulation, and selected body-contouring treatments.
What does 4D HIFU mean?
The product uses an advanced multi-depth HIFU cartridge system designed to deliver focused ultrasound energy at different facial and body treatment depths.
Which treatment depths are available?
The supplied information lists 1.5mm, 3.0mm, and 4.5mm facial depths, together with 6.0mm, 8.0mm, 10.0mm, and 13.0mm body depths.
How many cartridges are included?
The supplied product package includes eight treatment cartridges for facial and body applications.
Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the face, neck, chin, jawline, upper arms, abdomen, thighs, and buttocks.
How long does one treatment take?
A standard professional treatment takes approximately 30–60 minutes, depending on the treatment area, cartridge, and selected protocol.
How many treatments are recommended?
The supplied information suggests one to three sessions per year. The final treatment schedule should be personalized according to the client’s condition, objectives, and professional assessment.
When may clients notice changes?
Some clients may notice an initial tightening effect following treatment. Progressive changes may continue as the skin’s natural collagen response develops. Individual outcomes and timing vary.
How long can results last?
The supplied information indicates a possible duration of 12–18 months. Actual longevity varies according to age, skin condition, treatment settings, lifestyle, and individual response.
Is there downtime?
Many clients can continue normal daily activities after a suitable treatment. Temporary redness, swelling, tenderness, or sensitivity may occur.
What does HIFU treatment feel like?
Clients may experience warmth, tingling, pressure, or brief sensitivity as ultrasound energy is delivered. Energy should be adjusted according to professional protocol and client tolerance.
Can the machine be used for body treatments?
Yes. The deeper cartridge configurations support selected treatments for the upper arms, abdomen, thighs, buttocks, and other suitable body areas.
Are results guaranteed?
No. Results vary according to age, tissue condition, treatment area, cartridge selection, energy settings, lifestyle, and individual response.
What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates.
What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues.
Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers machine operation, client screening, treatment mapping, cartridge selection, energy adjustment, facial and body protocols, aftercare, maintenance, and troubleshooting.
Add Professional 4D HIFU Treatments to Your Business
The Wikbeauty 4D HIFU Machine enables beauty salons, aesthetic clinics, and wellness professionals to provide customizable facial-lifting, skin-tightening, wrinkle-care, and body-contouring services using one professional platform.
Five key benefits:
-
Multi-depth focused ultrasound treatments from 1.5mm to 13mm
-
Professional facial and body treatment capability
-
Eight treatment cartridges with adjustable energy settings
-
Intelligent touchscreen controls with dual-voltage compatibility
-
CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, cartridge configuration, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Receives in 8 days.
From $1,999.00
Professional 5-in-1 HIFU and RF Microneedling System
Five Dedicated Technologies for Face, Body and Intimate-Care Applications
The Wikbeauty 5-in-1 8D HIFU Machine combines five professional aesthetic technologies within one compact desktop platform.
Dedicated handles for 8D HIFU, Liposonic Thermal Sculpting, Radar Carving, Gold RF Microneedling and Intimate HIFU allow trained professionals to develop facial lifting, skin-rejuvenation, body-contouring and intimate-care services from one system.
A 15-inch intelligent touchscreen, adjustable energy settings and interchangeable cartridges provide controlled operation across different treatment areas and protocols.
Five technologies | Five dedicated handles | 15-inch touchscreen | Three-year warranty
Five Professional Technologies in One Machine
8D HIFU
The 8D HIFU handle delivers multiple focused-ultrasound treatment lines with each activation.
It includes:
-
3.0 mm cartridge at 7 MHz
-
4.5 mm cartridge at 4 MHz
These cartridge depths support professional protocols focused on facial lifting, skin firming, jawline definition and suitable neck treatments.
The supplied specification indicates up to 12 treatment lines per activation and up to 10,000 shots per cartridge, depending on the cartridge and operating configuration.
Liposonic Thermal Sculpting
The Liposonic handle provides deeper focused-energy delivery for appropriately selected body areas.
It includes:
-
8.0 mm cartridge
-
13.0 mm cartridge
Common treatment areas include:
-
Abdomen
-
Waist and flanks
-
Upper and lower back
-
Upper arms
-
Thighs
-
Hips
-
Buttocks
Cartridge selection must be based on the client’s anatomy, tissue thickness and professional treatment protocol.
Radar Carving
The Radar Carving handle supports controlled treatments at three selectable depths:
-
1.5 mm
-
3.0 mm
-
4.5 mm
It can be incorporated into professional protocols focused on skin firming, facial contour refinement and selected face or neck applications.
Gold RF Microneedling
The Gold RF Microneedling handle combines controlled needle penetration with radiofrequency energy.
It includes:
-
10-pin cartridge
-
25-pin cartridge
The needles create controlled microchannels while RF energy is delivered at the selected depth. This technology can support treatments focused on:
-
Skin-texture improvement
-
Fine-line appearance
-
Enlarged-pore appearance
-
Uneven-looking skin tone
-
Acne-scar appearance
-
General skin rejuvenation
RF microneedling is minimally invasive and requires strict hygiene, infection-control and aftercare procedures.
Intimate HIFU
The dedicated Intimate HIFU handle delivers focused ultrasound through a 360° treatment format.
It includes:
-
3.0 mm cartridge
-
4.5 mm cartridge
This handle is designed for specialized professional intimate-care protocols where legally permitted.
It must only be used by appropriately qualified professionals following consultation, informed consent, privacy, hygiene and safety requirements.
Multi-Line 8D HIFU Delivery
The 8D HIFU handle is designed to deliver up to 12 treatment lines per activation.
Compared with a conventional single-line system, this may provide:
-
More efficient treatment-area coverage
-
More consistent line placement
-
Reduced repetitive repositioning
-
Streamlined facial treatment workflows
-
Greater coverage across appropriate areas
“8D” is the commercial name of the treatment platform. It should not be interpreted as meaning the handle delivers exactly eight lines.
Multi-line delivery does not remove the need for correct spacing, safe energy selection or professional knowledge of facial anatomy.
Treatment Handles and Cartridge Depths
| Technology | Included cartridges | Primary application |
|---|---|---|
| 8D HIFU | 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm | Facial lifting and skin firming |
| Liposonic | 8.0 mm and 13.0 mm | Professional body contouring |
| Radar Carving | 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm | Contour refinement and firming |
| Gold RF Microneedling | 10-pin and 25-pin | Skin-texture and rejuvenation protocols |
| Intimate HIFU | 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm | Specialized intimate-care treatments |
The correct handle, cartridge and parameters must be selected according to the treatment area, client suitability and professional protocol.
Professional Face, Body and Intimate-Care Applications
| Treatment category | Common areas | Applicable technology |
|---|---|---|
| Facial lifting | Face and lower face | 8D HIFU |
| Jawline definition | Jawline and submental area | 8D HIFU or Radar Carving |
| Neck firming | Suitable neck areas | 8D HIFU or Radar Carving |
| Skin rejuvenation | Face and selected body areas | Gold RF Microneedling |
| Body contouring | Abdomen, waist, back and thighs | Liposonic |
| Contour refinement | Selected facial and body areas | Radar Carving |
| Intimate care | Intimate treatment area | Intimate HIFU |
Individual results vary according to client condition, tissue depth, treatment settings, treatment frequency and biological response.
How the Technologies Work
Focused Ultrasound
The 8D HIFU, Liposonic, Radar Carving and Intimate HIFU handles deliver focused energy to a selected depth below the surface.
When applied correctly, the controlled focal points support the body’s natural tissue-remodeling and collagen-response processes.
Radiofrequency Microneedling
The Gold RF Microneedling handle uses fine needles to deliver radiofrequency energy at a controlled depth.
This produces a targeted treatment response designed to support collagen remodeling and improvement in the appearance of skin texture.
RF microneedling is not a laser treatment and does not rely on light energy.
Build a Complete Professional Service Menu
Facial Lifting and Firming
Use the 8D HIFU handle for professional face, jawline and suitable neck protocols.
Skin-Rejuvenation Treatments
The Gold RF Microneedling handle adds targeted services focused on texture, pores, fine lines and scar appearance.
Body-Contouring Services
The 8.0 mm and 13.0 mm Liposonic cartridges support treatments for appropriately selected body areas.
Contour-Refinement Treatments
The Radar Carving handle provides three depth options for focused facial and body protocols.
Intimate Wellness Services
The Intimate HIFU handle enables qualified providers to add specialized services where permitted within their professional scope.
Combination Treatment Planning
Qualified operators may develop plans using more than one technology where appropriate. Treatment sequence, compatibility and intervals must follow professional training and manufacturer protocols.
Compact Professional Desktop Design
The system combines five treatment technologies in a desktop housing measuring approximately 58 × 44 × 44 cm.
Key operating features include:
-
15-inch intelligent color touchscreen
-
Five dedicated treatment handles
-
Pre-programmed treatment modes
-
Adjustable energy from 0.1–3.0 J
-
Temperature monitoring
-
Automatic shut-off
-
Adjustable operating limits
-
AC 110–240 V compatibility
-
Approximately 19 kg net weight
The machine should be installed on a stable treatment trolley or work surface with sufficient ventilation.
How a Professional Treatment Session Works
1. Consultation and Assessment
The operator reviews the client’s concerns, treatment goals, medical history, tissue condition and contraindications.
Intimate treatments require additional privacy, informed-consent and professional-scope procedures.
2. Handle Selection
The appropriate handle is selected according to whether the treatment focuses on lifting, skin rejuvenation, body contouring or intimate care.
3. Cartridge Selection
The operator installs the cartridge or microneedling tip appropriate for the treatment area.
4. Treatment Preparation
The area is cleansed and prepared. Conductive gel or another approved coupling material is applied where required.
Sterile preparation and single-use needle cartridges are required for RF microneedling.
5. Parameter Selection
Energy, depth, delivery mode and other settings are selected according to the approved protocol.
6. Controlled Treatment
The treatment is performed using correct placement and technique while monitoring client comfort and tissue response.
7. Post-Treatment Care
The treatment area is cleaned and the client receives technology-specific aftercare instructions.
Temporary redness, swelling, sensitivity, tenderness, tingling or pinpoint crusting may occur. Recovery experience varies between treatments and clients.
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product type | Professional 5-in-1 HIFU and RF Microneedling system |
| Machine design | Black desktop housing |
| Control interface | 15-inch intelligent color touchscreen |
| Treatment handles | Five dedicated handles |
| Included technologies | 8D HIFU, Liposonic, Radar Carving, Gold RF Microneedling and Intimate HIFU |
| 8D HIFU cartridges | 3.0 mm at 7 MHz and 4.5 mm at 4 MHz |
| Liposonic cartridges | 8.0 mm and 13.0 mm |
| Radar Carving cartridges | 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm |
| Intimate HIFU cartridges | 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm |
| RF Microneedling tips | 10-pin and 25-pin |
| Adjustable energy | 0.1–3.0 J |
| Multi-line output | Up to 12 lines per activation |
| Cartridge capacity | Up to 10,000 shots, depending on cartridge |
| Intimate probe focal thermal setting | Manufacturer-stated 60–70°C focal range |
| Rated voltage | AC 110–240 V |
| Machine dimensions | 58 × 44 × 44 cm |
| Net weight | Approximately 19 kg |
| Safety features | Automatic shut-off, temperature monitoring and adjustable operating limits |
| Certifications | CE and RoHS certified |
| Warranty | Three-year limited warranty covering eligible parts and labor |
The stated 60–70°C figure refers to the manufacturer-specified focal thermal setting. It must not be interpreted as a safe surface temperature or used without the supplied professional protocol.
Specifications may be updated according to the final production configuration.
What Is Included?
Main Equipment
-
One 5-in-1 desktop touchscreen console
-
One 8D HIFU handle
-
One Liposonic Thermal Sculpting handle
-
One Radar Carving handle
-
One Gold RF Microneedling handle
-
One Intimate HIFU handle
-
Universal power cable
-
Starter conductive gel
8D HIFU Cartridges
-
3.0 mm
-
4.5 mm
Liposonic Cartridges
-
8.0 mm
-
13.0 mm
Radar Carving Cartridges
-
1.5 mm
-
3.0 mm
-
4.5 mm
Intimate HIFU Cartridges
-
3.0 mm
-
4.5 mm
RF Microneedling Tips
-
10-pin
-
25-pin
Documentation and Certification
-
English user manual
-
CE certificate
-
RoHS certificate
-
Installation and setup guidance
-
Remote video training
-
Treatment-protocol guidance
-
Cleaning and maintenance instructions
-
Basic troubleshooting assistance
Final cartridge quantities and package contents should be confirmed on the order quotation.
CE and RoHS Certified
The Wikbeauty 5-in-1 8D HIFU Machine comes with:
-
CE Certificate
-
RoHS Certificate
These certificates are included with the machine and support its professional positioning and international distribution.
Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides remote training and operating guidance covering:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen operation
-
8D HIFU operation
-
Liposonic operation
-
Radar Carving operation
-
RF Microneedling operation
-
Intimate HIFU operation
-
Handle and cartridge installation
-
Basic treatment-parameter selection
-
Hygiene and infection-control procedures
-
Facial, body and intimate-care protocols
-
Cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
Training supports equipment familiarization but does not replace professional qualifications, anatomy training, intimate-care training or licenses required in the operator’s jurisdiction.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty 5-in-1 8D HIFU Machine is supported by a three-year limited warranty covering eligible parts and labor.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty conditions, coverage may include eligible manufacturing defects affecting:
-
Main machine unit
-
Internal electronic components
-
Touchscreen and control system
-
Original treatment handles
-
Temperature-monitoring system
-
Handle connectors
-
Other eligible original components
-
Eligible repair labor during the warranty period
Cartridges, microneedling tips and other limited-use components may have separate warranty conditions.
Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty will assist with:
-
Remote technical assessment
-
Guided diagnostic testing
-
Identification of the affected component
-
Confirmation of warranty eligibility
-
Replacement-part or repair assistance where applicable
-
Remote installation guidance
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Incorrect operation or misuse
-
Unauthorized repair or modification
-
Incorrect voltage or electrical connection
-
Improper cleaning, disinfection or storage
-
Damage caused by dropping a handle
-
Normal cartridge or tip depletion
-
Reuse of single-use microneedling tips
-
Unauthorized transportation damage
-
Failure to follow the operating manual
Order information, the machine serial number, photographs and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting warranty support.
All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy.
Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional aesthetic equipment and must only be operated by appropriately trained personnel.
A complete consultation, informed-consent process and contraindication assessment must be completed before every treatment.
Depending on the selected technology, treatment may not be suitable for individuals with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Implanted electronic devices
-
Metallic implants in or near the treatment area
-
Active cancer
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Blood-clotting disorders
-
Uncontrolled medical conditions
-
Active infection or inflammation
-
Open wounds
-
Severe skin conditions
-
Conditions affecting normal healing
-
Recent surgery in the treatment area
-
Recent injectable treatments
-
Use of medication affecting healing or bleeding
-
Other contraindications listed in the operating manual
RF Microneedling Safety
RF microneedling requires appropriate disinfection and infection-control procedures. Single-use needle cartridges must not be reused.
Intimate HIFU Safety
Intimate treatments require specialist training, privacy safeguards, informed consent and strict hygiene controls.
Operators must confirm that intimate treatments are permitted within their professional scope and local regulations. Incorrect depth, temperature or placement can cause tissue injury.
This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Medical guidance should be obtained whenever treatment suitability is uncertain.
Intended Professional Users
The 5-in-1 8D HIFU Machine is suitable for:
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Medical spas
-
Beauty salons
-
Skin-rejuvenation studios
-
Body-contouring centers
-
Qualified intimate-care providers
-
Appropriately trained independent practitioners
The machine is not intended for casual or unsupervised home use.
Why Choose This 5-in-1 System?
Five Dedicated Treatment Technologies
Provide professional facial lifting, skin rejuvenation, body contouring and intimate-care services from one platform.
Efficient Multi-Line HIFU
The 8D HIFU handle can deliver up to 12 treatment lines per activation for efficient area coverage.
Professional RF Microneedling
The 10-pin and 25-pin tips support precise, depth-controlled skin-rejuvenation protocols.
Face and Body Depth Options
Cartridges range from 1.5 mm for superficial protocols to 13.0 mm for deeper body applications.
Compact Desktop Format
Five treatment technologies are integrated within a system weighing approximately 19 kg.
Professional Certifications
The machine comes with CE and RoHS certificates.
Long-Term Equipment Support
Remote training, technical assistance and a three-year limited warranty covering eligible parts and labor are included.
Frequently Asked Questions
What does “5-in-1” mean?
The system combines 8D HIFU, Liposonic Thermal Sculpting, Radar Carving, Gold RF Microneedling and Intimate HIFU. Each technology has a dedicated handle.
How is 8D HIFU different from conventional HIFU?
The 8D handle can deliver multiple treatment lines per activation, providing more efficient coverage than a conventional single-line system.
Does “8D” mean eight treatment lines?
No. “8D” is the commercial name of the system. The supplied specification indicates up to 12 treatment lines per activation.
Is RF microneedling non-invasive?
No. RF microneedling is minimally invasive because the needles penetrate the skin. Appropriate hygiene and post-treatment care are required.
What is Radar Carving used for?
The Radar Carving handle includes 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges for professional firming and contour-refinement protocols.
What is the Liposonic handle used for?
The 8.0 mm and 13.0 mm Liposonic cartridges are intended for body-contouring treatments on appropriately selected areas.
Is there any downtime?
Recovery varies by technology. RF microneedling may produce temporary redness, swelling or pinpoint crusting. Ultrasound treatments may cause temporary sensitivity, tenderness or swelling.
How many sessions will a client need?
Treatment frequency depends on the technology, treatment area, client condition and professional protocol. A fixed number of sessions or guaranteed result should not be promised.
Is training included?
Yes. Remote setup assistance, video training and operating guidance for all five handles are included.
What does the three-year warranty cover?
The limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components and eligible repair labor. Cartridges, tips, normal wear, accidental damage and misuse are excluded.
Does the machine come with CE and RoHS certificates?
Yes. The Wikbeauty 5-in-1 8D HIFU Machine comes with CE and RoHS certificates.
Expand Your Face, Body and Intimate-Care Services
The Wikbeauty 5-in-1 8D HIFU Machine combines:
-
8D HIFU
-
Liposonic Thermal Sculpting
-
Radar Carving
-
Gold RF Microneedling
-
Intimate HIFU
Contact Wikbeauty for current pricing, delivery information and purchasing assistance.
Request Pricing and Product Consultation
Receives in 8 days.
From $2,599.00
Professional 5D Lipo Laser System
Five-Wavelength Technology for Non-Invasive Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty 5D Lipo Laser Machine is a professional body-contouring system developed for beauty studios, wellness centers and qualified independent practitioners.
Combining five laser wavelengths with an adjustable multi-pad design, the system enables trained operators to create customized treatments for the abdomen, waist, thighs, arms, back and other commonly requested body areas.
Available in vertical and portable configurations, the machine provides a practical balance of treatment flexibility, operator control and client comfort.
Five wavelengths | Up to 14 pads | 15 energy levels | Vertical or portable
Advanced Five-Wavelength Technology
The system integrates five laser wavelengths within one professional platform:
-
650 nm
-
780 nm
-
808 nm
-
940 nm
-
980 nm
This multi-wavelength configuration provides greater versatility than a conventional single-wavelength system. Treatment parameters can be adjusted according to the selected area, professional protocol and individual client requirements.
Each treatment pad contains either 20 or 28 diode lasers, depending on the configuration selected, with an output of up to 209 mW per diode.
Key Product Advantages
Multi-Wavelength System
Five available wavelengths provide greater flexibility when developing professional body-contouring protocols.
Adjustable Treatment Parameters
Fifteen energy levels, adjustable pulse timing and continuous or pulsed modes allow the operator to customize each session.
Flexible Pad Configuration
The standard system includes six large pads and two small pads. Compatible configurations can be expanded to a maximum of 14 treatment pads.
Independent Pad Cooling
Each treatment pad features an independent wind-cooling system to support stable performance during operation.
Multiple Equipment Formats
Choose a vertical unit for a permanent treatment room or a portable unit for smaller spaces and more flexible working arrangements.
International Compatibility
The system is available in 110 V and 220 V versions, with US, UK, EU and AU plug options.
Professional Body-Contouring Applications
The 5D Lipo Laser Machine is designed for non-invasive aesthetic treatments focused on improving the appearance of body contours.
Common treatment areas include:
| Treatment area | Typical application |
|---|---|
| Abdomen | Abdominal contouring |
| Waist and flanks | Waistline definition |
| Upper and lower back | Localized body contouring |
| Upper arms | Arm-contouring treatments |
| Inner and outer thighs | Thigh shaping |
| Buttocks | Contour-focused treatments |
| Legs and calves | Localized lower-body treatments |
Treatment suitability, pad placement and operating parameters should be determined by a trained operator following a complete client consultation.
How the System Works
The treatment pads are positioned securely over the selected body area using adjustable straps. The operator then selects the treatment duration, energy level and pulse mode according to the recommended protocol.
The pads deliver controlled low-level laser energy to the treatment area without surgical incisions, injections or anesthesia. Sessions are designed to be comfortable and generally do not require a surgical recovery period.
The system should be used as part of a structured body-contouring program. Individual outcomes vary according to body composition, lifestyle, treatment frequency and the protocol applied.
Configurable Treatment-Pad System
Large Treatment Pads
The six large pads provide wider coverage for areas such as the abdomen, waist, back, thighs and buttocks.
Small Treatment Pads
The two small pads are designed for more targeted placement on areas such as the upper arms and smaller localized zones.
Optional Expansion
Selected machine configurations can support up to 14 pads. This provides additional flexibility when covering larger areas or developing multi-pad protocols.
Additional treatment pads are sold separately. Compatibility should be confirmed before purchase.
Vertical and Portable Options
Vertical Configuration
The vertical model provides a refined, professional presentation for dedicated treatment rooms. Its mobile base allows the equipment to be repositioned within the working area when necessary.
Recommended for:
-
Beauty studios
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Body-contouring centers
-
Permanent treatment rooms
-
Higher-volume treatment environments
Portable Configuration
The portable model offers a more compact footprint while retaining the core multi-pad functionality of the system.
Recommended for:
-
Independent practitioners
-
Smaller studios
-
Limited treatment spaces
-
Professionals requiring easier storage or transportation
Controlled, Client-Focused Operation
The system offers adjustable parameters to support professional operation and individual client comfort.
-
Energy adjustment from level 1 to 15
-
Pulse-time adjustment from 0.1 to 5 seconds
-
Continuous and pulsed operating modes
-
Adjustable session duration
-
Touchscreen control interface
-
Independent cooling for each pad
-
Secure pad-positioning straps
-
IC-card control system
Treatment duration may range from approximately 15 to 60 minutes, depending on the selected area and treatment protocol.
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product type | Professional 5D lipo laser machine |
| Technology | Low-level diode laser |
| Laser wavelengths | 650 nm, 780 nm, 808 nm, 940 nm and 980 nm |
| Diode output | Up to 209 mW per diode |
| Diodes per pad | 28 on big and 3 on a small pad |
| Standard configuration | 6 large pads and 2 small pads |
| Maximum configuration | Up to 14 treatment pads |
| Energy adjustment | Levels 1–15 |
| Pulse-time range | 0.1–5 seconds |
| Operating modes | Continuous and pulsed |
| Treatment duration | Approximately 15–60 minutes |
| Cooling system | Independent wind cooling for each pad |
| Control interface | Touchscreen |
| Additional control | IC-card system |
| Equipment options | Vertical or portable |
| Voltage options | 110 V or 220 V |
| Plug options | US, UK, EU and AU |
Product specifications may vary according to the selected configuration. Confirm the final specification sheet with Wikbeauty before ordering.
Standard Package Contents
The standard package includes:
-
One 5D Lipo Laser main unit
-
Six large treatment pads
-
Two small treatment pads
-
Treatment-pad connection cables
-
Adjustable securing straps
-
Protective eyewear
-
Power cable with selected plug
-
English user manual
-
Setup and operating guidance
Optional pads and accessories can be added according to the selected system configuration.
Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides guidance to help buyers understand:
-
Equipment installation
-
Basic system operation
-
Treatment-parameter selection
-
Pad positioning
-
Routine cleaning and maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
-
Recommended safety procedures
Intended Users
This system is designed for professional use by:
-
Aesthetic practitioners
-
Body-contouring specialists
-
Beauty-studio owners
-
Wellness professionals
-
Trained independent operators
-
Qualified entrepreneurs establishing a treatment business
- Home Use
Safety and Contraindications
A complete consultation and suitability assessment should be performed before every treatment.
Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Implanted electronic devices
-
Active cancer
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Uncontrolled medical conditions
-
Active skin infections
-
Open wounds in the treatment area
-
Photosensitivity or the use of photosensitizing medication
-
Other conditions identified in the operating manual
This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the supplied user manual, relevant professional standards and applicable local regulations. Clients should seek medical advice when treatment suitability is uncertain.
Why Professionals Choose Wikbeauty
Specialized Beauty-Equipment Supply
Wikbeauty provides professional aesthetic and body-contouring equipment to international buyers.
Configurable Equipment
Select the machine format, voltage, plug and number of treatment pads according to your operating requirements.
International Electrical Options
The system can be prepared for different markets with 110 V or 220 V operation and the appropriate regional plug.
Operating Assistance
Support is available for installation, initial setup, routine operation and basic troubleshooting.
Direct Purchasing
Buy directly from the equipment supplier and receive assistance when confirming the most appropriate configuration.
Frequently Asked Questions
Is this a professional or home-use machine?
This is professional beauty equipment. It should be operated by a trained individual who understands consultation procedures, contraindications, treatment parameters and equipment safety.
What is the standard pad configuration?
The standard system includes six large pads and two small pads. Compatible configurations can be expanded to a maximum of 14 pads.
What is the difference between the large and small pads?
Large pads provide broader coverage for areas such as the abdomen, back and thighs. Small pads enable more targeted placement on the arms and other localized areas.
Should I choose the vertical or portable version?
The vertical model is suitable for a dedicated professional treatment room. The portable model is better suited to smaller spaces or operators who require easier storage and transportation.
How long does a session take?
A session may last approximately 15–60 minutes. Duration varies according to the treatment area, pad configuration, operating parameters and professional protocol.
Is there a recovery period?
The treatment is non-invasive and does not involve surgical incisions. Clients can generally resume normal daily activities after a session, subject to individual circumstances and professional guidance.
Are results guaranteed?
No aesthetic treatment can guarantee identical results for every person. Outcomes may vary depending on the client’s body composition, lifestyle, treatment schedule and the protocol used.
Can I order additional treatment pads?
Additional pads may be purchased for compatible configurations. Confirm the maximum number of supported pads before ordering.
Which voltage should I select?
Select the voltage that matches the electrical standard in your country. If uncertain, contact Wikbeauty before completing your purchase.
Configure Your 5D Lipo Laser System
Select the machine format, voltage, plug and treatment-pad configuration that best suits your professional requirements.
For assistance choosing between the vertical and portable models, contact Wikbeauty before placing your order.
Three-Year Warranty
Your Wikbeauty 5D Lipo Laser Machine is supported by a three-year limited warranty, providing additional confidence in your equipment investment.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the warranty terms, coverage includes manufacturing defects and eligible failures involving:
-
Main machine components
-
Internal electronic components
-
Touchscreen and control system
-
Treatment-pad connections
-
Other eligible parts supplied with the original machine
Technical Support
If a covered technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty’s support team will help you:
-
Identify the issue through remote technical assessment
-
Complete basic troubleshooting
-
Determine whether a replacement part or repair is required
-
Receive guidance for installing eligible replacement components
Warranty Conditions
The warranty applies to defects arising under normal and proper use. It does not cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Damage caused by misuse or incorrect operation
-
Unauthorized modification or repair
-
Incorrect voltage or electrical connection
-
Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance
-
Normal wear of consumable parts and accessories
-
Damage caused during unauthorized transportation
-
Failure to follow the supplied operating instructions
The original order information and machine serial number may be required when requesting warranty service. Full coverage is subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty terms.
Three years of warranty coverage. Professional technical assistance. Long-term confidence in your purchase.
Select Your Configuration and Add to Cart
Explore the complete range of professional lipo laser machines.
Receives in 8 days.
From $2,599.00
Professional 5D Lipo Laser System
Five-Wavelength Technology for Non-Invasive Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty 5D Lipo Laser Machine is a professional body-contouring system developed for beauty studios, wellness centers and qualified independent practitioners.
Combining five laser wavelengths with an adjustable multi-pad design, the system enables trained operators to create customized treatments for the abdomen, waist, thighs, arms, back and other commonly requested body areas.
Available in vertical and portable configurations, the machine provides a practical balance of treatment flexibility, operator control and client comfort.
Five wavelengths | Up to 14 pads | 15 energy levels | Vertical or portable
Advanced Five-Wavelength Technology
The system integrates five laser wavelengths within one professional platform:
-
650 nm
-
780 nm
-
808 nm
-
940 nm
-
980 nm
This multi-wavelength configuration provides greater versatility than a conventional single-wavelength system. Treatment parameters can be adjusted according to the selected area, professional protocol and individual client requirements.
Each treatment pad contains either 20 or 28 diode lasers, depending on the configuration selected, with an output of up to 209 mW per diode.
Key Product Advantages
Multi-Wavelength System
Five available wavelengths provide greater flexibility when developing professional body-contouring protocols.
Adjustable Treatment Parameters
Fifteen energy levels, adjustable pulse timing and continuous or pulsed modes allow the operator to customize each session.
Flexible Pad Configuration
The standard system includes six large pads and two small pads. Compatible configurations can be expanded to a maximum of 14 treatment pads.
Independent Pad Cooling
Each treatment pad features an independent wind-cooling system to support stable performance during operation.
Multiple Equipment Formats
Choose a vertical unit for a permanent treatment room or a portable unit for smaller spaces and more flexible working arrangements.
International Compatibility
The system is available in 110 V and 220 V versions, with US, UK, EU and AU plug options.
Professional Body-Contouring Applications
The 5D Lipo Laser Machine is designed for non-invasive aesthetic treatments focused on improving the appearance of body contours.
Common treatment areas include:
| Treatment area | Typical application |
|---|---|
| Abdomen | Abdominal contouring |
| Waist and flanks | Waistline definition |
| Upper and lower back | Localized body contouring |
| Upper arms | Arm-contouring treatments |
| Inner and outer thighs | Thigh shaping |
| Buttocks | Contour-focused treatments |
| Legs and calves | Localized lower-body treatments |
Treatment suitability, pad placement and operating parameters should be determined by a trained operator following a complete client consultation.
How the System Works
The treatment pads are positioned securely over the selected body area using adjustable straps. The operator then selects the treatment duration, energy level and pulse mode according to the recommended protocol.
The pads deliver controlled low-level laser energy to the treatment area without surgical incisions, injections or anesthesia. Sessions are designed to be comfortable and generally do not require a surgical recovery period.
The system should be used as part of a structured body-contouring program. Individual outcomes vary according to body composition, lifestyle, treatment frequency and the protocol applied.
Configurable Treatment-Pad System
Large Treatment Pads
The six large pads provide wider coverage for areas such as the abdomen, waist, back, thighs and buttocks.
Small Treatment Pads
The two small pads are designed for more targeted placement on areas such as the upper arms and smaller localized zones.
Optional Expansion
Selected machine configurations can support up to 14 pads. This provides additional flexibility when covering larger areas or developing multi-pad protocols.
Additional treatment pads are sold separately. Compatibility should be confirmed before purchase.
Vertical and Portable Options
Vertical Configuration
The vertical model provides a refined, professional presentation for dedicated treatment rooms. Its mobile base allows the equipment to be repositioned within the working area when necessary.
Recommended for:
-
Beauty studios
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Body-contouring centers
-
Permanent treatment rooms
-
Higher-volume treatment environments
Portable Configuration
The portable model offers a more compact footprint while retaining the core multi-pad functionality of the system.
Recommended for:
-
Independent practitioners
-
Smaller studios
-
Limited treatment spaces
-
Professionals requiring easier storage or transportation
Controlled, Client-Focused Operation
The system offers adjustable parameters to support professional operation and individual client comfort.
-
Energy adjustment from level 1 to 15
-
Pulse-time adjustment from 0.1 to 5 seconds
-
Continuous and pulsed operating modes
-
Adjustable session duration
-
Touchscreen control interface
-
Independent cooling for each pad
-
Secure pad-positioning straps
-
IC-card control system
Treatment duration may range from approximately 15 to 60 minutes, depending on the selected area and treatment protocol.
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product type | Professional 5D lipo laser machine |
| Technology | Low-level diode laser |
| Laser wavelengths | 650 nm, 780 nm, 808 nm, 940 nm and 980 nm |
| Diode output | Up to 209 mW per diode |
| Diodes per pad | 28 on big and 3 on a small pad |
| Standard configuration | 6 large pads and 2 small pads |
| Maximum configuration | Up to 14 treatment pads |
| Energy adjustment | Levels 1–15 |
| Pulse-time range | 0.1–5 seconds |
| Operating modes | Continuous and pulsed |
| Treatment duration | Approximately 15–60 minutes |
| Cooling system | Independent wind cooling for each pad |
| Control interface | Touchscreen |
| Additional control | IC-card system |
| Equipment options | Vertical or portable |
| Voltage options | 110 V or 220 V |
| Plug options | US, UK, EU and AU |
Product specifications may vary according to the selected configuration. Confirm the final specification sheet with Wikbeauty before ordering.
Standard Package Contents
The standard package includes:
-
One 5D Lipo Laser main unit
-
Six large treatment pads
-
Two small treatment pads
-
Treatment-pad connection cables
-
Adjustable securing straps
-
Protective eyewear
-
Power cable with selected plug
-
English user manual
-
Setup and operating guidance
Optional pads and accessories can be added according to the selected system configuration.
Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides guidance to help buyers understand:
-
Equipment installation
-
Basic system operation
-
Treatment-parameter selection
-
Pad positioning
-
Routine cleaning and maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
-
Recommended safety procedures
Intended Users
This system is designed for professional use by:
-
Aesthetic practitioners
-
Body-contouring specialists
-
Beauty-studio owners
-
Wellness professionals
-
Trained independent operators
-
Qualified entrepreneurs establishing a treatment business
- Home Use
Safety and Contraindications
A complete consultation and suitability assessment should be performed before every treatment.
Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Implanted electronic devices
-
Active cancer
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Uncontrolled medical conditions
-
Active skin infections
-
Open wounds in the treatment area
-
Photosensitivity or the use of photosensitizing medication
-
Other conditions identified in the operating manual
This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the supplied user manual, relevant professional standards and applicable local regulations. Clients should seek medical advice when treatment suitability is uncertain.
Why Professionals Choose Wikbeauty
Specialized Beauty-Equipment Supply
Wikbeauty provides professional aesthetic and body-contouring equipment to international buyers.
Configurable Equipment
Select the machine format, voltage, plug and number of treatment pads according to your operating requirements.
International Electrical Options
The system can be prepared for different markets with 110 V or 220 V operation and the appropriate regional plug.
Operating Assistance
Support is available for installation, initial setup, routine operation and basic troubleshooting.
Direct Purchasing
Buy directly from the equipment supplier and receive assistance when confirming the most appropriate configuration.
Frequently Asked Questions
Is this a professional or home-use machine?
This is professional beauty equipment. It should be operated by a trained individual who understands consultation procedures, contraindications, treatment parameters and equipment safety.
What is the standard pad configuration?
The standard system includes six large pads and two small pads. Compatible configurations can be expanded to a maximum of 14 pads.
What is the difference between the large and small pads?
Large pads provide broader coverage for areas such as the abdomen, back and thighs. Small pads enable more targeted placement on the arms and other localized areas.
Should I choose the vertical or portable version?
The vertical model is suitable for a dedicated professional treatment room. The portable model is better suited to smaller spaces or operators who require easier storage and transportation.
How long does a session take?
A session may last approximately 15–60 minutes. Duration varies according to the treatment area, pad configuration, operating parameters and professional protocol.
Is there a recovery period?
The treatment is non-invasive and does not involve surgical incisions. Clients can generally resume normal daily activities after a session, subject to individual circumstances and professional guidance.
Are results guaranteed?
No aesthetic treatment can guarantee identical results for every person. Outcomes may vary depending on the client’s body composition, lifestyle, treatment schedule and the protocol used.
Can I order additional treatment pads?
Additional pads may be purchased for compatible configurations. Confirm the maximum number of supported pads before ordering.
Which voltage should I select?
Select the voltage that matches the electrical standard in your country. If uncertain, contact Wikbeauty before completing your purchase.
Configure Your 5D Lipo Laser System
Select the machine format, voltage, plug and treatment-pad configuration that best suits your professional requirements.
For assistance choosing between the vertical and portable models, contact Wikbeauty before placing your order.
Three-Year Warranty
Your Wikbeauty 5D Lipo Laser Machine is supported by a three-year limited warranty, providing additional confidence in your equipment investment.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the warranty terms, coverage includes manufacturing defects and eligible failures involving:
-
Main machine components
-
Internal electronic components
-
Touchscreen and control system
-
Treatment-pad connections
-
Other eligible parts supplied with the original machine
Technical Support
If a covered technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty’s support team will help you:
-
Identify the issue through remote technical assessment
-
Complete basic troubleshooting
-
Determine whether a replacement part or repair is required
-
Receive guidance for installing eligible replacement components
Warranty Conditions
The warranty applies to defects arising under normal and proper use. It does not cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Damage caused by misuse or incorrect operation
-
Unauthorized modification or repair
-
Incorrect voltage or electrical connection
-
Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance
-
Normal wear of consumable parts and accessories
-
Damage caused during unauthorized transportation
-
Failure to follow the supplied operating instructions
The original order information and machine serial number may be required when requesting warranty service. Full coverage is subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty terms.
Three years of warranty coverage. Professional technical assistance. Long-term confidence in your purchase.
Select Your Configuration and Add to Cart
Explore the complete range of professional lipo laser machines.
Receives in 8 days.
$1,129.00
Professional 5D 80K RF Cavitation and Vacuum System
Multi-Function Technology for Body Contouring, Skin Tightening, and Facial Rejuvenation
The Wikbeauty 5D 80K RF Cavitation Machine is a professional beauty system developed for body contouring, skin tightening, facial rejuvenation, vacuum massage, and cellulite-appearance treatments.
The system combines 80K ultrasonic cavitation, 5D multipolar radiofrequency, and adjustable vacuum therapy. Its three specialized treatment handles support customized treatments for the face, neck, waist, abdomen, back, arms, and thighs.
With an intelligent touchscreen, pre-programmed protocols, air-and-water circulation cooling, universal 110V–240V compatibility, and three different handle sizes, the system is suitable for beauty salons, spas, body-contouring clinics, and professional wellness facilities.
80K cavitation | 5D radiofrequency | Vacuum therapy | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Technologies on One Platform
80K Ultrasonic Cavitation
The 80K cavitation function operates at 80,000Hz and delivers ultrasonic energy to suitable body areas as part of a professional contouring program.
Common applications include:
-
Abdomen contouring
-
Waistline treatments
-
Thigh contouring
-
Upper-arm treatments
-
Buttock-area programs
-
Localized body-shaping treatments
5D Multipolar Radiofrequency
Multipolar RF energy provides controlled thermal stimulation within the selected treatment area. The three handle sizes support facial and body applications.
Common applications include:
-
Facial skin tightening
-
Fine-line and wrinkle care
-
Neck rejuvenation
-
Body skin-firming programs
-
Collagen-remodeling support
-
Post-cavitation tightening treatments
Adjustable Vacuum Therapy
The vacuum function provides controlled suction and massage through the selected RF handle.
Common applications include:
-
Vacuum massage
-
Tissue mobilization
-
Cellulite-appearance programs
-
Body-contouring support
-
Lymphatic-style beauty treatments
-
Muscle-comfort massage
Select the Right Program for Each Client
Body-Contouring Program
Combines suitable cavitation, RF, and vacuum settings for targeted body areas.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdomen contouring
-
Waistline shaping
-
Thigh treatments
-
Upper-arm programs
-
Buttock-area contouring
Recommended for:
-
Clients concerned about localized body areas
-
Clients seeking non-invasive body contouring
-
Clients combining treatments with healthy lifestyle habits
Skin-Tightening Program
Uses multipolar RF energy and suitable vacuum settings to support controlled thermal treatments.
Recommended applications:
-
Loose-looking body skin
-
Reduced facial firmness
-
Upper-arm skin tightening
-
Abdomen and waist firming
-
General collagen-remodeling programs
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking firmer-looking skin
-
Clients combining cavitation and RF
-
Clients receiving professional age-management treatments
Facial-Rejuvenation Program
Uses the small vacuum and RF handle for controlled treatments across suitable facial and neck areas.
Recommended applications:
-
Facial skin tightening
-
Fine-line care
-
Wrinkle-appearance treatments
-
Neck rejuvenation
-
General facial firming
Recommended for:
-
Clients concerned about early signs of aging
-
Clients seeking non-invasive facial care
-
Clients requiring a smaller treatment applicator
Vacuum-Massage Program
Uses adjustable suction and controlled massage movements on suitable body areas.
Recommended applications:
-
Body massage
-
Tissue mobilization
-
Cellulite-appearance programs
-
Lymphatic-style beauty treatments
-
Combined body-contouring services
Recommended for:
-
Clients receiving multi-stage body treatments
-
Clients seeking massage-based body care
-
Clients combining vacuum with RF or cavitation
Adjustable Cavitation, RF, and Vacuum Settings
The Wikbeauty 5D 80K RF Cavitation Machine allows practitioners to personalize treatments according to the selected area, client comfort, and professional protocol.
| Setting | Available Configuration | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| Cavitation Frequency | 80,000Hz | Ultrasonic body-contouring treatments |
| RF Technology | 5D multipolar RF | Controlled facial and body heating |
| Vacuum Pressure | Adjustable | Personalized suction and massage |
| Treatment Handles | Three sizes | Face, waist, and larger body areas |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–40 minutes per area | Flexible treatment planning |
| Control System | Intelligent touchscreen | Protocol and setting management |
| Cooling System | Air and water circulation | Supports continuous operation |
| Power Supply | 110V–240V | International compatibility |
Settings should be adjusted progressively according to client comfort, treatment objectives, and the supplied operating protocols.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Face and Neck
The small vacuum and RF handle supports controlled treatments for smaller and more delicate areas.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Facial skin tightening
-
Fine-line care
-
Neck rejuvenation
-
Improved-looking firmness
-
Facial massage
Waist and Ribs
The medium vacuum and RF handle supports contouring and massage across medium-sized body areas.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Waistline contouring
-
Side-body treatments
-
Vacuum massage
-
Skin-firming support
-
General body shaping
Abdomen, Back, Arms, and Thighs
The large vacuum and RF handle supports treatments across larger body areas.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Abdomen contouring
-
Back treatments
-
Upper-arm contouring
-
Thigh programs
-
Cellulite-appearance care
Professional Treatment Applications
| Treatment Area | Primary Objective | Recommended Handle or Technology |
|---|---|---|
| Face | Skin tightening and wrinkle-appearance care | Small vacuum and RF handle |
| Neck | Rejuvenation and skin-firming support | Small vacuum and RF handle |
| Waist and Ribs | Contouring and vacuum massage | Medium vacuum and RF handle |
| Abdomen | Body contouring and skin tightening | Cavitation and large RF/vacuum handle |
| Back | Body treatment and massage | Large vacuum and RF handle |
| Upper Arms | Contouring and skin firming | Cavitation and large RF/vacuum handle |
| Thighs | Contouring and cellulite-appearance care | Cavitation, RF, and vacuum |
| Buttocks | Contouring and skin-firming support | Large vacuum and RF handle |
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, treatment objectives, target areas, previous procedures, and possible contraindications. Explain the treatment process and establish realistic expectations.
Step 2: Technology and Handle Selection
Choose the appropriate cavitation, RF, vacuum, or combined treatment sequence. Select the small, medium, or large handle according to the treatment area.
Step 3: Treatment Preparation
Clean the selected area and apply the appropriate conductive treatment medium. Configure the machine according to the selected technology, treatment area, and client comfort.
Step 4: Active Treatment
Move the treatment handle continuously according to the supplied protocol. Monitor the skin response, temperature, suction level, and client comfort throughout the session.
Step 5: Treatment Completion
Remove the treatment medium, inspect and clean the treated area, document the selected settings, and provide appropriate hydration, skincare, or lifestyle recommendations.
Designed for Professional Beauty Environments
The Wikbeauty 5D 80K RF Cavitation Machine combines three complementary treatment technologies with specialized facial and body handles.
Key advantages include:
-
80K ultrasonic cavitation
-
5D multipolar radiofrequency
-
Adjustable vacuum therapy
-
Three specialized treatment handles
-
Small handle for the face and neck
-
Medium handle for the waist and ribs
-
Large handle for the abdomen, back, arms, and thighs
-
Facial and body treatment capability
-
Intelligent touchscreen controls
-
Pre-programmed treatment protocols
-
Air-and-water circulation cooling
-
Approximately 20–40-minute treatments per area
-
Universal 110V–240V compatibility
-
CE and ISO certificates
-
Three-year professional warranty
-
Professional training and ongoing support
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty 5D 80K RF Cavitation Machine |
| Technology | 80K ultrasonic cavitation, 5D multipolar RF, and vacuum therapy |
| Cavitation Frequency | 80,000Hz |
| RF Technology | 5D multipolar radiofrequency |
| Vacuum Pressure | Adjustable |
| Treatment Handles | Three |
| Small Handle | Vacuum and RF for the face and neck |
| Medium Handle | Vacuum and RF for the waist and ribs |
| Large Handle | Vacuum and RF for the abdomen, back, arms, and thighs |
| Session Duration | Approximately 20–40 minutes per area |
| Display | Intelligent touchscreen |
| Treatment Programs | Pre-programmed and adjustable |
| Treatment Areas | Face, neck, ribs, waist, abdomen, back, arms, thighs, and buttocks |
| Cooling System | Air and water circulation |
| Power Supply | 110V–240V |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
| Warranty | Three-year professional warranty |
| Support | Professional training and ongoing technical assistance |
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty 5D 80K RF Cavitation main unit
-
1 × Small vacuum and RF handle
-
1 × Medium vacuum and RF handle
-
1 × Large vacuum and RF handle
-
Integrated 80K cavitation function
-
Integrated 5D RF function
-
Integrated adjustable vacuum function
-
Intelligent touchscreen control system
-
Pre-programmed treatment protocols
-
Conductive gel starter supply
-
1 × Universal 110V–240V power cable
-
Standard machine accessories
-
Warranty card
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Installation and operating guide
-
Safety and maintenance instructions
-
Professional video training
-
80K cavitation guidance
-
RF handle-selection guidance
-
Vacuum-pressure guidance
-
Facial treatment protocols
-
Body-contouring protocols
-
Combined treatment protocols
-
Client-consultation materials
-
Cleaning and maintenance guidance
-
Professional training certificate
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty 5D 80K RF Cavitation Machine includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use all three technologies safely and consistently.
Training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen operation
-
Client consultation and screening
-
80K cavitation operation
-
Treatment-handle selection
-
RF setting adjustment
-
Vacuum-pressure adjustment
-
Facial treatment protocols
-
Waist and body protocols
-
Combined treatment sequences
-
Client monitoring
-
Post-treatment guidance
-
Cooling-system maintenance
-
Equipment cleaning
-
Basic troubleshooting
Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty 5D 80K RF Cavitation Machine includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period.
Conductive gel, handle seals, tubing, filters, cooling-system fluids, and other components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement.
Technical Support Process
-
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team.
-
Provide the machine model and order information.
-
Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested.
-
A technician will assess the reported issue remotely.
-
Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged.
-
Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable accessories, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper cooling-system maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual.
Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation and health-history review should be completed before every treatment. The machine should only be operated by appropriately trained professionals.
Treatment may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Metal implants within the treatment area
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Active cancer or tumors
-
Active infection or inflammation
-
Open wounds within the treatment area
-
Serious liver or kidney conditions
-
Blood-clotting disorders
-
Reduced or impaired skin sensation
-
Recent surgery within the treatment area
-
Medical conditions requiring physician supervision
Cavitation should not be applied over the heart, head, neck, breasts, bones, joints, reproductive organs, or other prohibited areas identified in the operating manual.
Facial treatments should only use the suitable small facial handle and professionally selected settings. The cavitation function should not be used on the face.
Operating Precautions
-
Inspect the machine, handles, cables, tubing, and accessories before use.
-
Check the air-and-water cooling system before operation.
-
Select the correct handle for the treatment area.
-
Begin with conservative RF and vacuum settings.
-
Keep active cavitation and RF handles moving during treatment.
-
Use the correct conductive medium.
-
Monitor skin response, temperature, suction, and client comfort.
-
Avoid prohibited anatomical areas.
-
Do not leave an active handle stationary on the skin.
-
Record the treatment area and selected settings.
-
Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client.
-
Follow the supplied maintenance schedule.
-
Stop treatment if unexpected pain or skin reaction occurs.
Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty 5D 80K RF Cavitation Machine is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in:
-
Beauty salons
-
Medical spas
-
Body-contouring clinics
-
Wellness centers
-
Skin-rejuvenation studios
-
Professional spas
-
Aesthetic treatment facilities
-
Home-based beauty businesses
Operators should review applicable local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering treatments.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty 5D 80K RF Cavitation Machine?
Three Complementary Technologies
The system combines 80K ultrasonic cavitation, 5D multipolar radiofrequency, and adjustable vacuum therapy.
Three Specialized Treatment Handles
Small, medium, and large handles support customized treatments for facial, waist, and body areas.
Facial and Body Versatility
One system supports facial rejuvenation, skin tightening, body contouring, vacuum massage, and cellulite-appearance programs.
Professional Cooling and Controls
The intelligent touchscreen and air-and-water circulation cooling support efficient professional operation.
Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating training, treatment protocols, CE and ISO certificates, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty 5D 80K RF Cavitation Machine?
It is a professional beauty system combining 80K ultrasonic cavitation, 5D multipolar radiofrequency, and adjustable vacuum therapy.
What does 80K cavitation mean?
The cavitation function operates at an ultrasonic frequency of 80,000Hz and is intended for professional body-contouring programs.
Is 80K automatically better than 30K or 40K?
Different cavitation frequencies have different operating characteristics and treatment protocols. A higher frequency should not automatically be presented as deeper or more effective. Selection should follow the product design and professional training.
How many treatment handles are included?
The machine includes three handles: small for the face and neck, medium for the waist and ribs, and large for broader body areas.
Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the face, neck, waist, ribs, abdomen, back, upper arms, thighs, and buttocks.
How long does one treatment take?
A typical treatment takes approximately 20–40 minutes per area, depending on the selected technology and protocol.
Can cavitation, RF, and vacuum be combined?
Yes. Suitable clients may receive these functions as part of a structured treatment sequence. The order and settings should follow professional training.
Can the machine be used for facial treatments?
Yes. The small vacuum and RF handle supports suitable facial and neck treatments. The cavitation function should not be used on the face.
What does treatment feel like?
RF creates controlled warmth, vacuum produces suction and massage, and cavitation may produce an audible sensation. Settings should remain within a comfortable, professionally monitored range.
Is there downtime?
Clients can generally continue normal daily activities following a suitable treatment. Temporary warmth, redness, sensitivity, or vacuum marks may occur.
Are results guaranteed?
Outcomes vary according to the treatment area, body composition, skin condition, number of sessions, selected settings, lifestyle, and individual response.
What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates.
What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues.
Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers 80K cavitation, RF, vacuum therapy, handle selection, treatment protocols, client screening, cooling-system maintenance, cleaning, and troubleshooting.
Add Professional 5D 80K Body and Facial Treatments to Your Business
The Wikbeauty 5D 80K RF Cavitation Machine enables salons, spas, and beauty clinics to provide customizable body-contouring, facial-rejuvenation, skin-tightening, and vacuum-massage treatments.
Five key benefits:
-
80K ultrasonic cavitation for professional body programs
-
5D multipolar RF with adjustable vacuum therapy
-
Three specialized handles for the face, waist, and body
-
Intelligent touchscreen controls with air-and-water cooling
-
CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, package details, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Receives in 8 days.
$2,169.00
Professional Six-Handle Cryolipolysis and Cavitation System
Dual-Technology Platform for Multi-Area Fat Reduction and Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty Six-Handle Cryolipolysis Cavitation Machine is a professional body-contouring system that combines 360° fat-freezing technology with 40K–80K ultrasonic cavitation.
Its six-handle configuration supports simultaneous treatment across multiple suitable body areas. Small, medium, large, chin, arm, and thigh applicators allow professionals to create customized programs for different anatomical areas and client objectives.
With adjustable cooling from 5°C to −15°C, 40K–80K cavitation, optional RF and vacuum functions, real-time temperature monitoring, and a 12-inch intelligent touchscreen, the system is designed for premium body-contouring clinics, medical spas, slimming centers, and high-volume wellness facilities.
360° cryolipolysis | 40K–80K cavitation | Six-handle operation | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Functions on One Platform
360° Cryolipolysis Cooling
The cryolipolysis function delivers controlled cooling around suitable subcutaneous tissue held within the applicator chamber.
Common applications include:
-
Abdomen treatments
-
Waist and flank contouring
-
Upper-arm programs
-
Inner- and outer-thigh treatments
-
Back and bra-line treatments
-
Suitable submental-area treatments
40K–80K Ultrasonic Cavitation
The cavitation function delivers ultrasonic energy to suitable body areas as part of a professional contouring program.
Common applications include:
-
Abdomen contouring
-
Waistline treatments
-
Thigh programs
-
Upper-arm contouring
-
Buttock-area treatments
-
Cellulite-appearance programs
Optional Radiofrequency and Vacuum
Available RF and vacuum functions can support skin-firming, tissue-massage, and combined body-care programs.
Common applications include:
-
Body skin-firming treatments
-
Vacuum massage
-
Tissue mobilization
-
Cellulite-appearance care
-
Post-cavitation RF treatments
-
Combined body-contouring programs
Select the Right Program for Each Client
Cryolipolysis Fat-Freezing Program
Uses the appropriate 360° cooling applicator for targeted treatment of suitable subcutaneous tissue.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdomen contouring
-
Waist and flank treatments
-
Back and bra-line programs
-
Upper-arm contouring
-
Thigh-area treatments
Recommended for:
-
Clients with suitable pinchable subcutaneous fat
-
Clients seeking localized body contouring
-
Clients with stable and realistic treatment goals
Ultrasonic Cavitation Program
Uses the selected 40K–80K cavitation configuration for professional body-contouring treatments.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdomen and waist programs
-
Upper-arm treatments
-
Thigh contouring
-
Buttock-area treatments
-
Cellulite-appearance care
Recommended for:
-
Clients suitable for ultrasonic body treatments
-
Clients seeking non-invasive contouring
-
Clients combining treatment with healthy lifestyle habits
Combined Cryolipolysis and Cavitation Program
Incorporates both technologies within a professionally planned treatment course or suitable sequence.
Recommended applications:
-
Multi-stage body contouring
-
Abdomen and thigh programs
-
Waist and flank treatments
-
Cellulite-appearance care
-
Comprehensive body-shaping programs
Recommended for:
-
Clients suitable for both technologies
-
Clients with several treatment objectives
-
Clinics offering advanced combination services
Multi-Area Treatment Program
Uses the six-handle configuration to treat several suitable areas during the same professionally monitored appointment.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdomen and thighs
-
Arms and waist
-
Bilateral thigh treatment
-
Back and flank programs
-
Customized multi-area treatments
Recommended for:
-
Clients requiring several treatment areas
-
High-volume professional facilities
-
Clients receiving comprehensive body-contouring programs
Adjustable Cooling, Cavitation, and Treatment Settings
The Wikbeauty Six-Handle Cryolipolysis Cavitation Machine allows practitioners to personalize treatments according to the selected technology, applicator, treatment area, and client tolerance.
| Setting | Available Configuration | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| Cryolipolysis Technology | 360° surround cooling | Controlled fat-freezing treatment |
| Cooling Range | 5°C to −15°C | Adjustable cooling temperature |
| Cavitation Frequency | 40K–80K | Ultrasonic body-contouring programs |
| Treatment Handles | Six | Multi-area treatment capability |
| Optional Functions | RF and vacuum | Skin-firming and massage support |
| Session Duration | Approximately 30–60 minutes | Customized treatment planning |
| Treatment Course | Commonly one to three sessions per area | Progressive body-contouring program |
| Control System | 12-inch touchscreen | Protocol and parameter management |
Cooling temperature, suction, cavitation frequency, treatment duration, and technology sequence should follow the supplied protocols and professional assessment.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Abdomen, Waist, and Flanks
Different applicator sizes and treatment technologies support customized midsection programs.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Upper-abdomen contouring
-
Lower-abdomen contouring
-
Waistline definition
-
Love-handle treatments
-
General midsection shaping
Arms, Back, and Buttocks
Suitable handles can be selected for localized upper-body and posterior body areas.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Upper-arm contouring
-
Bra-line treatments
-
Upper- and lower-back programs
-
Buttock-area treatments
-
Cellulite-appearance care
Thighs and Double Chin
Specialized applicators support professionally assessed lower-body and submental treatments.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Inner-thigh contouring
-
Outer-thigh treatments
-
Upper-leg shaping
-
Double-chin-area contouring
-
Bilateral lower-body programs
Professional Treatment Applications
| Treatment Area | Primary Objective | Recommended Technology or Applicator |
|---|---|---|
| Abdomen | Localized midsection contouring | Cryolipolysis or cavitation |
| Waist and Flanks | Waistline and love-handle treatment | Suitable cryolipolysis applicator |
| Upper Arms | Localized arm contouring | Arm applicator or cavitation |
| Back and Bra Line | Targeted back-area treatment | Suitable cryolipolysis applicator |
| Inner Thighs | Lower-body contouring | Thigh applicator |
| Outer Thighs | Thigh contouring and texture care | Cryolipolysis or cavitation |
| Buttocks | Contouring and cellulite-appearance care | Cavitation and optional RF |
| Double Chin | Submental-area treatment | Specialized chin applicator |
The exact applicator and technology should be selected according to client suitability and the supplied professional protocols.
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, body-contouring objectives, target areas, previous procedures, implants, skin condition, and possible contraindications for cryolipolysis, cavitation, RF, and vacuum.
Step 2: Technology and Applicator Selection
Select cryolipolysis, cavitation, or a suitable combination. Choose applicators that match the tissue size, shape, and anatomical location.
Step 3: Skin Protection and Setup
For cryolipolysis, apply a new approved antifreeze membrane over each complete treatment area. For cavitation or RF, apply the appropriate conductive treatment medium.
Step 4: Active Treatment
Begin the selected program for approximately 30–60 minutes. Monitor temperature, applicator contact, suction, skin response, and client comfort throughout the session.
Step 5: Treatment Completion
Remove the applicators and treatment medium, inspect the skin, and perform the recommended massage when appropriate. Document the settings and provide aftercare guidance.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Wikbeauty Six-Handle Cryolipolysis Cavitation Machine combines dual-technology body contouring with simultaneous multi-area capability.
Key advantages include:
-
Professional 360° cryolipolysis technology
-
40K–80K ultrasonic cavitation
-
Six-handle configuration
-
Simultaneous multi-area treatment
-
Adjustable cooling from 5°C to −15°C
-
Small, medium, large, chin, arm, and thigh applicators
-
Optional RF and vacuum functions
-
Treatments for multiple body areas
-
12-inch intelligent touchscreen
-
Real-time temperature monitoring
-
Antifreeze membrane protection
-
Approximately 30–60-minute sessions
-
110V and 220V compatibility
-
CE and ISO certificates
-
Three-year professional warranty
-
Professional training and ongoing support
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty Six-Handle Cryolipolysis Cavitation Machine |
| Core Technologies | 360° cryolipolysis and ultrasonic cavitation |
| Cooling Range | 5°C to −15°C adjustable |
| Cavitation Frequency | 40K–80K |
| Additional Functions | Optional RF and vacuum |
| Treatment Handles | Six |
| Applicator Types | Small, medium, large, chin, arm, and thigh |
| Operation | Simultaneous multi-area treatment |
| Primary Functions | Fat reduction, body contouring, cellulite-appearance care, and skin-firming support |
| Treatment Areas | Abdomen, waist, arms, thighs, back, buttocks, and double chin |
| Session Duration | Approximately 30–60 minutes |
| Recommended Course | Commonly one to three sessions per area |
| Treatment Interval | Approximately four to six weeks for cryolipolysis |
| Display | 12-inch intelligent touchscreen |
| Temperature Monitoring | Real-time |
| Safety Features | Antifreeze membranes and intelligent monitoring |
| Power Supply | 110V or 220V |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
| Warranty | Three-year professional warranty |
| Support | Professional training and ongoing technical assistance |
The supplied product information lists potential fat-reduction figures of 20–40% per treated area. These figures should not be presented as guaranteed outcomes because individual results vary.
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty Six-Handle Cryolipolysis Cavitation main unit
-
6 × Treatment applicators
-
Small, medium, and large applicator configurations
-
Chin applicator
-
Arm applicator
-
Thigh applicator
-
Integrated 40K–80K cavitation function
-
Optional RF and vacuum functions according to configuration
-
Applicator connection hoses and cables
-
12-inch intelligent touchscreen
-
Real-time temperature-monitoring system
-
Antifreeze membranes and treatment-medium starter supply
-
1 × Region-compatible power cable
-
Standard machine accessories
-
Warranty card
The final handle allocation and optional RF or vacuum configuration should follow the selected product package.
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Installation and operating guide
-
Safety and maintenance instructions
-
Professional video training
-
Cryolipolysis applicator-selection guidance
-
Multi-handle operation guidance
-
Antifreeze membrane guidance
-
Cooling-temperature and suction guidance
-
40K–80K cavitation protocols
-
Optional RF and vacuum protocols
-
Body-area treatment guidance
-
Client-consultation materials
-
Aftercare instructions
-
Cleaning and maintenance guidance
-
Professional training certificate
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty Six-Handle Cryolipolysis Cavitation Machine includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use the system safely and consistently.
Training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen operation
-
Client consultation and screening
-
Tissue and treatment-area assessment
-
Cryolipolysis applicator selection
-
Six-handle treatment planning
-
Correct antifreeze membrane placement
-
Cooling-temperature and suction adjustment
-
Cavitation frequency and operation
-
Optional RF and vacuum operation
-
Combined-treatment planning
-
Client monitoring
-
Post-treatment massage
-
Aftercare guidance
-
Equipment cleaning and maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Six-Handle Cryolipolysis Cavitation Machine includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period.
Antifreeze membranes, treatment gels, applicator seals, hoses, filters, conductive media, and other components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement.
Technical Support Process
-
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team.
-
Provide the machine model and order information.
-
Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested.
-
A technician will assess the reported issue remotely.
-
Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged.
-
Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable accessories, cold injury caused by incorrect membrane placement, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual.
Safety and Contraindications
A detailed consultation and health-history review must be completed before every treatment. The system should only be operated by appropriately trained professionals.
Cryolipolysis may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or breastfeeding
-
Cryoglobulinemia
-
Cold agglutinin disease
-
Paroxysmal cold hemoglobinuria
-
Severe cold sensitivity or cold urticaria
-
Raynaud’s disease or serious circulation disorders
-
Active hernia within or near the treatment area
-
Active infection or open wounds
-
Reduced or impaired sensation
-
Recent surgery within the treatment area
Cavitation, RF, or vacuum may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Metal implants within the treatment area
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Serious liver or kidney conditions
-
Blood-clotting disorders
-
Active cancer or tumors
-
Severe skin conditions
-
Medical conditions requiring physician supervision
The system is intended for localized body contouring and should not be presented as a treatment for obesity or a replacement for weight management.
Cryolipolysis carries risks, including cold injury, prolonged numbness, bruising, contour irregularity, pain, and rare paradoxical adipose hyperplasia. Clients must receive appropriate risk information and provide informed consent.
Operating Precautions
-
Inspect the machine, applicators, hoses, seals, cables, and accessories before use.
-
Screen the client for every selected technology.
-
Select the correct applicator and treatment mode.
-
Use a new approved antifreeze membrane for each cryolipolysis application.
-
Ensure each membrane covers the complete cooling area.
-
Use the correct conductive medium for cavitation or RF.
-
Begin with professionally selected settings.
-
Monitor temperature, applicator contact, suction, skin condition, and comfort.
-
Monitor every active treatment area continuously.
-
Keep cavitation and RF handpieces moving during treatment.
-
Do not treat prohibited or unsuitable anatomical areas.
-
Record applicators, technologies, settings, duration, and treatment areas.
-
Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client.
-
Follow the supplied maintenance schedule.
-
Stop treatment if unexpected pain or skin changes occur.
Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty Six-Handle Cryolipolysis Cavitation Machine is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in:
-
Premium body-contouring clinics
-
Slimming centers
-
Medical spas
-
Beauty salons
-
Wellness centers
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Professional spas
-
High-volume treatment facilities
Operators should review applicable local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before providing cryolipolysis, cavitation, RF, or vacuum treatments.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty Six-Handle Cryolipolysis Cavitation Machine?
Dual Body-Contouring Technologies
The system combines 360° cryolipolysis with 40K–80K ultrasonic cavitation on one professional platform.
Six-Handle Multi-Area Operation
Six specialized applicators support simultaneous treatment across multiple suitable body areas.
Optional RF and Vacuum Functions
Available configurations can add skin-firming, suction massage, and combined body-care services.
Intelligent Monitoring and Controls
The 12-inch touchscreen, real-time temperature monitoring, and antifreeze membrane protocols support professional operation.
Complete Professional Support
The package includes dual-technology training, multi-handle protocols, CE and ISO certificates, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty Six-Handle Cryolipolysis Cavitation Machine?
It is a professional body-contouring system combining 360° cryolipolysis, 40K–80K ultrasonic cavitation, and six-handle multi-area operation.
What is the difference between cryolipolysis and cavitation?
Cryolipolysis uses controlled cooling on suitable subcutaneous fat tissue. Cavitation delivers ultrasonic energy as part of a professional body-contouring program.
Can cryolipolysis and cavitation be combined?
Yes. Suitable clients may receive both technologies within a professionally designed course or treatment sequence. Compatibility and timing should follow the supplied protocols.
Why does the machine have six handles?
The six-handle configuration provides different applicator sizes and supports simultaneous treatment across multiple suitable body areas.
Can all six handles operate simultaneously?
The supplied product information describes simultaneous multi-area operation. The number and combination of active handles should follow the machine configuration, operating manual, and professional training.
Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the abdomen, waist, flanks, upper arms, thighs, back, buttocks, and suitable double-chin areas.
What cooling temperatures are available?
The cryolipolysis function provides adjustable cooling from 5°C to −15°C.
What cavitation frequencies are available?
The machine provides ultrasonic cavitation within the supplied 40K–80K range.
How long does one treatment take?
A standard treatment takes approximately 30–60 minutes, depending on the selected technology, number of areas, and professional protocol.
How many sessions are recommended?
One to three sessions per area, commonly spaced four to six weeks apart. Cavitation frequency should follow its separate professional protocol.
When may clients notice changes?
The changes may become visible after approximately three to four weeks, with progressive changes over eight to twelve weeks.
Is the treatment painful?
Cryolipolysis commonly produces suction, strong cooling, pulling, and temporary numbness. Cavitation generally produces vibration and may create an audible sensation. Individual comfort varies.
Is there downtime?
Many clients can resume normal activities after treatment. Temporary redness, swelling, bruising, tenderness, tingling, cramping, or numbness may occur.
Are treated fat cells permanently removed?
Fat cells processed after cryolipolysis do not regenerate in the same way. However, remaining fat cells can enlarge with weight gain, and individual contour changes are not guaranteed to be permanent.
Is this a weight-loss machine?
No. The system is intended for localized body contouring and is not a treatment for obesity or a replacement for nutrition, exercise, or medical weight management.
What performance figures are supplied?
The supplied product information lists potential fat-reduction figures of 20–40% per treated area. These figures are not guaranteed and vary by client and protocol.
Are RF and vacuum included?
RF and vacuum are listed as optional functions. Their inclusion should be confirmed when selecting the final machine configuration.
What certificates are included?
The machine includes CE and ISO certificates.
What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues.
Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers cryolipolysis, cavitation, multi-handle operation, membrane placement, cooling and suction settings, optional RF and vacuum functions, aftercare, maintenance, and troubleshooting.
Add Dual-Technology Multi-Area Body Contouring to Your Business
The Wikbeauty Six-Handle Cryolipolysis Cavitation Machine enables premium clinics, medical spas, and slimming centers to provide cryolipolysis and cavitation treatments across multiple suitable body areas.
Five key benefits:
-
360° cryolipolysis and 40K–80K ultrasonic cavitation
-
Six specialized handles for multi-area treatments
-
Adjustable cooling from 5°C to −15°C
-
A 12-inch touchscreen with real-time temperature monitoring
-
CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, handle configuration, optional RF and vacuum functions, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Receives in 8 days.
$3,999.00
Professional 6-in-1 Spiral Cavitation System
Ultrasonic Cavitation and Radiofrequency for Body Contouring
The 6-in-1 Spiral Cavitation Machine is a multifunctional body-contouring platform developed for beauty salons, aesthetic spas, wellness clinics and professional body-sculpting studios.
The system combines ultrasonic cavitation, radiofrequency and four complementary treatment functions for customized body-contouring, skin-firming, cellulite-appearance and body-care programs.
Multiple treatment applicators and adjustable intensity settings allow trained practitioners to create protocols for the abdomen, thighs, buttocks, upper arms, hips, back, waist and suitable face and neck areas.
Six treatment functions | Ultrasonic cavitation | Radiofrequency | Three-year warranty
Four Professional Applications on One Body-Contouring Platform
Ultrasonic Cavitation
The Cavitation Handle delivers ultrasonic energy to suitable localized body areas.
Common applications include:
-
Abdomen treatments
-
Waist and flank programs
-
Thigh treatments
-
Upper-arm programs
-
Hip and back treatments
-
General body-contouring services
Radiofrequency Skin Firming
The RF function delivers controlled thermal energy for professional skin-firming and texture-refinement programs.
Common applications include:
-
Loose-looking body skin
-
Skin-firming support
-
Cellulite-appearance programs
-
Abdomen and thigh treatments
-
Suitable facial protocols
-
General rejuvenation services
Cellulite-Appearance and Texture Care
The system’s combined technologies can be incorporated into professional programs for uneven-looking body texture.
Common applications include:
-
Inner thighs
-
Outer thighs
-
Buttocks
-
Hips
-
Abdomen
-
Other professionally assessed body areas
Circulation and Drainage Support
Complementary treatment functions support professionally planned massage and circulation-focused body-care programs.
Common applications include:
-
Temporary water-retention support
-
Post-cavitation massage
-
General circulation-focused wellness
-
Body-care treatments
-
Muscle relaxation
-
Maintenance-oriented programs
The appropriate technology, applicator, energy level and session duration should be selected according to the treatment area, client condition and professional protocol.
Select the Right Treatment Program for Each Client
The system supports customized body-contouring pathways using one or more of its six functions.
Program 1: Abdomen and Waist Contouring
A body-focused program for suitable localized areas around the abdomen and waist.
Recommended technologies:
-
Ultrasonic Cavitation
-
Radiofrequency
-
Complementary Body-Care Functions
-
Post-Treatment Massage
Recommended for:
-
Upper abdomen
-
Lower abdomen
-
Waistline
-
Flanks and side body
Program 2: Thigh and Cellulite Appearance
A lower-body program designed for suitable inner- and outer-thigh concerns.
Recommended technologies:
-
Ultrasonic Cavitation
-
Radiofrequency
-
Texture-Refinement Function
-
Circulation-Support Treatment
Recommended for:
-
Inner thighs
-
Outer thighs
-
Buttocks
-
Cellulite-appearance programs
Program 3: Arms, Back and Hips
A customizable program for smaller or contoured body zones.
Recommended technologies:
-
Suitable Cavitation Applicator
-
Radiofrequency
-
Complementary Massage Function
-
Customized Lower-Intensity Settings
Recommended for:
-
Upper arms
-
Upper and lower back
-
Hips
-
Bra-line areas
Program 4: Face and Neck Firming
A gentler professional program using applicators and settings intended for suitable facial and neck areas.
Recommended technologies:
-
Suitable RF Applicator
-
Gentle Skin-Firming Program
-
Customized Low-Intensity Settings
-
Professional Facial Protocol
Recommended for:
-
Facial-contour refinement
-
Jawline treatments
-
Suitable neck areas
-
General skin-firming support
Adjustable Energy for Customized Treatments
The 6-in-1 Spiral Cavitation System provides adjustable intensity settings for different technologies and treatment areas.
| Treatment Setting | Recommended Application |
|---|---|
| Lower Intensity | First-time clients and smaller treatment areas |
| Moderate Intensity | General professional body-contouring treatments |
| Higher Intensity | Appropriately selected body areas and experienced clients |
| Customized Program | Technology-specific settings based on professional assessment |
The adjustable controls give trained practitioners greater flexibility over cavitation energy, RF intensity and client comfort.
New clients should begin with conservative settings before treatment intensity is increased gradually.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
The system supports professional treatment of multiple body and facial zones.
Upper-Body Treatments
-
Upper arms
-
Upper back
-
Lower back
-
Bra-line areas
-
Waist
-
Flanks
Lower-Body Treatments
-
Abdomen
-
Hips
-
Buttocks
-
Inner thighs
-
Outer thighs
-
Legs
Face and Neck Treatments
-
Suitable cheek areas
-
Jawline
-
Lower face
-
Appropriate neck areas
-
Other professionally assessed facial zones
Professional Body and Facial Applications
The available treatments depend on the selected technology, applicator, energy setting and professional protocol.
| Treatment Area | Applicable Technology | Intended Aesthetic Application |
|---|---|---|
| Abdomen | Cavitation and RF | Body-contour refinement |
| Waist and flanks | Cavitation and RF | Waist-contouring support |
| Inner and outer thighs | Cavitation and RF | Lower-body and texture care |
| Buttocks | RF and complementary functions | Firming and cellulite-appearance support |
| Upper arms | Cavitation or RF | Targeted body-care programs |
| Back and hips | Cavitation and RF | Localized contour refinement |
| Face and jawline | Suitable RF Applicator | Facial-contour programs |
| Neck | Suitable RF Applicator | Professional firming support |
Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete consultation should be performed before every treatment.
How a Professional Treatment Session Works
1. Client Consultation
The practitioner reviews the client’s health history, treatment goals, body condition, target areas and contraindications.
2. Technology and Applicator Selection
The appropriate treatment applicators are selected according to the treatment area and intended body-contouring program.
3. Parameter Selection
The practitioner selects the cavitation intensity, RF energy and other available settings according to the client’s tolerance and professional protocol.
4. Multi-Technology Treatment
The selected technologies are applied in the appropriate sequence. A typical professional treatment lasts approximately 60 minutes.
5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After treatment, the areas are assessed and the client receives suitable hydration, activity and aftercare guidance.
Temporary redness, warmth, tenderness, tingling or sensitivity may occur depending on the selected technology and intensity.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The system combines six treatment functions with digital controls and multiple applicators for streamlined professional operation.
Key operating advantages include:
-
Ultrasonic Cavitation
-
Radiofrequency Skin Firming
-
Six integrated treatment functions
-
Multiple treatment applicators
-
Adjustable intensity levels
-
LCD control interface
-
Preset treatment modes
-
Dual-voltage compatibility
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | 6-in-1 Spiral Cavitation Machine |
| Product Type | Professional multifunctional body-contouring system |
| Number of Functions | Six |
| Primary Technologies | Ultrasonic Cavitation and Radiofrequency |
| Additional Functions | Four complementary body-care modalities |
| Treatment Applicators | Multiple heads for different body areas and functions |
| Session Duration | Approximately 60 minutes |
| Treatment Areas | Abdomen, thighs, buttocks, arms, hips, back, waist, face and neck |
| Intensity Levels | Adjustable |
| Control Interface | LCD screen with professional controls |
| Power Supply | 110V and 220V |
| Safety Features | Automatic shut-off, client-safety sensors and overload protection |
| Warranty | Three-year parts warranty |
| Support | Professional training and customer assistance |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
What Is Included?
The package includes the main control system, treatment applicators and required operating accessories.
Standard Equipment
-
One 6-in-1 Spiral Cavitation main unit
-
Ultrasonic Cavitation Handle
-
Radiofrequency Treatment Handle
-
Complementary treatment applicators
-
Handle-connection components
-
Required treatment accessories
-
Power cable
-
English user manual
-
Operating guidance
Documentation and Training
-
English operating manual
-
Remote professional training
-
Machine installation guidance
-
Treatment-handle setup
-
Cavitation operation
-
RF-energy selection
-
Treatment-area guidance
-
Multi-technology sequencing
-
Client consultation guidance
-
Safety and contraindication instructions
-
Cleaning and maintenance guidance
-
Basic troubleshooting assistance
-
Training certificate after completion
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Professional training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
LCD control operation
-
Treatment-handle installation
-
Ultrasonic Cavitation operation
-
Radiofrequency settings
-
Applicator selection
-
Body-area assessment
-
Face and neck precautions
-
Multi-technology treatment sequencing
-
Client-comfort monitoring
-
Cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Safety procedures
-
Basic troubleshooting
A professional training certificate is provided after successful completion.
Three-Year Warranty
The 6-in-1 Spiral Cavitation Machine is supported by a three-year parts warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered:
-
Main machine unit
-
Internal electronic components
-
LCD control system
-
Cavitation-generation components
-
Radiofrequency components
-
Original treatment handles
-
Handle and cable connections
-
Other eligible parts supplied with the machine
Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the support team will assist with:
-
Remote inspection and fault identification
-
Guided troubleshooting
-
Confirmation of the affected component
-
Warranty-eligibility review
-
Replacement-part assistance when covered
-
Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Damage caused by misuse
-
Incorrect treatment-handle operation
-
Unauthorized repairs or modifications
-
Incorrect voltage or electrical connection
-
Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance
-
Normal wear of accessories and consumable items
-
Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual
-
Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization
The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service.
Full coverage remains subject to the official warranty policy.
Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional cavitation and radiofrequency equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel.
A complete health assessment and contraindication review must be completed before treatment.
Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Metal implants in or near the treatment area
-
Active cancer
-
Active or suspected blood clots
-
Severe cardiovascular or vascular conditions
-
Open wounds or active skin infections
-
Severe liver or kidney conditions
-
Bleeding disorders
-
Uncontrolled diabetes
-
Recent surgery
-
Reduced sensation
-
Uncontrolled medical conditions
-
Other contraindications listed in the operating manual
Cavitation must not be applied over the head, heart, breasts, kidneys, liver, reproductive organs, bone surfaces or other prohibited areas.
RF energy and cavitation intensity must be selected according to the treatment area, skin condition and client tolerance.
This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain.
Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for:
-
Beauty salons
-
Professional spas
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Wellness centers
-
Body-contouring studios
-
Trained independent practitioners
-
Qualified aesthetic professionals
-
Businesses expanding their body-treatment services
This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use.
Why Choose the 6-in-1 Spiral Cavitation Machine?
Combine Six Treatment Functions
The system combines ultrasonic cavitation, radiofrequency and four complementary body-care functions in one professional platform.
Treat Multiple Body Areas
Multiple applicators support professional protocols for the abdomen, thighs, buttocks, arms, hips, back, waist and suitable facial areas.
Customize Every Session
Adjustable intensity and technology selection allow treatments to be adapted to the client’s condition and professional objectives.
Expand Your Service Menu
The machine supports body-contouring, skin-firming, cellulite-appearance, texture-refinement and suitable face and neck programs.
Protect Your Investment
The system includes a three-year parts warranty, CE and ISO certificates, professional training and customer support.
Frequently Asked Questions
How does ultrasonic cavitation work?
The Cavitation Handle delivers ultrasonic energy to suitable localized body areas for professionally planned contour-refinement programs.
How does radiofrequency complement cavitation?
Radiofrequency provides controlled thermal energy for skin-firming support and texture-refinement treatments.
What makes this a six-in-one system?
The machine combines ultrasonic cavitation, radiofrequency and four complementary professional body-care functions.
Which areas can be treated?
Suitable areas include the abdomen, waist, flanks, thighs, buttocks, upper arms, back, hips and selected face or neck areas using appropriate applicators.
How long does a session take?
A typical professional session lasts approximately 60 minutes. Treatment duration varies according to the number of areas and technologies selected.
How many sessions are recommended?
A typical professional treatment course may include approximately 8–12 sessions. The final number and interval depend on client condition, treatment area and professional assessment.
Is the treatment uncomfortable?
Clients may feel vibration or an audible tone during cavitation and warmth during RF treatment. Settings should remain within the client’s comfort level.
Is there downtime?
Many suitable clients can resume normal activities shortly after treatment. Temporary redness, warmth, tenderness or sensitivity may occur.
Are results permanent?
No permanent body-contouring outcome should be guaranteed. Results vary, and remaining fat cells can change size with future weight gain.
Is professional training included?
Professional training covers cavitation, RF, applicator selection, treatment sequencing, cleaning, maintenance and safety. A training certificate is provided.
What does the three-year warranty cover?
The three-year parts warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Consumables, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded.
Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included.
Add 6-in-1 Cavitation to Your Body-Contouring Business
The 6-in-1 Spiral Cavitation Machine combines:
-
Ultrasonic Cavitation
-
Radiofrequency Skin Firming
-
Six integrated treatment functions
-
Professional body and facial applications
-
Three-year parts warranty and customer support
Contact Wikbeauty to order the machine or receive more information about its treatment functions, applicators and professional training.
Order Your 6-in-1 Spiral Cavitation Machine and Request Pricing
Receives in 8 days.
$2,999.00
Professional 3-in-1 7D, 8D and Thermal Shaping System
Three Dedicated Handles for Facial Lifting and Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty 7D, 8D and Thermal Shaping 3-in-1 Machine combines three professional treatment handles within one floor-standing touchscreen system.
The 7D and 8D handles provide focused ultrasound options for facial lifting, skin firming and contour refinement. The Thermal Shaping handle adds deeper body-contouring applications for areas such as the abdomen, waist, arms and thighs.
With seven included cartridges across five distinct treatment depths, the system gives trained operators the flexibility to develop professional face and body treatment protocols from one platform.
Three dedicated handles | Seven cartridges | Face and body applications | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Technologies in One System
7D HIFU Handle
The 7D handle is supplied with three cartridge depths for professional facial and neck treatments:
-
1.5 mm
-
3.0 mm
-
4.5 mm
These cartridges allow trained operators to select an appropriate treatment depth for different facial areas and tissue layers.
Common applications include:
-
Facial skin firming
-
Improvement in the appearance of fine lines
-
Brow-area lifting
-
Cheek contouring
-
Jawline definition
-
Neck treatments
8D HIFU Handle
The 8D handle includes 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges for focused facial lifting and contour-refinement protocols.
It can be incorporated into treatments focused on:
-
Lower-face firming
-
Cheek lifting
-
Jawline contouring
-
Neck tightening
-
Deeper facial treatment protocols
The 7D and 8D handles provide different delivery formats. The appropriate handle should be selected according to the treatment area, client condition and professional protocol.
Thermal Shaping Handle
The Thermal Shaping handle extends the system’s applications from facial treatments to professional body contouring.
It includes:
-
0.8 mm cartridge
-
13 mm cartridge
The deeper cartridge is designed for body areas with suitable subcutaneous tissue, while the shallower cartridge supports more targeted treatment protocols.
Common treatment areas include:
-
Abdomen
-
Waist and flanks
-
Upper and lower back
-
Upper arms
-
Thighs
-
Hips
-
Buttocks
Seven Cartridges Across Five Treatment Depths
The system includes seven cartridges in total. Some depths appear on both the 7D and 8D handles.
| Handle | Included cartridges | Intended application |
|---|---|---|
| 7D HIFU | 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm | Facial lifting and skin firming |
| 8D HIFU | 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm | Focused facial and neck treatments |
| Thermal Shaping | 0.8 mm and 13 mm | Targeted and deeper body-contouring protocols |
The five distinct depths are:
0.8 mm · 1.5 mm · 3.0 mm · 4.5 mm · 13 mm
Cartridge selection must be based on client anatomy, tissue thickness, treatment area and professional training.
How the System Works
The machine delivers controlled focused energy through the selected handle and cartridge.
For facial applications, the 7D and 8D handles direct energy to a defined depth below the skin’s surface. When used correctly, this controlled energy supports the body’s natural tissue-remodeling and collagen-response processes.
For body applications, the Thermal Shaping handle provides deeper treatment options for appropriately selected areas with localized tissue concerns.
The touchscreen interface allows the operator to select the applicable handle, cartridge and treatment parameters.
Individual outcomes vary according to age, skin condition, tissue thickness, treatment settings and biological response.
Professional Face and Body Applications
| Treatment category | Applicable handle | Common treatment areas |
|---|---|---|
| Facial skin firming | 7D HIFU | Forehead, cheeks and lower face |
| Focused facial lifting | 8D HIFU | Cheeks, jawline and neck |
| Fine-line treatments | 7D HIFU | Suitable facial areas |
| Jawline contouring | 7D or 8D HIFU | Lower face and jawline |
| Neck firming | 7D or 8D HIFU | Neck and submental area |
| Body contouring | Thermal Shaping | Abdomen, waist and back |
| Body firming | Thermal Shaping | Arms, thighs, hips and buttocks |
Treatment suitability should be confirmed through a complete consultation and contraindication assessment.
Build a Focused Treatment Menu
Facial Firming Treatments
Use the 7D handle with 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges to develop professional facial protocols at multiple depths.
Focused Lifting Treatments
The 8D handle provides an additional treatment format for the cheeks, jawline, lower face and neck.
Jawline and Neck Contouring
Both facial handles can support structured protocols for clients concerned with lower-face definition and skin laxity.
Professional Body Contouring
The Thermal Shaping handle expands the service menu to include suitable areas of the abdomen, waist, back, arms and thighs.
Combination Treatment Planning
Qualified operators may build structured treatment plans using different handles. Each area must be assessed independently, and the technologies should only be combined when appropriate.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The black-and-white floor-standing console combines three treatment technologies in one organized system.
Key design features include:
-
Integrated touchscreen control
-
Three dedicated treatment handles
-
Side-mounted handle storage
-
Seven included cartridges
-
Facial and body treatment capabilities
-
110 V and 230 V power options
-
Stable floor-standing construction
-
Centralized operation from one console
At 47 kg, the machine is intended to remain stable during daily professional use while still allowing planned repositioning within a treatment environment.
How a Professional Treatment Session Works
1. Consultation and Assessment
The operator reviews the client’s treatment goals, medical history, skin condition, tissue thickness and contraindications.
2. Handle Selection
The 7D, 8D or Thermal Shaping handle is selected according to whether the treatment is focused on facial lifting, skin firming or body contouring.
3. Cartridge Selection
The appropriate cartridge depth is selected according to the treatment area and client anatomy.
4. Treatment Preparation
The treatment area is cleansed and marked where necessary. Conductive gel or the recommended coupling medium is applied according to the operating instructions.
5. Parameter Selection
The operator adjusts the available settings according to the selected handle, cartridge, treatment area and client tolerance.
6. Controlled Treatment
Energy is delivered using the recommended positioning and technique. The operator monitors the client’s comfort and tissue response throughout the session.
7. Post-Treatment Care
The treatment area is cleaned and the client receives suitable aftercare guidance.
Temporary redness, swelling, tenderness, tingling or sensitivity may occur. Recovery experience varies by technology, treatment intensity and individual response.
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product type | Professional 3-in-1 HIFU and Thermal Shaping system |
| Included technologies | 7D HIFU, 8D HIFU and Thermal Shaping |
| Machine design | Black-and-white floor-standing console |
| Control interface | Touchscreen |
| Treatment handles | Three dedicated handles |
| 7D cartridges | 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm |
| 8D cartridges | 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm |
| Thermal Shaping cartridges | 0.8 mm and 13 mm |
| Total included cartridges | Seven |
| Distinct treatment depths | Five |
| Machine dimensions | 110 × 67 × 76 cm |
| Net weight | Approximately 47 kg |
| Power options | 110 V or 230 V |
| Certifications | CE and RoHS certified |
| Warranty | Three-year limited warranty |
Specifications may be updated according to the final production configuration.
What Is Included?
Main Equipment
-
One 3-in-1 floor-standing touchscreen console
-
One 7D HIFU handle
-
One 8D HIFU handle
-
One Thermal Shaping handle
-
Power cable suitable for the selected voltage
-
Starter conductive gel, where applicable
7D HIFU Cartridges
-
One 1.5 mm cartridge
-
One 3.0 mm cartridge
-
One 4.5 mm cartridge
8D HIFU Cartridges
-
One 3.0 mm cartridge
-
One 4.5 mm cartridge
Thermal Shaping Cartridges
-
One 0.8 mm cartridge
-
One 13 mm cartridge
Documentation and Certification
-
English user manual
-
CE certificate
-
RoHS certificate
-
Setup guidance
-
Remote video training
-
Treatment-protocol guidance
-
Cleaning and maintenance instructions
-
Basic troubleshooting assistance
Final package contents should be confirmed on the order quotation.
CE and RoHS Certified
The Wikbeauty 7D, 8D and Thermal Shaping 3-in-1 Machine comes with:
-
CE Certificate
-
RoHS Certificate
These certificates are included with the machine and support its professional positioning and international distribution.
Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides remote guidance covering:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen operation
-
Handle installation
-
Cartridge installation and selection
-
Basic treatment-parameter adjustment
-
Facial treatment protocols
-
Body-contouring protocols
-
Cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Safety procedures
-
Basic troubleshooting
English operating documentation and video training are included.
Training materials support machine familiarization but do not replace any professional qualification, anatomy training or operating license required in the buyer’s country or region.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty 3-in-1 HIFU and Thermal Shaping Machine is supported by a three-year limited warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty conditions, eligible manufacturing defects may be covered for:
-
Main machine unit
-
Internal electronic components
-
Touchscreen and control system
-
Original 7D HIFU handle
-
Original 8D HIFU handle
-
Original Thermal Shaping handle
-
Handle connectors
-
Other eligible original machine components
Cartridges and other limited-use or consumable components may have separate warranty conditions.
Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the Wikbeauty support team will assist with:
-
Remote technical assessment
-
Guided diagnostic testing
-
Identification of the affected component
-
Confirmation of warranty eligibility
-
Replacement-part assistance where applicable
-
Remote installation guidance
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Incorrect operation or misuse
-
Unauthorized repair or modification
-
Incorrect voltage or electrical connection
-
Improper cleaning or storage
-
Damage caused by dropping a handle
-
Normal cartridge depletion
-
Incorrect cartridge installation
-
Unauthorized transportation damage
-
Failure to follow the operating manual
The order number, machine serial number, photographs and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting warranty support.
All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy.
Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional aesthetic equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel.
A complete consultation and contraindication assessment must be performed before every treatment.
Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Implanted electronic devices
-
Metallic implants in or near the treatment area
-
Active cancer
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Blood-clotting disorders
-
Uncontrolled medical conditions
-
Active infection or inflammation
-
Open wounds in the treatment area
-
Severe skin conditions
-
Conditions affecting normal healing
-
Recent surgery in the proposed treatment area
-
Recent injectable treatments in the area
-
Other contraindications listed in the operating manual
Energy must not be applied over the eyes, thyroid, major nerves, large blood vessels, bones or other prohibited anatomical structures.
This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the supplied manual, professional training requirements and applicable local regulations. Medical guidance should be obtained whenever treatment suitability is uncertain.
Intended Professional Users
This 3-in-1 system is suitable for:
-
Beauty salons
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Medical spas
-
Facial-rejuvenation studios
-
Body-contouring centers
-
Qualified independent practitioners
-
Businesses expanding their face and body services
The machine is not designed for casual or unsupervised home use.
Why Choose This 3-in-1 System?
Three Dedicated Treatment Handles
The 7D, 8D and Thermal Shaping technologies each have a dedicated handle for their intended applications.
Complete Face and Body Coverage
Offer professional facial lifting, skin firming and body-contouring services from one platform.
Multiple Treatment Depths
Seven included cartridges provide five distinct depths ranging from 0.8 mm to 13 mm.
Efficient Use of Treatment-Room Space
A single console replaces the need for separate facial HIFU and body-contouring control units.
Professional Certifications
The machine comes with CE and RoHS certificates.
Long-Term Equipment Support
Remote training, technical assistance and a three-year limited warranty are included.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the difference between the 7D and 8D handles?
The 7D handle includes 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges. The 8D handle includes 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges and provides an additional delivery format for focused lifting protocols.
The appropriate handle should be selected according to the treatment area and professional protocol rather than describing one handle simply as stronger than the other.
What is the Thermal Shaping handle used for?
The Thermal Shaping handle includes 0.8 mm and 13 mm cartridges for professional body-contouring and firming treatments on appropriately selected areas.
How many cartridges are included?
Seven cartridges are included across the three handles. Because the 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm depths are included with both facial handles, the system has five distinct depth options.
Is treatment painful?
Client experience varies according to the handle, cartridge, energy level and individual sensitivity. Warmth, tingling, tenderness or temporary discomfort may occur.
Is there any downtime?
Recovery experience varies. Some clients may resume normal activities shortly after treatment, while temporary redness, swelling, tenderness or sensitivity may occur.
How many treatments will a client need?
Treatment frequency depends on the technology, treatment area, client condition and professional protocol. A fixed number of sessions or guaranteed outcome should not be promised.
What are the dimensions and weight?
The machine measures approximately 110 × 67 × 76 cm and has a net weight of approximately 47 kg.
Is training included?
Yes. Remote setup assistance, video training and operating guidance are included. Operators must still meet all professional qualification requirements applicable in their market.
What does the three-year warranty cover?
The limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components. Cartridges, normal wear, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded.
Does the machine come with CE and RoHS certificates?
Yes. The Wikbeauty 3-in-1 Machine comes with CE and RoHS certificates.
Expand Your Face and Body Treatment Services
The Wikbeauty 7D, 8D and Thermal Shaping 3-in-1 Machine combines three dedicated technologies within one professional platform:
-
7D HIFU for facial firming
-
8D HIFU for focused lifting protocols
-
Thermal Shaping for body contouring
Choose the appropriate voltage and contact Wikbeauty for current pricing, purchasing assistance and delivery information.
Request Pricing and Product Consultation
Receives in 8 days.
$2,799.00
Professional Vertical 3-in-1 RF Microneedling and Ultrasound System
Three Dedicated Technologies for Face, Body and Intimate-Care Applications
The Wikbeauty Vertical 3-in-1 Gold RF Microneedling and 7D Ultrasound Machine combines three professional aesthetic technologies within one floor-standing system.
It includes a Gold RF Microneedling handle, a 7D Focused Ultrasound handle and a 360° Intimate Ultrasound handle. Together, these technologies support professional treatment programs focused on facial rejuvenation, skin-texture refinement, lifting, body contouring and intimate care.
The vertical design provides organized handle storage and a compact professional footprint for beauty salons, med spas and aesthetic clinics.
Three dedicated technologies | Face, body and intimate care | Adjustable treatment depths | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Technologies in One System
Gold RF Microneedling
The Gold RF Microneedling handle combines adjustable microneedle penetration with controlled bipolar radiofrequency energy.
The needles enter the skin at a selected depth while RF energy is delivered to the targeted tissue. This controlled process can be incorporated into professional treatments focused on collagen remodeling and skin rejuvenation.
The microneedling depth is adjustable from 0.5 mm to 3.5 mm.
Common applications include:
-
Improvement in skin texture
-
Appearance of enlarged pores
-
Fine-line treatments
-
Uneven-looking skin tone
-
Acne-scar appearance
-
Facial and body skin firming
-
General skin-rejuvenation programs
RF microneedling is a minimally invasive treatment and requires appropriate hygiene, infection-control and aftercare procedures.
7D Focused Ultrasound
The 7D handle delivers focused ultrasound energy at selectable depths for professional face and body treatments.
It includes four cartridge depths:
-
1.5 mm
-
3.0 mm
-
4.5 mm
-
9.0 mm
The shallower cartridges support facial skin-firming and lifting protocols, while the 9.0 mm cartridge is intended for appropriately selected body areas.
360° Intimate Ultrasound
The dedicated Intimate Ultrasound handle delivers focused ultrasound energy in a 360° treatment pattern.
It includes:
-
3.0 mm cartridge
-
4.5 mm cartridge
The handle is designed for specialized professional intimate-care protocols where legally permitted.
Intimate treatments must only be performed by appropriately qualified professionals following strict consultation, informed-consent, privacy, hygiene and safety procedures.
Four RF Microneedling Tip Options
The RF Microneedling handle includes four tip configurations for different treatment areas and professional protocols.
| Tip | Intended professional application |
|---|---|
| Nano tip | Superficial, non-needle skin-contact protocols |
| 10-pin tip | Precise treatment of smaller areas |
| 25-pin tip | Medium-area facial treatments |
| 64-pin tip | Broader face or body coverage |
The Nano tip does not penetrate the skin in the same way as the microneedle cartridges. The 10-pin, 25-pin and 64-pin tips contain needles and must follow professional infection-control requirements.
Tip selection should be based on the treatment area, client condition and intended protocol.
Vacuum-Assisted RF Microneedling Operation
The RF Microneedling handle includes a vacuum-assisted contact system designed to support stable placement during treatment.
Professional operating features include:
-
Adjustable needle depth from 0.5–3.5 mm
-
Manual operating mode
-
Automatic operating mode
-
Vacuum-assisted skin contact
-
Automatic needle-release function
-
Interchangeable treatment tips
-
Adjustable RF treatment parameters
The vacuum feature supports consistent contact but does not replace correct handpiece positioning, professional judgment or client monitoring.
Face, Body and Intimate-Care Applications
| Treatment category | Technology | Common applications |
|---|---|---|
| Facial lifting | 7D Focused Ultrasound | Face, lower face, jawline and neck |
| Skin rejuvenation | RF Microneedling | Texture, pores and fine-line appearance |
| Targeted facial treatments | RF Microneedling | Suitable areas around the mouth and face |
| Body firming | 7D Ultrasound or RF Microneedling | Arms, legs and selected body areas |
| Body contouring | 7D Focused Ultrasound | Appropriately selected areas |
| Intimate care | 360° Intimate Ultrasound | Specialized professional protocols |
Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete consultation and contraindication assessment must be performed before treatment.
How the Technologies Work
Radiofrequency Microneedling
Insulated microneedles penetrate to a controlled depth and deliver RF energy within the selected tissue layer.
This creates a controlled treatment response intended to support collagen remodeling and improvement in the appearance of skin texture.
Focused Ultrasound
The 7D and Intimate Care handles deliver focused ultrasound energy at a selected depth below the surface.
When applied correctly, focused thermal points support the body’s natural tissue-remodeling response without creating a surgical incision.
Individual results vary according to age, skin condition, tissue thickness, treatment parameters and biological response.
Build a Complete Professional Treatment Menu
Facial Lifting and Firming
The 7D Ultrasound handle supports professional protocols for the face, jawline and neck using 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges.
Advanced Skin Rejuvenation
The RF Microneedling handle supports customizable treatments focused on texture, pores, fine lines and general skin quality.
Body Firming and Contouring
The 9.0 mm 7D cartridge and suitable RF Microneedling tips expand the treatment menu to appropriately selected body areas.
Intimate Wellness Services
The 360° Intimate Ultrasound handle enables qualified operators to add specialized intimate-care services where legally permitted.
Combination Treatment Planning
Qualified professionals may develop treatment plans using more than one technology where appropriate. Treatment sequence, intervals and compatibility must follow professional training and manufacturer protocols.
How a Professional Treatment Session Works
1. Consultation and Assessment
The operator reviews the client’s concerns, treatment goals, medical history, skin condition and contraindications.
Additional informed-consent and privacy procedures are required for intimate treatments.
2. Technology Selection
The RF Microneedling, 7D Ultrasound or Intimate Ultrasound handle is selected according to the intended treatment.
3. Tip or Cartridge Selection
The operator selects the appropriate needle tip, Nano tip or ultrasound cartridge.
4. Treatment Preparation
The treatment area is cleansed and prepared according to the selected technology. Appropriate disinfection and sterile supplies are required for microneedling.
5. Parameter Selection
Needle depth, RF energy, ultrasound depth and other available settings are adjusted according to the professional protocol.
6. Controlled Treatment
The treatment is performed using correct positioning and technique. Client comfort and tissue response are monitored throughout the procedure.
7. Post-Treatment Care
The area is cleaned and suitable aftercare instructions are provided.
RF microneedling may cause temporary redness, swelling, sensitivity, pinpoint bleeding or mild crusting. Ultrasound treatments may cause temporary redness, tenderness, tingling or swelling.
Recovery experience varies between clients.
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product type | Professional vertical 3-in-1 aesthetic system |
| Included technologies | Gold RF Microneedling, 7D Focused Ultrasound and 360° Intimate Ultrasound |
| Machine design | Vertical floor-standing unit |
| Treatment handles | Three dedicated handles |
| 7D Ultrasound cartridges | 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm, 4.5 mm and 9.0 mm |
| Intimate Ultrasound cartridges | 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm |
| RF Microneedling tips | Nano, 10-pin, 25-pin and 64-pin |
| Microneedling depth | Adjustable from 0.5–3.5 mm |
| Needle operating modes | Manual and automatic |
| Contact system | Vacuum-assisted skin contact |
| Safety features | Vacuum sensor, automatic needle release and adjustable depth controls |
| Control system | Digital display with treatment controls and status indicator |
| Machine dimensions | 64 × 62 × 120 cm |
| Net weight | Approximately 43 kg |
| Power supply | Regional voltage and plug configurations available |
| Certifications | CE and RoHS certified |
| Warranty | Three-year limited warranty covering eligible parts and labor |
Specifications may be updated according to the final production configuration.
What Is Included?
Main Equipment
-
One vertical 3-in-1 control unit
-
One Gold RF Microneedling handle
-
One 7D Focused Ultrasound handle
-
One 360° Intimate Ultrasound handle
-
Power cable suitable for the selected market
7D Ultrasound Cartridges
-
1.5 mm
-
3.0 mm
-
4.5 mm
-
9.0 mm
Intimate Ultrasound Cartridges
-
3.0 mm
-
4.5 mm
RF Microneedling Tips
-
Nano tip
-
10-pin tip
-
25-pin tip
-
64-pin tip
Documentation and Certification
-
English user manual
-
CE certificate
-
RoHS certificate
-
Installation and setup guidance
-
Remote video training
-
Treatment-protocol guidance
-
Cleaning and maintenance instructions
-
Basic troubleshooting assistance
Final tip quantities and package contents should be confirmed on the order quotation.
CE and RoHS Certified
The Wikbeauty Vertical 3-in-1 RF Microneedling and Ultrasound Machine comes with:
-
CE Certificate
-
RoHS Certificate
These certificates are included with the machine and support its professional positioning and international distribution.
Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides remote training and operating guidance covering:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Digital control operation
-
RF Microneedling handle operation
-
7D Ultrasound handle operation
-
Intimate Ultrasound handle operation
-
Needle-tip and cartridge installation
-
Basic treatment-parameter selection
-
Hygiene and infection-control procedures
-
Facial, body and intimate-care protocols
-
Cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
Training materials support equipment familiarization but do not replace professional qualifications, anatomy training, intimate-care training or licenses required in the operator’s jurisdiction.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Vertical 3-in-1 System is supported by a three-year limited warranty covering eligible parts and labor.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty conditions, coverage may include eligible manufacturing defects affecting:
-
Main machine unit
-
Internal electronic components
-
Digital display and control system
-
Original treatment handles
-
Vacuum system
-
Handle connectors
-
Other eligible original components
-
Eligible repair labor during the warranty period
Microneedling tips, ultrasound cartridges and other limited-use components may have separate warranty conditions.
Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty will assist with:
-
Remote technical assessment
-
Guided diagnostic testing
-
Identification of the affected component
-
Confirmation of warranty eligibility
-
Replacement-part or repair assistance where applicable
-
Remote installation guidance
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Incorrect operation or misuse
-
Unauthorized repair or modification
-
Incorrect voltage or electrical connection
-
Improper cleaning, disinfection or storage
-
Damage caused by dropping a handle
-
Normal depletion of cartridges or tips
-
Reuse of single-use microneedling components
-
Unauthorized transportation damage
-
Failure to follow the operating manual
Order information, the machine serial number, photographs and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting warranty service.
All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy.
Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional aesthetic equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel.
A complete consultation, informed-consent process and contraindication assessment must be completed before every treatment.
Depending on the selected technology, treatment may not be suitable for individuals with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Implanted electronic devices
-
Metallic implants in or near the treatment area
-
Active cancer
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Blood-clotting disorders
-
Uncontrolled medical conditions
-
Active infection or inflammation
-
Open wounds
-
Severe skin conditions
-
Conditions affecting normal healing
-
Recent surgery in the treatment area
-
Recent injectable treatments
-
Use of medications that affect healing or bleeding
-
Other contraindications listed in the operating manual
RF Microneedling Safety
RF microneedling must be performed using appropriate hygiene and infection-control procedures. Single-use needle tips must not be reused.
Intimate-Care Safety
Intimate treatments require appropriate professional training, privacy safeguards, informed consent and strict hygiene controls.
Operators must confirm that intimate treatment is permitted within their professional scope and applicable local regulations.
This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Medical guidance should be obtained whenever treatment suitability is uncertain.
Intended Professional Users
The Vertical 3-in-1 System is suitable for:
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Medical spas
-
Beauty salons
-
Skin-rejuvenation studios
-
Body-contouring centers
-
Qualified intimate-care providers
-
Appropriately trained independent practitioners
The machine is not designed for casual or unsupervised home use.
Why Choose This 3-in-1 System?
Three Complementary Technologies
Combine RF Microneedling, 7D Focused Ultrasound and 360° Intimate Ultrasound within one professional platform.
Face, Body and Intimate-Care Applications
Develop multiple professional service categories without purchasing three separate control units.
Adjustable RF Microneedling Depth
Select a needle depth from 0.5–3.5 mm according to the treatment area and professional protocol.
Four Microneedling Tip Options
Nano, 10-pin, 25-pin and 64-pin options support different areas and treatment objectives.
Vacuum-Assisted Operation
The vacuum sensor and automatic needle-release function support stable contact and controlled operation.
Professional Certifications
The machine comes with CE and RoHS certificates.
Long-Term Equipment Support
Remote training, technical assistance and a three-year limited warranty covering eligible parts and labor are included.
Frequently Asked Questions
What does “3-in-1” mean?
The machine combines Gold RF Microneedling, 7D Focused Ultrasound and 360° Intimate Ultrasound. Each technology has its own dedicated treatment handle.
Is RF microneedling non-invasive?
No. RF microneedling is minimally invasive because the needles penetrate the skin. Appropriate disinfection, single-use components and post-treatment care are required.
What is the difference between the RF Microneedling tips?
The Nano tip supports superficial skin-contact protocols. The 10-pin tip provides precise treatment of smaller areas, while the 25-pin and 64-pin tips provide progressively broader coverage.
What do the 7D Ultrasound cartridge depths treat?
The 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges support professional facial and neck protocols. The 9.0 mm cartridge is intended for appropriately selected body areas.
What is the Intimate Ultrasound handle used for?
It is designed for specialized professional intimate-care protocols using 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges. It must only be operated by appropriately qualified professionals where legally permitted.
Is intimate ultrasound safe?
Safety depends on client selection, operator training, correct parameters, hygiene and adherence to contraindications. It should not be described as risk-free or universally suitable.
Is treatment painful?
Client experience varies. RF microneedling may cause discomfort, while ultrasound treatments may produce warmth, tingling or tenderness.
Is there any downtime?
Recovery depends on the technology and individual response. RF microneedling may cause temporary redness, swelling or pinpoint crusting. Ultrasound treatments may cause temporary tenderness or swelling.
How many sessions will a client need?
Treatment frequency depends on the technology, area, client condition and protocol. A fixed number of sessions or guaranteed outcome should not be promised.
Is training included?
Yes. Remote setup assistance, video training and operating guidance for all three handles are included.
What does the three-year warranty cover?
The limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components and eligible repair labor. Tips, cartridges, normal wear, accidental damage and misuse are excluded.
Does the machine come with CE and RoHS certificates?
Yes. The Wikbeauty Vertical 3-in-1 Machine comes with CE and RoHS certificates.
Expand Your Face, Body and Intimate-Care Services
The Wikbeauty Vertical 3-in-1 System combines three professional technologies within one floor-standing platform:
-
Gold RF Microneedling
-
7D Focused Ultrasound
-
360° Intimate Ultrasound
Contact Wikbeauty for current pricing, voltage selection, delivery information and purchasing assistance.
Request Pricing and Product Consultation
Receives in 8 days.
$2,699.00
Professional 7D HIFU Facial and Body Treatment System
Eight-Cartridge Focused Ultrasound Technology for Facial Lifting and Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty 7D HIFU Machine is a professional aesthetic system developed for facial lifting, wrinkle care, skin tightening, collagen stimulation, and body-contouring treatments.
High-Intensity Focused Ultrasound technology delivers concentrated ultrasound energy at selected tissue depths. Eight cartridges covering depths from 1.5mm to 16mm support customized treatments for superficial facial areas, deeper facial structures, and suitable body areas.
With adjustable energy settings, intelligent touchscreen controls, facial and body treatment capability, and dual-voltage compatibility, the system is suitable for aesthetic clinics, beauty salons, slimming centers, and professional skincare facilities.
7D HIFU technology | Eight cartridges | 1.5–16mm treatment depths | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Functions on One Platform
Multi-Depth Focused Ultrasound
The system delivers focused ultrasound energy at selected depths without requiring incisions or injectable products.
Common applications include:
-
Facial skin tightening
-
Fine-line and wrinkle care
-
Jawline contouring
-
Neck and décolletage treatments
-
Body skin-firming programs
-
Professional body-contouring treatments
Facial Lifting and Collagen Stimulation
The 1.5mm, 3.0mm, and 4.5mm cartridges are designed for treatments across different facial tissue depths.
Common applications include:
-
Reduced facial firmness
-
Fine lines and wrinkles
-
Lower-face laxity
-
Jawline definition
-
Double-chin-area treatment
-
Neck skin tightening
Body Contouring and Skin Firming
The 6mm, 8mm, 10mm, 13mm, and 16mm cartridges support professional treatments for suitable body areas.
Common applications include:
-
Abdomen contouring
-
Upper-arm treatments
-
Thigh contouring
-
Buttock-area programs
-
Body skin tightening
-
Cellulite-appearance improvement
Select the Right Program for Each Client
Facial-Rejuvenation Program
Uses suitable facial cartridges and customized energy settings for general facial lifting and skin-rejuvenation treatments.
Recommended applications:
-
Fine lines and wrinkles
-
Reduced facial firmness
-
Uneven-looking skin texture
-
Early signs of aging
-
General collagen-stimulation programs
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking non-invasive facial rejuvenation
-
Clients concerned about visible signs of aging
-
Clients wanting progressive skin-quality improvement
Facial-Lifting and Jawline Program
Uses suitable middle and deeper facial treatment depths to support lower-face tightening and contour definition.
Recommended applications:
-
Lower-face laxity
-
Reduced jawline definition
-
Jowl-area treatments
-
Double-chin concerns
-
Neck skin tightening
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking a firmer-looking lower face
-
Clients concerned about facial contours
-
Clients interested in non-surgical lifting programs
Body-Contouring Program
Uses deeper body cartridges for suitable body areas requiring contouring and skin-firming treatments.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdomen contouring
-
Upper-arm treatments
-
Thigh contouring
-
Buttock-area programs
-
Body skin tightening
Recommended for:
-
Clients concerned about localized body areas
-
Clients seeking non-invasive body treatments
-
Clients combining treatment with healthy lifestyle habits
Maintenance Program
Provides periodic treatment following completion of the client’s initial HIFU program.
Recommended applications:
-
Facial-lifting maintenance
-
Skin-firming maintenance
-
Body-contour maintenance
-
Continued collagen-stimulation programs
Recommended for:
-
Returning HIFU clients
-
Clients completing an initial treatment plan
-
Clients seeking periodic professional maintenance
Adjustable Treatment Depths and Energy Settings
The Wikbeauty 7D HIFU Machine provides eight cartridge depths for different facial and body applications.
| Treatment Depth | General Treatment Level | Possible Applications |
|---|---|---|
| 1.5mm | Superficial facial tissue | Fine lines, texture, and delicate facial areas |
| 3.0mm | Dermal facial layer | Collagen stimulation and skin tightening |
| 4.5mm | Deeper facial layer | Facial lifting, jawline, and lower-face treatments |
| 6.0mm | Shallow body treatment | Arms and smaller body areas |
| 8.0mm | Medium body treatment | Abdomen, waist, and thigh programs |
| 10.0mm | Deeper body treatment | Body contouring and suitable buttock areas |
| 13.0mm | Deep body treatment | Larger body areas and thicker tissue |
| 16.0mm | Maximum listed body depth | Professional deep body-contouring protocols |
Energy settings should be selected according to the cartridge, treatment area, tissue condition, client comfort, and professional protocol.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Face, Chin, and Jawline
The three facial cartridges support customized treatments across suitable facial areas.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Facial lifting
-
Fine-line care
-
Wrinkle reduction
-
Jawline definition
-
Double-chin-area treatment
Neck and Décolletage
Suitable facial depths and controlled energy settings can support professional tightening and rejuvenation programs.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Neck skin tightening
-
Reduced appearance of neck lines
-
Improved-looking firmness
-
Décolletage rejuvenation
-
Collagen-stimulation support
Arms, Abdomen, Thighs, and Buttocks
The deeper cartridge configurations support selected body-contouring and skin-firming treatments.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Upper-arm contouring
-
Abdomen treatments
-
Thigh contouring
-
Buttock-area programs
-
Body skin firming
Professional Treatment Applications
| Treatment Area | Primary Objective | Recommended Depth Category |
|---|---|---|
| Face | Lifting, tightening, and wrinkle care | 1.5mm, 3.0mm, or 4.5mm |
| Chin and Jawline | Contour definition and lower-face tightening | Suitable facial depth |
| Neck | Skin tightening and line care | Suitable facial depth |
| Décolletage | Texture and firmness improvement | Professionally selected facial depth |
| Upper Arms | Skin firming and contouring | Suitable body depth |
| Abdomen | Body contouring and tightening | Suitable deeper body depth |
| Thighs | Contouring and cellulite-appearance care | Suitable body depth |
| Buttocks | Skin-firming and contouring support | Suitable body depth |
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, skin condition, previous aesthetic procedures, target areas, treatment objectives, and possible contraindications. Explain the treatment process and establish realistic expectations.
Step 2: Cartridge Selection
Select the appropriate facial or body cartridge according to the treatment area, target depth, tissue condition, and professional protocol.
Step 3: Treatment Preparation
Clean the treatment area and apply suitable ultrasound gel. Configure the energy level and treatment parameters according to the selected cartridge and client tolerance.
Step 4: HIFU Treatment
Position the handpiece correctly and deliver focused ultrasound energy according to the mapped treatment plan. Monitor client comfort and tissue response throughout the session.
Step 5: Treatment Completion
Remove the ultrasound gel, inspect and clean the treated area, record the cartridge and settings used, and provide appropriate post-treatment skincare guidance.
Designed for Professional Beauty Environments
The Wikbeauty 7D HIFU Machine combines multi-depth facial and body treatment capability with straightforward professional operation.
Key advantages include:
-
Professional 7D HIFU technology
-
Eight treatment cartridges
-
Treatment depths from 1.5mm to 16mm
-
Three facial cartridges
-
Five body cartridges
-
Facial and body treatment capability
-
Adjustable energy settings
-
Intelligent touchscreen controls
-
Approximately 30–60-minute sessions
-
Facial lifting and wrinkle-care programs
-
Jawline and neck treatments
-
Body-contouring and skin-firming programs
-
110V and 220V compatibility
-
CE and ISO certificates
-
Three-year professional warranty
-
Professional training and ongoing support
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty 7D HIFU Machine |
| Technology | 7D High-Intensity Focused Ultrasound |
| Treatment Cartridges | Eight |
| Treatment Depths | 1.5mm, 3.0mm, 4.5mm, 6.0mm, 8.0mm, 10.0mm, 13.0mm, and 16.0mm |
| Facial Cartridges | 1.5mm, 3.0mm, and 4.5mm |
| Body Cartridges | 6.0mm, 8.0mm, 10.0mm, 13.0mm, and 16.0mm |
| Primary Functions | Skin tightening, facial lifting, wrinkle care, and body contouring |
| Treatment Areas | Face, neck, jawline, arms, abdomen, thighs, and buttocks |
| Session Duration | Approximately 30–60 minutes |
| Treatment Frequency | Personalized according to client assessment |
| Supplied Results Timeline | Initial changes may be visible after one session, with progressive improvement over two to three months |
| Supplied Results Duration | Approximately 12–18 months |
| Energy Output | Adjustable |
| Display | Intelligent touchscreen with cartridge selection |
| Power Supply | 110V or 220V |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
| Warranty | Three-year professional warranty |
| Support | Professional training and ongoing technical assistance |
Results timelines and duration are supplied product claims and should not be presented as guaranteed outcomes. Individual results vary.
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty 7D HIFU main unit
-
1 × Professional HIFU treatment handpiece
-
1 × 1.5mm cartridge
-
1 × 3.0mm cartridge
-
1 × 4.5mm cartridge
-
1 × 6.0mm cartridge
-
1 × 8.0mm cartridge
-
1 × 10.0mm cartridge
-
1 × 13.0mm cartridge
-
1 × 16.0mm cartridge
-
Intelligent touchscreen control system
-
Adjustable energy controls
-
1 × Region-compatible power cable
-
Standard machine accessories
-
Warranty card
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Installation and operating guide
-
Safety and maintenance instructions
-
Professional video training
-
Cartridge-selection guidance
-
Energy-adjustment guidance
-
Facial treatment protocols
-
Jawline and neck protocols
-
Body-contouring protocols
-
Client-consultation materials
-
Post-treatment guidance
-
Professional training certificate
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty 7D HIFU Machine includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use the system safely and consistently.
Training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen operation
-
Client consultation and screening
-
Facial and body assessment
-
Treatment-area mapping
-
Cartridge selection
-
Energy-level adjustment
-
Handpiece positioning
-
Facial-lifting protocols
-
Jawline and neck protocols
-
Body-contouring protocols
-
Post-treatment care
-
Equipment cleaning and maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty 7D HIFU Machine includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period.
Cartridges and other components subject to normal use or shot limitations are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement.
Technical Support Process
-
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team.
-
Provide the machine model and order information.
-
Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested.
-
A technician will assess the reported issue remotely.
-
Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged.
-
Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable cartridges, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual.
Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation, health-history review, and skin assessment should be completed before every treatment. The machine should only be operated by appropriately trained professionals.
Treatment may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or breastfeeding
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Metal implants within the treatment area
-
Active skin infection
-
Open wounds or severe inflammation
-
Active cancer or ongoing cancer treatment
-
Keloid tendency or significant scarring
-
Severe vascular conditions
-
Poor wound healing
-
Severe or recent sunburn
-
Recent surgery within the treatment area
-
Recent injectable or aggressive skin treatments
-
Reduced or impaired skin sensation
-
Medical conditions requiring physician supervision
Clients who have recently received fillers, botulinum toxin, chemical peels, or other professional aesthetic procedures should be assessed before treatment.
HIFU should not be applied over the eyes, thyroid gland, major nerves, bones, reproductive organs, or other prohibited areas identified in the operating manual.
Operating Precautions
-
Inspect the machine, handpiece, cartridges, cables, and accessories before use.
-
Confirm the cartridge and treatment depth before beginning.
-
Map the treatment area carefully.
-
Apply sufficient ultrasound gel.
-
Begin with conservative energy settings.
-
Monitor client comfort and tissue response.
-
Do not deliver energy over prohibited anatomical areas.
-
Do not repeatedly treat the same point outside the protocol.
-
Record the cartridge, depth, energy, and treatment area.
-
Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client.
-
Follow the supplied maintenance schedule.
-
Stop treatment if unexpected pain or skin reaction occurs.
Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty 7D HIFU Machine is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in:
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Beauty salons
-
Medical spas
-
Skin-rejuvenation studios
-
Body-contouring clinics
-
Professional spas
-
Slimming centers
-
Wellness facilities
Operators should review applicable local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering HIFU treatments.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty 7D HIFU Machine?
Eight Multi-Depth Cartridges
Eight cartridges covering depths from 1.5mm to 16mm support customized facial and body treatments.
Facial and Body Versatility
One system supports treatments for the face, neck, jawline, arms, abdomen, thighs, and buttocks.
Adjustable Professional Settings
Interchangeable cartridges and adjustable energy controls allow professionals to customize treatments according to the target area and client.
Intelligent Touchscreen Operation
The touchscreen interface supports cartridge selection, parameter adjustment, and professional treatment management.
Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating training, cartridge guidance, treatment protocols, CE and ISO certificates, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty 7D HIFU Machine?
It is a professional High-Intensity Focused Ultrasound system developed for facial lifting, skin tightening, wrinkle care, collagen stimulation, and selected body-contouring treatments.
What does 7D HIFU mean?
The product uses a multi-depth HIFU cartridge system designed to deliver focused ultrasound energy at different facial and body treatment depths.
How many cartridges are included?
The package includes eight cartridges covering treatment depths from 1.5mm to 16mm.
Which cartridges are used for facial treatments?
The 1.5mm, 3.0mm, and 4.5mm cartridges are supplied for professional facial and neck treatment protocols.
Which cartridges are used for body treatments?
The 6.0mm, 8.0mm, 10.0mm, 13.0mm, and 16.0mm cartridges are supplied for suitable body treatment areas.
Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the face, neck, jawline, upper arms, abdomen, thighs, and buttocks.
How long does one treatment take?
A standard professional treatment takes approximately 30–60 minutes, depending on the treatment area, cartridge, and selected protocol.
How many treatments are recommended?
One to three sessions per year. The final treatment schedule should be personalized according to the client’s condition and objectives.
When may clients notice changes?
Some clients may notice an initial tightening effect after one session, with progressive changes continuing over two to three months.
How long can results last?
The supplied information indicates a possible duration of 12–18 months. Actual longevity varies according to age, skin condition, treatment settings, lifestyle, and individual response.
Is there downtime?
Many clients can continue normal daily activities after a suitable treatment. Temporary redness, swelling, tenderness, or sensitivity may occur.
What does HIFU treatment feel like?
Clients may experience warmth, tingling, pressure, or brief sensitivity as focused ultrasound energy is delivered.
Can the machine be used for body treatments?
Yes. The deeper cartridge configurations support selected treatments for the upper arms, abdomen, thighs, buttocks, and other suitable body areas.
Are results guaranteed?
Results vary according to age, tissue condition, treatment area, cartridge selection, energy settings, lifestyle, and individual response.
What certificates are included?
The machine includes CE and ISO certificates.
What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues.
Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers machine operation, client screening, treatment mapping, cartridge selection, energy adjustment, facial and body protocols, aftercare, maintenance, and troubleshooting.
Add Professional 7D HIFU Treatments to Your Business
The Wikbeauty 7D HIFU Machine enables aesthetic clinics, beauty salons, and wellness professionals to provide customizable facial-lifting, skin-tightening, wrinkle-care, and body-contouring services.
Five key benefits:
-
Eight professional cartridges from 1.5mm to 16mm
-
Facial and body treatment capability
-
Adjustable energy settings for customized protocols
-
Intelligent touchscreen with cartridge selection
-
CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, cartridge details, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Receives in 8 days.
$1,599.00
Professional 7D HIFU Facial and Body Treatment System
Multi-Depth Focused Ultrasound for Skin Tightening, Facial Lifting, and Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine is a professional non-invasive aesthetic system developed for facial lifting, wrinkle care, skin tightening, collagen stimulation, and body-contouring treatments.
High-Intensity Focused Ultrasound technology delivers concentrated ultrasound energy at selected tissue depths. Its multi-depth cartridge system supports customized treatments for superficial facial areas, deeper facial structures, and suitable body areas.
With multiple treatment depths from 1.5mm to 16mm, seven treatment cartridges, adjustable energy settings, intelligent touchscreen controls, and a compact portable design, the system is suitable for beauty salons, aesthetic clinics, and professional skincare facilities.
7D HIFU technology | 1.5–16mm treatment depths | Seven cartridges | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Functions on One Platform
Multi-Depth Focused Ultrasound
The system delivers focused ultrasound energy at selected depths without requiring incisions or injectable products. Different cartridges allow professionals to target superficial, middle, and deeper tissue levels.
Common applications include:
-
Facial skin tightening
-
Fine-line and wrinkle care
-
Jawline contouring
-
Neck and décolletage treatments
-
Body skin-firming programs
-
Professional body-contouring treatments
Facial Lifting and Collagen Stimulation
Facial cartridges are designed to deliver focused ultrasound energy at depths suitable for different layers of facial tissue.
Common applications include:
-
Reduced facial firmness
-
Fine lines and wrinkles
-
Lower-face laxity
-
Jawline definition
-
Double-chin-area treatments
-
Neck skin tightening
Body Contouring and Skin Firming
Deeper cartridge configurations support professional treatments for suitable body areas.
Common applications include:
-
Abdomen contouring
-
Upper-arm treatments
-
Thigh contouring
-
Buttock-area programs
-
Body skin tightening
-
Cellulite-appearance improvement
Select the Right Program for Each Client
Facial-Rejuvenation Program
Uses suitable facial cartridges and customized energy settings for general facial lifting and skin-rejuvenation treatments.
Recommended applications:
-
Fine lines and wrinkles
-
Reduced facial firmness
-
Uneven-looking skin texture
-
Early signs of aging
-
General collagen-stimulation programs
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking non-invasive facial rejuvenation
-
Clients concerned about visible signs of aging
-
Clients wanting progressive skin-quality improvement
Facial-Lifting and Jawline Program
Uses suitable middle and deeper facial treatment depths to support lower-face tightening and contour definition.
Recommended applications:
-
Lower-face laxity
-
Reduced jawline definition
-
Jowl-area treatments
-
Double-chin concerns
-
Neck skin tightening
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking a firmer-looking lower face
-
Clients concerned about facial contours
-
Clients interested in non-surgical lifting programs
Body-Contouring Program
Uses deeper body cartridges for suitable body areas requiring contouring and skin-firming treatments.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdomen contouring
-
Upper-arm treatments
-
Thigh contouring
-
Buttock-area programs
-
Body skin tightening
Recommended for:
-
Clients concerned about localized body areas
-
Clients seeking non-invasive body treatments
-
Clients combining treatment with healthy lifestyle habits
Maintenance Program
Provides periodic treatment following completion of the client’s initial HIFU program.
Recommended applications:
-
Facial-lifting maintenance
-
Skin-firming maintenance
-
Body-contour maintenance
-
Continued collagen-stimulation programs
Recommended for:
-
Returning HIFU clients
-
Clients completing an initial treatment plan
-
Clients seeking periodic professional maintenance
Adjustable Treatment Depths and Energy Settings
The Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine provides multiple treatment depths for different facial and body applications.
| Treatment Depth | General Treatment Level | Possible Applications |
|---|---|---|
| 1.5mm | Superficial facial tissue | Fine lines, texture, and delicate facial areas |
| 3.0mm | Dermal facial layer | Collagen stimulation and skin tightening |
| 4.5mm | Deeper facial layer | Facial lifting, jawline, and lower-face treatments |
| 6.0mm | Shallow body treatment | Small body areas and skin-firming programs |
| 8.0mm | Medium body treatment | Arms and selected body areas |
| 10.0mm | Deeper body treatment | Abdomen, thighs, and body contouring |
| 13.0mm | Deep body treatment | Larger body areas |
| 16.0mm | Maximum listed body depth | Professional deep body-contouring protocols |
The supplied product information describes a seven-cartridge package while listing treatment depths from 1.5mm to 16mm. The exact included cartridge configuration should be confirmed when placing the order.
Energy settings should be selected according to the cartridge, treatment area, tissue condition, client comfort, and professional protocol.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Face, Chin, and Jawline
Facial cartridges support customized treatments across suitable areas of the face.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Facial lifting
-
Fine-line care
-
Wrinkle reduction
-
Jawline definition
-
Double-chin-area treatment
Neck and Décolletage
Suitable cartridge depths and controlled energy settings can support professional tightening and rejuvenation programs.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Neck skin tightening
-
Reduced appearance of neck lines
-
Improved-looking firmness
-
Décolletage rejuvenation
-
Collagen-stimulation support
Arms, Abdomen, Thighs, and Buttocks
Deeper cartridge configurations support selected body-contouring and skin-firming treatments.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Upper-arm contouring
-
Abdomen treatments
-
Thigh contouring
-
Buttock-area programs
-
Body skin firming
Professional Treatment Applications
| Treatment Area | Primary Objective | Recommended Depth Category |
|---|---|---|
| Face | Lifting, tightening, and wrinkle care | 1.5mm, 3.0mm, or 4.5mm |
| Chin and Jawline | Contour definition and lower-face tightening | Suitable facial depth |
| Neck | Skin tightening and line care | Suitable facial depth |
| Décolletage | Texture and firmness improvement | Professionally selected depth |
| Upper Arms | Skin firming and contouring | Suitable body depth |
| Abdomen | Body contouring and tightening | Suitable deeper body depth |
| Thighs | Contouring and cellulite-appearance care | Suitable body depth |
| Buttocks | Skin-firming and contouring support | Suitable body depth |
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, skin condition, previous aesthetic procedures, target areas, treatment objectives, and possible contraindications. Explain the treatment process and establish realistic expectations.
Step 2: Cartridge Selection
Select the appropriate facial or body cartridge according to the treatment area, target depth, tissue condition, and professional protocol.
Step 3: Treatment Preparation
Clean the treatment area and apply suitable ultrasound gel. Configure the energy level and treatment parameters according to the selected cartridge and client tolerance.
Step 4: HIFU Treatment
Position the handpiece correctly and deliver focused ultrasound energy according to the mapped treatment plan. Monitor client comfort and tissue response throughout the session.
Step 5: Treatment Completion
Remove the ultrasound gel, inspect and clean the treated area, record the cartridge and settings used, and provide appropriate post-treatment skincare guidance.
Designed for Professional Beauty Environments
The Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine combines multi-depth facial and body treatment capability with a compact professional design.
Key advantages include:
-
Professional 7D HIFU technology
-
Treatment depths from 1.5mm to 16mm
-
Seven-cartridge package configuration
-
Facial and body treatment capability
-
Adjustable energy settings
-
Intelligent touchscreen controls
-
Approximately 30–60-minute sessions
-
Facial lifting and wrinkle-care programs
-
Jawline and chin contouring
-
Neck and décolletage treatments
-
Body-contouring and skin-firming programs
-
Compact and portable construction
-
110V and 220V compatibility
-
CE and ISO certificates
-
Three-year professional warranty
-
Professional training and ongoing support
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine |
| Technology | High-Intensity Focused Ultrasound |
| Treatment Package | Seven multi-depth cartridges |
| Listed Treatment Depths | 1.5mm, 3.0mm, 4.5mm, 6.0mm, 8.0mm, 10.0mm, 13.0mm, and 16.0mm |
| Facial Depths | 1.5mm, 3.0mm, and 4.5mm |
| Body Depths | 6.0mm, 8.0mm, 10.0mm, 13.0mm, and 16.0mm |
| Primary Functions | Skin tightening, facial lifting, wrinkle care, and body contouring |
| Treatment Areas | Face, neck, chin, jawline, arms, abdomen, thighs, and buttocks |
| Session Duration | Approximately 30–60 minutes |
| Treatment Frequency | Personalized according to client assessment |
| Energy Settings | Adjustable |
| Display | Intelligent touchscreen |
| Design | Compact and portable |
| Power Supply | 110V or 220V |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
| Warranty | Three-year professional warranty |
| Support | Professional training and ongoing technical assistance |
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU main unit
-
1 × Professional HIFU treatment handpiece
-
Seven treatment cartridges according to the selected package
-
Facial treatment cartridge configurations
-
Body treatment cartridge configurations
-
Intelligent touchscreen control system
-
Adjustable energy controls
-
1 × Region-compatible power cable
-
Standard machine accessories
The exact seven-cartridge combination should be confirmed before ordering because the supplied information lists eight available treatment depths.
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Installation and operating guide
-
Safety and maintenance instructions
-
Professional video training
-
Cartridge-selection guidance
-
Energy-adjustment guidance
-
Facial treatment protocols
-
Jawline and neck protocols
-
Body-contouring protocols
-
Client-consultation materials
-
Post-treatment guidance
-
Professional training certificate
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use the system safely and consistently.
Training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen operation
-
Client consultation and screening
-
Facial and body assessment
-
Treatment-area mapping
-
Cartridge selection
-
Energy-level adjustment
-
Handpiece positioning
-
Facial-lifting protocols
-
Jawline and neck protocols
-
Body-contouring protocols
-
Post-treatment care
-
Equipment cleaning and maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period.
Cartridges and other components subject to normal use or shot limitations are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement.
Technical Support Process
-
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team.
-
Provide the machine model and order information.
-
Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested.
-
A technician will assess the reported issue remotely.
-
Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged.
-
Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable cartridges, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual.
Safety and Contraindications
A professional consultation, health-history review, and skin assessment should be completed before every treatment. The machine should only be operated by appropriately trained professionals.
Treatment may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or breastfeeding
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Metal implants within the treatment area
-
Active skin infection
-
Herpes, open wounds, or sores
-
Active eczema, psoriasis, or dermatitis in the area
-
Severe or recent sunburn
-
Recent surgery within the treatment area
-
Recent injectable or aggressive skin treatments
-
Serious cardiovascular or medical conditions
-
Reduced or impaired skin sensation
-
Medical conditions requiring physician supervision
Clients who have recently received fillers, botulinum toxin, chemical peels, or other professional aesthetic procedures should be assessed before treatment. An appropriate waiting period should be determined by a qualified practitioner.
HIFU should not be applied over the eyes, thyroid gland, major nerves, bones, reproductive organs, or other prohibited areas identified in the operating manual.
Operating Precautions
-
Inspect the machine, handpiece, cartridges, cables, and accessories before use.
-
Confirm the cartridge and depth before beginning treatment.
-
Map the treatment area carefully.
-
Apply sufficient ultrasound gel.
-
Begin with conservative energy settings.
-
Monitor client comfort and tissue response.
-
Do not deliver energy over prohibited anatomical areas.
-
Do not repeatedly treat the same point outside the protocol.
-
Record the cartridge, depth, energy, and treatment area.
-
Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client.
-
Follow the supplied maintenance schedule.
-
Stop treatment if unexpected pain or skin reaction occurs.
Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in:
-
Beauty salons
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Medical spas
-
Skin-rejuvenation studios
-
Body-contouring clinics
-
Professional spas
-
Anti-aging treatment centers
-
Professional skincare facilities
Operators should review applicable local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering HIFU treatments.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine?
Multi-Depth HIFU Technology
Treatment depths spanning 1.5mm to 16mm support superficial facial treatments, deeper facial lifting, and selected body applications.
Facial and Body Versatility
One system supports treatments for the face, neck, chin, jawline, arms, abdomen, thighs, and buttocks.
Adjustable Professional Settings
Interchangeable cartridges and adjustable energy controls allow professionals to customize treatments according to the area and client.
Compact Portable Design
The portable construction and intelligent touchscreen make the machine suitable for different treatment rooms and professional beauty environments.
Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating training, cartridge guidance, treatment protocols, CE and ISO certificates, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine?
It is a professional High-Intensity Focused Ultrasound system developed for facial lifting, skin tightening, wrinkle care, collagen stimulation, and selected body-contouring treatments.
What does 7D HIFU mean?
The product uses a multi-depth HIFU cartridge system designed to treat different facial and body tissue levels. The supplied package is described as containing seven treatment cartridges.
Which treatment depths are available?
The supplied information lists depths of 1.5mm, 3.0mm, 4.5mm, 6.0mm, 8.0mm, 10.0mm, 13.0mm, and 16.0mm.
How many cartridges are included?
The package is described as including seven cartridges. Because eight treatment depths are listed in the supplied information, the exact included combination should be confirmed before ordering.
Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the face, neck, chin, jawline, upper arms, abdomen, thighs, and buttocks.
How long does one session take?
A standard professional treatment takes approximately 30–60 minutes, depending on the treatment area, cartridge, and protocol.
How many treatments are recommended?
The supplied information suggests one to three sessions per year. The final treatment schedule should be personalized according to the client’s condition, objectives, and professional assessment.
When may clients notice changes?
Some clients may notice an initial tightening effect following treatment. Progressive changes may continue as the skin’s natural collagen response develops. Individual outcomes and timing vary.
How long can results last?
The supplied information indicates a possible duration of 12–18 months. Actual longevity varies according to age, skin condition, treatment settings, lifestyle, and individual response.
Is there downtime?
Many clients can continue normal daily activities after a suitable treatment. Temporary redness, swelling, tenderness, or sensitivity may occur.
What does HIFU treatment feel like?
Clients may experience warmth, tingling, pressure, or brief sensitivity as ultrasound energy is delivered. Energy should be adjusted according to professional protocol and client tolerance.
Can this machine be used for body treatments?
Yes. The deeper cartridge configurations support selected treatments for the arms, abdomen, thighs, buttocks, and other suitable body areas.
Are results guaranteed?
No. Results vary according to age, tissue condition, treatment area, cartridge selection, energy settings, lifestyle, and individual response.
What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates.
What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues.
Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers machine operation, client screening, treatment mapping, cartridge selection, energy adjustment, facial and body protocols, aftercare, maintenance, and troubleshooting.
Add Professional 7D HIFU Treatments to Your Business
The Wikbeauty Portable 7D HIFU Machine enables beauty salons, aesthetic clinics, and skincare professionals to provide customizable facial-lifting, skin-tightening, wrinkle-care, and body-contouring services using one professional platform.
Five key benefits:
-
Multi-depth focused ultrasound treatments from 1.5mm to 16mm
-
Professional facial and body treatment capability
-
Seven-cartridge package with adjustable energy settings
-
Compact portable design with intelligent touchscreen controls
-
CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, exact cartridge configuration, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Receives in 8 days.
From $1,699.00
Professional 5-in-1 HIFU and Aesthetic Treatment System
Five Dedicated Technologies for Facial Rejuvenation, Body Contouring and Intimate Care
The Wikbeauty 5-in-1 Multifunctional HIFU Machine combines five professional aesthetic technologies within one touchscreen platform.
With dedicated handles for 8D HIFU, Liposonic body contouring, RF microneedling, Radar Carving and intimate care, the system allows beauty salons, med spas and aesthetic clinics to expand their treatment menus without purchasing multiple standalone machines.
Each technology has its own handle, cartridges and adjustable treatment parameters, giving trained operators greater control when developing professional face and body treatment protocols.
Five technologies | Five dedicated handles | 15-inch touchscreen | Three-year warranty
Five Professional Technologies in One System
8D HIFU
The 8D HIFU handle delivers focused ultrasound energy at selectable depths for professional facial and neck treatments.
It is designed to support non-surgical treatment programs focused on:
-
Facial lifting
-
Skin firming
-
Jawline definition
-
Neck treatments
-
Brow-area lifting
-
Improvement in the appearance of fine lines
The handle is supplied with 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges for treatments at different tissue depths.
Liposonic Body Contouring
The Liposonic handle delivers focused ultrasound energy at deeper levels for professional body-contouring applications.
With 8 mm and 13 mm cartridges, it is designed for larger body areas such as:
-
Abdomen
-
Waist and flanks
-
Upper and lower back
-
Upper arms
-
Thighs
-
Buttocks
The correct cartridge, energy setting and treatment technique should be selected following a complete client consultation.
RF Microneedling
The RF Microneedling handle combines controlled microneedling with bipolar radiofrequency energy.
It is designed to support professional treatments focused on:
-
Skin-texture improvement
-
Enlarged-pore appearance
-
Uneven skin tone
-
Fine-line appearance
-
General skin rejuvenation
-
Targeted facial and body protocols
Four cartridge options allow operators to adapt the treatment to different areas and professional objectives:
-
10-pin
-
25-pin
-
64-pin
-
Nano-pin
Radar Carving
The Radar Carving handle is designed for focused aesthetic treatments at selectable depths.
With 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges, it can be incorporated into professional skin-firming and contour-refinement protocols.
Common applications include:
-
Facial contouring
-
Jawline definition
-
Skin firming
-
Localized contour refinement
-
Complementary treatments alongside other technologies
Intimate Care
The dedicated Intimate Care handle expands the machine’s applications into professional intimate wellness and rejuvenation services.
It includes 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges and must only be used by appropriately trained professionals following strict consultation, hygiene, consent and safety procedures.
Availability and permitted use of intimate treatments may vary by country or region.
One Console, Five Dedicated Handles
Each technology is delivered through its own dedicated treatment handle.
This provides several practical advantages:
-
No need to purchase five separate machines
-
Reduced treatment-room floor space
-
Centralized touchscreen operation
-
Dedicated cartridges for each application
-
Easier organization of face and body services
-
Greater flexibility when expanding a treatment menu
-
Multiple cross-service and package opportunities
Each treatment remains technically distinct. Operators must follow the correct protocol for the handle, cartridge and treatment area selected.
Professional Face and Body Applications
| Treatment category | Technology | Common applications |
|---|---|---|
| Facial lifting | 8D HIFU | Face, neck, jawline and brow area |
| Body contouring | Liposonic | Abdomen, waist, back, arms and thighs |
| Skin rejuvenation | RF Microneedling | Texture, tone, pores and fine-line appearance |
| Contour refinement | Radar Carving | Facial and localized firming treatments |
| Intimate wellness | Intimate Care | Specialized professional protocols |
Treatment outcomes vary according to the client’s condition, treatment parameters, treatment schedule and individual response.
Adjustable Cartridges for Different Treatment Depths
8D HIFU Cartridges
-
3.0 mm
-
4.5 mm
Liposonic Body Cartridges
-
8 mm
-
13 mm
Radar Carving Cartridges
-
1.5 mm
-
3.0 mm
-
4.5 mm
Intimate Care Cartridges
-
3.0 mm
-
4.5 mm
RF Microneedling Cartridges
-
10-pin
-
25-pin
-
64-pin
-
Nano-pin
Cartridge depth and treatment parameters must be selected by a trained operator according to the treatment area, client suitability and recommended protocol.
Build a More Complete Treatment Menu
Facial Lifting and Firming
The 8D HIFU and Radar Carving handles can support professional treatment programs focused on facial contouring, skin firming and jawline definition.
Advanced Skin Rejuvenation
The RF Microneedling handle adds customizable treatments for skin texture, pore appearance, fine lines and overall skin quality.
Professional Body Contouring
The Liposonic handle provides deeper treatment depths for larger body areas, including the abdomen, waist, arms and thighs.
Intimate Wellness Services
The dedicated Intimate Care handle allows qualified providers to add specialized intimate rejuvenation treatments where legally permitted.
Combination Treatment Planning
Where appropriate, trained professionals may develop treatment plans using more than one technology. Each treatment should be performed according to its individual protocol rather than applying multiple technologies indiscriminately.
How a Professional Treatment Session Works
1. Consultation and Assessment
The operator reviews the client’s concerns, medical history, treatment goals and contraindications. The appropriate technology is selected only after confirming suitability.
2. Handle and Cartridge Selection
The correct handle and cartridge depth are selected according to the treatment area and intended protocol.
3. System Preparation
The handle is attached and checked before use. Conductive gel or other required treatment materials are applied where specified in the operating instructions.
4. Parameter Selection
The operator adjusts the energy output and other available settings according to the technology, cartridge depth, treatment area and client tolerance.
5. Controlled Treatment
The selected handle is applied using the recommended technique. Treatment duration depends on the technology, body area and professional protocol.
6. Post-Treatment Care
The treatment area is cleaned and the client receives appropriate aftercare guidance.
Temporary redness, sensitivity, swelling, tenderness or other expected responses may occur depending on the technology used. Recovery experience varies between individuals.
Designed for Daily Professional Operation
The system brings all five technologies together through a 15-inch color touchscreen interface.
Professional operating features include:
-
Five dedicated treatment handles
-
Large color touchscreen
-
Adjustable energy settings
-
Multiple treatment cartridges
-
Facial and body applications
-
Universal AC 110–220 V input
-
Compact multifunctional design
-
Dedicated protocols for each technology
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product type | Professional 5-in-1 HIFU and aesthetic system |
| Included technologies | 8D HIFU, Liposonic, RF Microneedling, Radar Carving and Intimate Care |
| Treatment handles | Five dedicated handles |
| Control interface | 15-inch color touchscreen |
| 8D HIFU cartridges | 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm |
| 8D HIFU energy output | 0.1–2.0 J |
| 8D HIFU cartridge capacity | Up to 10,000 shots |
| Liposonic cartridges | 8 mm and 13 mm |
| Liposonic energy output | 1–20 J |
| Liposonic cartridge capacity | Up to 500 shots |
| Radar Carving cartridges | 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm |
| Radar Carving energy output | 1–8 J |
| Radar Carving cartridge capacity | Up to 62,000 shots |
| Intimate Care cartridges | 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm |
| Intimate Care energy output | 0.1–1.5 J |
| Intimate Care cartridge capacity | Up to 10,000 shots |
| RF Microneedling cartridges | 10-pin, 25-pin, 64-pin and Nano-pin |
| RF frequency | 2 MHz bipolar |
| RF power | 10–200 W |
| Input voltage | AC 110–220 V |
| Fuse | 5 A |
| Package dimensions | 47 × 37 × 51 cm |
| Package weight | 15.9 kg |
| Warranty | Three-year limited warranty |
| Declared compliance | CE and RoHS documentation available according to the ordered model |
Technical specifications may be updated or vary according to production configuration. Request the current technical datasheet and electrical requirements before ordering.
What Is Included?
Main Equipment
-
One 5-in-1 touchscreen console
-
One 8D HIFU handle
-
One Liposonic handle
-
One RF Microneedling handle
-
One Radar Carving handle
-
One Intimate Care handle
-
Power cable
-
Starter conductive gel, where applicable
8D HIFU Cartridges
-
One 3.0 mm cartridge
-
One 4.5 mm cartridge
Liposonic Cartridges
-
One 8 mm cartridge
-
One 13 mm cartridge
Radar Carving Cartridges
-
One 1.5 mm cartridge
-
One 3.0 mm cartridge
-
One 4.5 mm cartridge
Intimate Care Cartridges
-
One 3.0 mm cartridge
-
One 4.5 mm cartridge
RF Microneedling Cartridges
-
10-pin cartridge
-
25-pin cartridge
-
64-pin cartridge
-
Nano-pin cartridge
Package contents should be confirmed against the final quotation before payment.
Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides remote guidance covering:
-
Machine installation and initial setup
-
Touchscreen navigation
-
Handle and cartridge installation
-
Basic parameter selection
-
Treatment-protocol guidance
-
Cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Safety procedures
-
Basic fault diagnosis and troubleshooting
English operating documentation and video guidance are included.
Training materials support equipment familiarization but do not replace any qualification, clinical training or professional license required in the operator’s jurisdiction.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty 5-in-1 Multifunctional HIFU Machine is supported by a three-year limited warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, coverage may include eligible manufacturing defects involving:
-
Main machine unit
-
Internal electronic components
-
Touchscreen and control system
-
Original treatment handles
-
Handle connectors
-
Other eligible original components
Cartridges, microneedling tips and other consumable or limited-use components may have different coverage terms.
Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the Wikbeauty support team will assist with:
-
Remote technical assessment
-
Guided troubleshooting
-
Identification of the affected component
-
Confirmation of warranty eligibility
-
Replacement-part assistance where applicable
-
Remote installation guidance
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Incorrect operation or misuse
-
Unauthorized repairs or modifications
-
Incorrect voltage or electrical connection
-
Improper cleaning, disinfection or storage
-
Normal wear of cartridges and consumables
-
Damage caused by unsuitable treatment materials
-
Failure to follow the operating manual
-
Unauthorized transportation damage
The order number, machine serial number, photos and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting warranty support.
All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy.
Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional aesthetic equipment and should only be used by appropriately trained personnel.
A complete consultation, informed consent process and contraindication assessment must be completed before every treatment.
Depending on the selected technology, treatment may not be suitable for individuals with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Implanted electronic or metallic devices
-
Active cancer
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Blood-clotting disorders
-
Uncontrolled medical conditions
-
Active infections
-
Open wounds
-
Severe inflammatory skin conditions
-
Conditions that affect normal healing
-
Recent surgery in the treatment area
-
Use of certain medications
-
Other contraindications identified in the operating manual
Additional Microneedling Requirements
RF microneedling must be performed using appropriate hygiene, sterilization and infection-control procedures. Single-use components must not be reused.
Additional Intimate Care Requirements
Intimate treatments require appropriate professional training, privacy procedures, informed consent and strict hygiene controls. Operators must confirm that the treatment is permitted within their professional scope and local regulations.
This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Medical guidance should be obtained whenever treatment suitability is uncertain.
Intended Professional Users
This multifunctional system is suitable for:
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Medical spas
-
Beauty salons
-
Skin-rejuvenation studios
-
Body-contouring centers
-
Qualified independent practitioners
-
Businesses expanding their treatment services
The machine is not designed for casual, unsupervised home use.
Why Choose a 5-in-1 Aesthetic System?
Five Technologies from One Console
Offer facial lifting, body contouring, RF microneedling, contour refinement and intimate care without maintaining five separate control units.
Dedicated Handle for Each Application
Each technology has a purpose-specific handle and cartridge system.
Face and Body Treatment Flexibility
Build individual services or structured treatment programs around different client concerns.
More Efficient Use of Space
One multifunctional platform requires less floor space than several standalone machines.
Long-Term Equipment Support
The system includes remote training, ongoing technical assistance and a three-year limited warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
What does “5-in-1” mean?
The system includes five dedicated technologies: 8D HIFU, Liposonic, RF Microneedling, Radar Carving and Intimate Care. Each technology has its own treatment handle.
Can multiple technologies be used in one treatment plan?
Qualified operators may develop combination treatment plans where clinically appropriate. Treatment order, timing and compatibility must be based on proper training, client suitability and the manufacturer’s protocols.
What is the difference between 8D HIFU and Liposonic?
The supplied 8D HIFU cartridges are intended for shallower facial and neck applications. The 8 mm and 13 mm Liposonic cartridges are designed for deeper body-contouring applications.
What is Radar Carving used for?
Radar Carving uses cartridges at 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm depths for professional firming and contour-refinement treatments.
Is the machine suitable for beginners?
The touchscreen system is designed for straightforward operation, but the treatments require professional knowledge. Operators must complete appropriate training and satisfy local qualification requirements.
Is there any downtime?
Recovery experience depends on the technology, treatment intensity and individual client response. Temporary redness, swelling, tenderness or sensitivity may occur. “Zero downtime” should not be guaranteed.
When can clients expect results?
Results and timelines vary. The selected technology, treatment settings, client condition and individual biological response all influence the outcome.
Is training included?
Remote setup, operating guidance and training materials are included. This does not replace any locally required professional qualification or license.
What does the three-year warranty cover?
The limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects in approved machine components. Consumables, misuse, accidental damage and unauthorized modifications are excluded.
Does the machine have CE and RoHS documentation?
CE and RoHS
Expand Your Treatment Menu with One Professional Platform
The Wikbeauty 5-in-1 Multifunctional HIFU Machine brings five complementary aesthetic technologies into one compact system:
-
8D HIFU
-
Liposonic
-
RF Microneedling
-
Radar Carving
-
Intimate Care
Contact Wikbeauty for the current technical datasheet, cartridge details, training information and purchasing assistance.
Request Pricing and Product Consultation
Receives in 8 days.
$1,349.00
Professional Vibration Massage and Body Wellness System
Five Massage Heads for Customized Relaxation and Body-Care Treatments
The Vibration Massage Slimming Machine is a professional massage and wellness platform developed for beauty salons, spas, body-contouring studios and wellness clinics.
The system combines adjustable vibration and percussion therapy with five interchangeable massage heads. An optional 40K vacuum-heating function supports additional professional body-care and contouring programs.
Its digital controls, ergonomic treatment handpiece and portable wheeled design allow trained operators to customize treatments for the arms, thighs, abdomen, legs, back, neck and shoulders.
Vibration and percussion therapy | Five massage heads | Optional 40K vacuum heating | Three-year warranty
Four Professional Functions on One Massage Platform
Vibration Massage
The vibration function delivers rapid mechanical movements to suitable muscles and body tissue.
Common applications include:
-
General body massage
-
Muscle relaxation
-
Tired-muscle treatments
-
Body-wellness programs
-
Post-workout support
-
Maintenance-oriented massage
Percussion Therapy
The percussion function provides controlled repetitive movement for professional massage and recovery programs.
Common applications include:
-
Localized muscle tension
-
Larger muscle groups
-
Back and shoulder treatments
-
Thigh and leg massage
-
Fitness-recovery programs
-
General relaxation
Circulation and Drainage Support
Mechanical vibration can be incorporated into professionally planned circulation and fluid-movement programs.
Common applications include:
-
Tired-leg treatments
-
General circulation support
-
Temporary water-retention programs
-
Body-care services
-
Post-treatment massage
-
Wellness-maintenance sessions
Optional 40K Vacuum Heating
The optional 40K vacuum-heating configuration combines suction and controlled warmth with the base massage platform.
Common applications include:
-
Cellulite-appearance programs
-
Body-contour refinement
-
Skin-firming support
-
Abdomen and thigh treatments
-
Circulation-focused body care
-
Combination contouring services
The appropriate treatment head, vibration intensity, vacuum level, temperature and session duration should be selected according to the treatment area, client condition and professional protocol.
Select the Right Treatment Program for Each Client
The system supports customizable massage, recovery and body-care programs.
Program 1: Relaxation and Wellness
A comfort-focused vibration program for general body massage and relaxation.
Recommended applications:
-
General relaxation
-
Stress-relief programs
-
Tired-muscle massage
-
Maintenance-oriented wellness
Recommended for:
-
Spa clients
-
Fatigued professionals
-
First-time clients
-
General wellness programs
Program 2: Muscle Recovery
A percussion-focused program for suitable muscle groups and post-workout support.
Recommended applications:
-
Back and shoulder massage
-
Thigh and leg treatments
-
Post-workout recovery
-
Localized muscle tension
Recommended for:
-
Fitness enthusiasts
-
Athletes
-
Sports-recovery clients
-
Wellness-center members
Program 3: Body Shaping Support
A customized vibration program for suitable body-contouring and skin-texture concerns.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdomen treatments
-
Thigh treatments
-
Upper-arm programs
-
Cellulite-appearance support
Recommended for:
-
Body-contouring studios
-
Beauty salons
-
Aesthetic wellness clinics
-
Clients seeking non-invasive body care
Program 4: Vacuum-Heating Body Care
An optional program combining vibration, vacuum suction and controlled heating.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdomen and waist
-
Thighs
-
Buttocks
-
Upper arms
Recommended for:
-
Advanced body-care packages
-
Cellulite-appearance treatments
-
Skin-firming programs
-
Clinics combining multiple contouring technologies
Five Massage Heads for Customized Treatments
Five interchangeable heads provide different coverage patterns and massage sensations.
| Massage Head | Recommended Application |
|---|---|
| Round Head | General massage and medium-sized body areas |
| Spiked Head | More intensive stimulation for suitable muscle groups |
| Flat Head | Broader coverage for the back, thighs and abdomen |
| Textured Head | Localized muscle tension and customized massage |
| Specialty Head | Targeted treatment according to professional protocol |
The interchangeable heads allow operators to adapt the treatment pattern to the selected body area and client comfort.
New clients should begin with a lower vibration intensity before the setting is increased gradually.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
The treatment handpiece and interchangeable heads support professional massage across multiple body areas.
Upper-Body Treatments
-
Neck muscles
-
Shoulders
-
Upper back
-
Lower back
-
Upper arms
-
Suitable side-body areas
Core and Lower-Body Treatments
-
Abdomen
-
Waist
-
Thighs
-
Buttocks
-
Lower legs
-
Calves
Full-Body Wellness Programs
-
General relaxation
-
Muscle-recovery support
-
Circulation-focused massage
-
Body-care treatments
-
Post-workout wellness
-
Maintenance-oriented services
Professional Wellness and Body-Care Applications
The available treatments depend on the selected head, vibration intensity, optional vacuum and heating settings and professional protocol.
| Treatment Area | Applicable Treatment Head | Intended Wellness Application |
|---|---|---|
| Neck and shoulders | Round or Textured Head | Muscle-relaxation support |
| Back | Flat or Round Head | Broad-area massage |
| Upper arms | Round or Specialty Head | Massage and body-care support |
| Abdomen | Flat Head | General body-contouring support |
| Thighs | Flat or Spiked Head | Massage and texture-refinement support |
| Legs and calves | Round or Textured Head | Tired-muscle relaxation |
| Buttocks | Flat or Specialty Head | Body-care and massage programs |
| Localized muscle areas | Textured or Specialty Head | Targeted professional treatment |
Treatment suitability and expected responses vary between clients. A complete health consultation should be performed before every treatment.
How a Professional Session Works
1. Client Consultation
The operator reviews the client’s health history, target areas, muscle condition, comfort level and contraindications.
2. Treatment-Head Selection
The appropriate massage head is selected and installed according to the operating manual. The operator confirms that the attachment is secure.
3. Parameter Selection
Vibration intensity, treatment duration and optional vacuum or heating settings are selected according to the client’s tolerance and professional protocol.
4. Massage Treatment
The operator moves the treatment handpiece across the selected body area using controlled pressure and the recommended technique. A typical session lasts approximately 15–20 minutes per area.
5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After the session, the treatment area is assessed and the client receives suitable hydration, activity and aftercare guidance.
Temporary redness, warmth, tenderness, tingling or mild muscle fatigue may occur.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The machine combines adjustable vibration with five massage heads and portable professional controls.
Key operating advantages include:
-
Vibration and percussion massage
-
Five interchangeable treatment heads
-
Multiple adjustable intensity levels
-
Optional 40K vacuum heating
-
Digital touchscreen or control panel
-
Ergonomic treatment handpiece
-
Portable wheeled design
-
Dual-voltage compatibility
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Vibration Massage Slimming Machine |
| Product Type | Professional vibration massage and body-wellness system |
| Primary Technology | Vibration and percussion therapy |
| Optional Technology | 40K vacuum heating |
| Massage Heads | Five interchangeable heads |
| Head Types | Round, spiked, flat, textured and specialty |
| Vibration Intensity | Multiple adjustable levels |
| Session Duration | Approximately 15–20 minutes per area |
| Treatment Areas | Arms, thighs, abdomen, legs, back, neck and shoulders |
| Control Interface | Digital touchscreen or control panel |
| Power Supply | 110V and 220V |
| Design | Ergonomic handpiece with optional wheeled cart |
| Portability | Lightweight and movable |
| Safety Features | Automatic shut-off, overheat protection and intensity controls |
| Warranty | Three-year parts warranty |
| Support | Professional training and customer assistance |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
What Is Included?
The package includes the main machine, treatment handpiece, five massage heads and required operating accessories.
Standard Equipment
-
One Vibration Massage Slimming Machine
-
One professional treatment handpiece
-
One Round Massage Head
-
One Spiked Massage Head
-
One Flat Massage Head
-
One Textured Massage Head
-
One Specialty Massage Head
-
Head-connection components
-
Optional vacuum-heating accessories for the selected model
-
Power cable
-
English user manual
-
Operating guidance
Documentation and Training
-
English operating manual
-
Remote professional training
-
Machine installation guidance
-
Treatment-head installation
-
Head-selection guidance
-
Vibration-intensity adjustment
-
Vacuum and heating guidance where applicable
-
Body-area treatment protocols
-
Safety and contraindication instructions
-
Cleaning and maintenance guidance
-
Basic troubleshooting assistance
-
Training certificate after completion
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Professional training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Control-panel operation
-
Treatment-handpiece use
-
Installation of all five massage heads
-
Head selection by body area
-
Vibration-intensity adjustment
-
Optional vacuum operation
-
Optional heating controls
-
Client positioning
-
Professional massage protocols
-
Cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Safety procedures
-
Basic troubleshooting
A professional training certificate is provided after successful completion.
Three-Year Warranty
The Vibration Massage Slimming Machine is supported by a three-year parts warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment.
Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered:
-
Main machine unit
-
Internal electronic components
-
Digital control system
-
Original treatment handpiece
-
Vibration and percussion components
-
Optional vacuum and heating components
-
Handpiece-connection components
-
Other eligible parts supplied with the machine
Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the support team will assist with:
-
Remote inspection and fault identification
-
Guided troubleshooting
-
Confirmation of the affected component
-
Warranty-eligibility review
-
Replacement-part assistance when covered
-
Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover:
-
Accidental or cosmetic damage
-
Damage caused by misuse
-
Incorrect treatment-head installation
-
Unauthorized repairs or modifications
-
Incorrect voltage or electrical connection
-
Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance
-
Normal wear of treatment heads and consumable components
-
Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual
-
Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization
The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service.
Full coverage remains subject to the official warranty policy.
Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional vibration massage equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel.
A complete health assessment and contraindication review must be completed before treatment.
Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Active or suspected blood clots
-
Deep-vein thrombosis
-
Severe cardiovascular conditions
-
Severe varicose veins in the treatment area
-
Recent fractures
-
Severe osteoporosis
-
Acute inflammation or fever
-
Open wounds or active infections
-
Recent surgery
-
Herniated discs or severe spinal conditions
-
Reduced sensation
-
Uncontrolled medical conditions
-
Other contraindications listed in the operating manual
The device must not be applied directly over the head, front or side of the neck, spine, kidneys, open wounds, acute injuries or other prohibited areas.
Optional vacuum and heat settings require additional assessment of skin condition, circulation and heat sensitivity.
This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain.
Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for:
-
Beauty salons
-
Professional spas
-
Wellness clinics
-
Body-contouring studios
-
Fitness and recovery facilities
-
Massage professionals
-
Aesthetic centers
-
Trained independent practitioners
-
Businesses expanding their wellness services
This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use.
Why Choose the Vibration Massage Slimming Machine?
Access Five Massage Heads
Five interchangeable heads allow operators to customize treatment coverage and massage sensation for different body areas.
Treat Multiple Body Areas
The system supports professional massage for the arms, thighs, abdomen, legs, back, neck muscles and shoulders.
Customize Every Session
Adjustable vibration intensity and optional vacuum-heating settings allow treatments to be adapted to client comfort and professional objectives.
Expand Your Service Menu
The machine supports relaxation, muscle-recovery, body-care, cellulite-appearance and complementary contouring programs.
Protect Your Investment
The system includes a three-year parts warranty, CE and ISO certificates, professional training and customer support.
Frequently Asked Questions
How does vibration massage work?
The machine delivers rapid mechanical vibration and percussion through the selected massage head. Intensity can be adjusted according to the treatment area and client comfort.
What are the five massage heads used for?
The Round Head supports general massage, the Spiked Head provides more intensive stimulation, the Flat Head covers larger areas, the Textured Head supports localized massage and the Specialty Head is used for targeted protocols.
Which body areas can be treated?
Suitable areas include the shoulders, back, upper arms, abdomen, waist, thighs, buttocks, legs and calves.
How long does a treatment take?
A typical session lasts approximately 15–20 minutes per body area. Treating multiple areas may require additional time.
Can the machine be used for relaxation only?
Yes. The system can be used for general muscle relaxation, stress-relief and professional wellness massage without including body-contouring protocols.
What is the optional 40K vacuum-heating function?
The optional configuration combines vacuum suction and controlled heating with vibration massage for additional body-care and contour-refinement programs.
Can it be combined with other body treatments?
The machine may be incorporated into professionally planned packages with suitable cavitation, RF or body-contouring services.
Is the treatment uncomfortable?
Vibration intensity is adjustable. Clients should feel controlled mechanical stimulation without pain. Settings should be reduced or treatment stopped if discomfort occurs.
Is professional training included?
Professional training covers machine setup, treatment heads, intensity settings, optional vacuum heating, body protocols, cleaning and safety. A training certificate is provided.
What does the three-year warranty cover?
The three-year parts warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Consumables, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded.
Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included.
Add Professional Vibration Massage to Your Business
The Vibration Massage Slimming Machine combines:
-
Adjustable vibration and percussion therapy
-
Five interchangeable massage heads
-
Optional 40K vacuum heating
-
Professional relaxation and body-care applications
-
Three-year parts warranty and customer support
Contact Wikbeauty to order the machine or receive more information about its treatment heads, optional vacuum configuration and professional training.
Order Your Vibration Massage Slimming Machine and Request Pricing
Receives in 8 days.
$3,999.00
Professional Cryolipolysis Fat-Freezing System
Controlled Cooling Technology for Non-Invasive Fat Reduction and Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty Cryolipolysis Machine is a professional body-contouring system developed for controlled fat-freezing treatments across multiple body areas.
Cryolipolysis uses precisely controlled cooling to target suitable subcutaneous fat tissue. The treated fat cells undergo a gradual biological response and are processed by the body over the weeks following treatment.
With adjustable temperatures from 5°C to −15°C, multiple applicator sizes, intelligent touchscreen controls, real-time temperature monitoring, and universal 110V–240V compatibility, the machine is suitable for slimming clinics, beauty salons, medical spas, and wellness centers.
Controlled cryolipolysis | 5°C to −15°C cooling | Multiple applicators | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Functions on One Platform
Controlled Cryolipolysis Cooling
The machine delivers controlled cooling to suitable areas of subcutaneous fat while the skin is protected by an antifreeze membrane.
Common applications include:
-
Abdomen treatments
-
Waist and flank contouring
-
Upper-arm treatments
-
Inner- and outer-thigh programs
-
Back-fat treatments
-
Suitable submental-area treatments
Vacuum Applicator Technology
The treatment applicator uses suction to draw suitable tissue into the cooling chamber and maintain consistent contact during treatment.
Common benefits include:
-
Secure tissue positioning
-
Targeted cooling delivery
-
Different applicator sizes
-
Customized anatomical coverage
-
Stable treatment contact
-
Professional treatment consistency
Intelligent Temperature and Safety Control
The machine combines adjustable cooling with real-time monitoring and automatic protection features.
Common features include:
-
Adjustable cooling temperature
-
Real-time temperature monitoring
-
Pre-programmed treatment protocols
-
Automatic shut-off
-
Antifreeze membrane protection
-
Intelligent touchscreen controls
Select the Right Program for Each Client
Abdomen and Waist Program
Uses an appropriately sized applicator for suitable abdominal, waist, or flank tissue.
Recommended applications:
-
Upper-abdomen treatments
-
Lower-abdomen treatments
-
Waistline contouring
-
Flank and love-handle areas
-
General midsection programs
Recommended for:
-
Clients with suitable pinchable subcutaneous fat
-
Clients seeking non-invasive midsection contouring
-
Clients with stable and realistic treatment goals
Arms and Back Program
Uses a small or medium applicator for suitable upper-arm, underarm, back, or bra-line tissue.
Recommended applications:
-
Upper-arm contouring
-
Underarm-area treatments
-
Upper-back treatments
-
Lower-back contouring
-
Bra-line programs
Recommended for:
-
Clients concerned about localized upper-body areas
-
Clients suitable for controlled cooling
-
Clients seeking targeted body contouring
Thigh and Buttock Program
Uses an appropriate applicator for suitable inner-thigh, outer-thigh, or lower-buttock areas.
Recommended applications:
-
Inner-thigh contouring
-
Outer-thigh treatments
-
Upper-leg body contouring
-
Lower-buttock fold treatments
-
Bilateral lower-body programs
Recommended for:
-
Clients with suitable thigh-area tissue
-
Clients seeking lower-body contouring
-
Clients receiving bilateral treatment plans
Submental and Maintenance Program
Uses a suitable small applicator for professionally assessed submental areas or provides additional treatments following reassessment.
Recommended applications:
-
Double-chin-area contouring
-
Small localized areas
-
Follow-up treatment after assessment
-
Multi-area treatment planning
-
Long-term body-contouring support
Recommended for:
-
Clients with suitable submental tissue
-
Clients completing an initial treatment
-
Clients requiring professionally assessed follow-up care
Adjustable Cooling and Treatment Settings
The Wikbeauty Cryolipolysis Machine allows practitioners to personalize treatments according to the applicator, body area, tissue condition, and client tolerance.
| Setting | Available Configuration | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| Technology | Controlled cryolipolysis | Non-invasive fat-freezing treatment |
| Cooling Range | 5°C to −15°C | Adjustable treatment temperature |
| Applicators | Multiple sizes | Different body and submental areas |
| Session Duration | Approximately 30–60 minutes per area | Customized treatment planning |
| Treatment Course | Commonly one to three sessions per area | Progressive body-contouring program |
| Treatment Interval | Approximately four to six weeks | Allows professional reassessment |
| Temperature Monitoring | Real-time | Treatment safety and consistency |
| Control System | Intelligent touchscreen | Protocol and parameter management |
Temperature, suction, and treatment duration should be selected according to the applicator, tissue thickness, skin condition, client response, and supplied protocols.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Abdomen, Waist, and Flanks
Different applicator sizes support controlled cooling across suitable midsection areas.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Upper-abdomen contouring
-
Lower-abdomen contouring
-
Waistline definition
-
Love-handle treatments
-
General midsection shaping
Arms, Back, and Buttocks
Suitable applicators can be selected for localized upper-body and posterior body areas.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Upper-arm contouring
-
Bra-line treatments
-
Upper- and lower-back areas
-
Lower-buttock fold treatments
-
Localized body shaping
Thighs, Legs, and Double Chin
Small, medium, or specialized applicators support professionally assessed lower-body and submental treatments.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Inner-thigh contouring
-
Outer-thigh treatments
-
Upper-leg shaping
-
Double-chin-area contouring
-
Bilateral body treatments
Professional Treatment Applications
| Treatment Area | Primary Objective | Recommended Applicator |
|---|---|---|
| Abdomen | Localized midsection contouring | Medium or large applicator |
| Waist and Flanks | Waistline and love-handle treatment | Suitable curved applicator |
| Upper Arms | Localized arm contouring | Small or medium applicator |
| Back and Bra Line | Targeted back-area treatment | Suitable medium applicator |
| Inner Thighs | Lower-body contouring | Small or medium applicator |
| Outer Thighs | Thigh-area body contouring | Suitable applicator |
| Buttock Fold | Localized contouring | Small or curved applicator |
| Double Chin | Submental-area treatment | Specialized small applicator |
Applicator availability and final configuration depend on the selected machine package.
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, body-contouring objectives, target areas, previous procedures, skin condition, and possible contraindications. Confirm that the selected area contains suitable tissue for cryolipolysis.
Step 2: Area and Applicator Selection
Mark the treatment area and select the applicator that best matches the tissue size, shape, and anatomical location.
Step 3: Skin Protection and Placement
Apply an approved antifreeze membrane correctly over the complete treatment area. Position the applicator and adjust the suction according to the supplied protocol.
Step 4: Controlled Cooling Treatment
Begin the selected cooling program for approximately 30–60 minutes. Monitor the temperature, applicator seal, skin condition, and client comfort throughout the session.
Step 5: Treatment Completion
Remove the applicator and protective membrane, inspect the skin, and perform the recommended post-treatment massage when appropriate. Document the settings and provide aftercare guidance.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Wikbeauty Cryolipolysis Machine combines adjustable cooling, multiple applicator options, and intelligent safety controls.
Key advantages include:
-
Professional cryolipolysis technology
-
Adjustable cooling from 5°C to −15°C
-
Multiple applicator sizes
-
Treatments for several body areas
-
Intelligent digital touchscreen
-
Pre-programmed treatment protocols
-
Real-time temperature monitoring
-
Antifreeze membrane protection
-
Automatic shut-off
-
Approximately 30–60-minute sessions
-
Universal 110V–240V compatibility
-
CE and ISO certificates
-
Three-year professional warranty
-
Professional training and ongoing support
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty Cryolipolysis Machine |
| Technology | Controlled cryolipolysis fat freezing |
| Cooling Range | 5°C to −15°C adjustable |
| Treatment Applicators | Multiple sizes, package-dependent |
| Primary Function | Non-invasive fat reduction and body contouring |
| Treatment Areas | Abdomen, waist, flanks, arms, thighs, back, buttocks, and double chin |
| Session Duration | Approximately 30–60 minutes per area |
| Recommended Course | Commonly one to three sessions per area |
| Treatment Interval | Approximately four to six weeks |
| Results Timeline | Progressive changes over approximately four to sixteen weeks |
| Display | Intelligent digital touchscreen |
| Treatment Programs | Pre-programmed and adjustable |
| Temperature Monitoring | Real-time |
| Safety Features | Antifreeze membranes and automatic shut-off |
| Power Supply | 110V–240V |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
| Warranty | Three-year professional warranty |
| Support | Professional training and ongoing technical assistance |
The supplied product information lists potential fat-reduction figures of 20–40% per treated area. These figures should not be presented as guaranteed outcomes because individual results vary.
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty Cryolipolysis main unit
-
Multiple cooling applicators according to the selected package
-
Applicator connection hoses
-
Applicator-positioning accessories
-
Intelligent digital touchscreen
-
Pre-programmed treatment protocols
-
Antifreeze membranes and gel starter supply
-
1 × Universal 110V–240V power cable
-
Standard machine accessories
-
Warranty card
The exact number, size, and shape of included applicators should follow the selected machine configuration.
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Installation and operating guide
-
Safety and maintenance instructions
-
Professional video training
-
Applicator-selection guidance
-
Cooling-temperature guidance
-
Suction-adjustment guidance
-
Body-area treatment protocols
-
Submental-treatment guidance
-
Client-consultation materials
-
Aftercare instructions
-
Cleaning and maintenance guidance
-
Professional training certificate
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Wikbeauty Cryolipolysis Machine includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use the system safely and consistently.
Training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen operation
-
Client consultation and screening
-
Tissue and treatment-area assessment
-
Applicator selection
-
Correct antifreeze membrane placement
-
Suction adjustment
-
Cooling-temperature selection
-
Treatment-duration selection
-
Body and submental protocols
-
Client monitoring
-
Post-treatment massage
-
Aftercare guidance
-
Equipment cleaning and maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Cryolipolysis Machine includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period.
Antifreeze membranes, gels, applicator seals, hoses, filters, and other components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement.
Technical Support Process
-
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team.
-
Provide the machine model and order information.
-
Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested.
-
A technician will assess the reported issue remotely.
-
Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged.
-
Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable accessories, cold injury caused by incorrect membrane placement or operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual.
Safety and Contraindications
A detailed consultation and health-history review must be completed before every treatment. Cryolipolysis should only be performed by appropriately trained professionals.
Treatment may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or breastfeeding
-
Cryoglobulinemia
-
Cold agglutinin disease
-
Paroxysmal cold hemoglobinuria
-
Severe cold sensitivity or cold urticaria
-
Raynaud’s disease or serious circulation disorders
-
Active hernia within or near the treatment area
-
Active infection or open wounds
-
Severe skin conditions within the treatment area
-
Reduced or impaired sensation
-
Recent surgery within the treatment area
-
Serious liver or kidney conditions
-
Blood-clotting disorders
-
Medical conditions requiring physician supervision
The system is intended for suitable subcutaneous fat and should not be presented as a treatment for obesity or as a replacement for weight management.
Cryolipolysis carries risks, including cold injury, prolonged numbness, contour irregularity, pain, and rare paradoxical adipose hyperplasia. Clients must receive appropriate risk information and provide informed consent.
Operating Precautions
-
Inspect the machine, applicators, hoses, seals, and accessories before use.
-
Confirm client suitability before every treatment.
-
Select the correct applicator for the treatment area.
-
Use a new, approved antifreeze membrane for every application.
-
Ensure the membrane covers the complete cooling area.
-
Begin with professionally selected cooling and suction settings.
-
Monitor temperature, applicator contact, skin condition, and client comfort.
-
Do not treat prohibited or unsuitable anatomical areas.
-
Never reuse a single-use antifreeze membrane.
-
Record applicator, temperature, suction, duration, and treatment area.
-
Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client.
-
Follow the supplied maintenance schedule.
-
Stop treatment if unexpected pain or skin changes occur.
Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty Cryolipolysis Machine is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in:
-
Slimming clinics
-
Body-contouring centers
-
Medical spas
-
Beauty salons
-
Wellness centers
-
Aesthetic clinics
-
Professional spas
-
Weight-management facilities
Operators should review applicable local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before providing cryolipolysis treatments.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty Cryolipolysis Machine?
Adjustable Controlled Cooling
The system provides adjustable cooling from 5°C to −15°C for professionally selected body-contouring protocols.
Multiple Applicator Options
Different applicator sizes support customized treatments for the abdomen, waist, arms, thighs, back, buttocks, and suitable submental areas.
Intelligent Safety Controls
Real-time temperature monitoring, antifreeze membranes, pre-programmed protocols, and automatic shut-off support professional operation.
Multiple Treatment Areas
One system can support customized body-contouring programs across several suitable anatomical areas.
Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating training, applicator guidance, treatment protocols, CE and ISO certificates, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Wikbeauty Cryolipolysis Machine?
It is a professional controlled-cooling system developed for non-invasive fat-reduction and body-contouring treatments.
How does cryolipolysis work?
Controlled cooling targets suitable subcutaneous fat tissue. The treated fat cells undergo a gradual biological response and are processed by the body over the following weeks.
What cooling temperatures are available?
The machine provides adjustable cooling from 5°C to −15°C.
Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the abdomen, waist, flanks, upper arms, thighs, back, buttock fold, and suitable double-chin areas.
How long does one treatment take?
A standard treatment takes approximately 30–60 minutes per area, depending on the applicator and selected protocol.
How many sessions are recommended?
One to three sessions per area, commonly spaced four to six weeks apart. The final plan should follow professional reassessment.
When may clients notice changes?
Early changes may appear within two to four weeks, with progressive changes developing over approximately eight to sixteen weeks.
Is the treatment painful?
Clients commonly experience strong cooling, suction, pulling, and temporary numbness. Some clients may experience discomfort during or after treatment.
Is there downtime?
Many clients can resume normal activities following treatment. Temporary redness, swelling, bruising, tenderness, tingling, or numbness may occur.
Are treated fat cells permanently removed?
Fat cells processed after treatment do not regenerate in the same way. However, remaining fat cells can enlarge with weight gain, and individual contour changes are not guaranteed to be permanent.
Is cryolipolysis a weight-loss treatment?
No. Cryolipolysis is intended for localized body contouring and is not a treatment for obesity or a replacement for balanced nutrition and exercise.
What results are supplied for this machine?
The supplied product information lists potential fat-reduction figures of 20–40% per treated area. These figures are not guaranteed and vary by client and protocol.
What is an antifreeze membrane?
It is a protective barrier applied between the skin and cooling applicator. Correct placement and full coverage are essential to reduce the risk of cold injury.
Are results guaranteed?
No. Results vary according to tissue thickness, applicator fit, treatment settings, number of sessions, body composition, lifestyle, and individual response.
What certificates are included?
The machine includes CE and ISO certificates.
What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues.
Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers machine operation, client screening, applicator selection, membrane placement, cooling and suction settings, treatment protocols, aftercare, cleaning, maintenance, and troubleshooting.
Add Professional Cryolipolysis to Your Business
The Wikbeauty Cryolipolysis Machine enables slimming clinics, medical spas, and body-contouring professionals to provide controlled fat-freezing treatments across multiple suitable body areas.
Five key benefits:
-
Adjustable controlled cooling from 5°C to −15°C
-
Multiple applicators for different treatment areas
-
Intelligent touchscreen with real-time temperature monitoring
-
Antifreeze membrane protection and automatic shut-off
-
CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, applicator configuration, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Receives in 8 days.
$3,599.00
Professional Dual-Technology Shockwave Therapy System
Electromagnetic and Pneumatic Shockwave Technology for Multi-Application Treatments
The Wikbeauty Dual Wave C is a professional extracorporeal shockwave therapy system that combines electromagnetic and pneumatic ballistic technologies on one integrated platform.
Its electromagnetic handpiece provides focused acoustic energy for precise treatment areas, while the pneumatic handpiece generates radial pressure waves for broader soft-tissue applications. Practitioners can select the appropriate technology according to the treatment area and professional protocol.
The system includes 19 treatment tips, three dedicated treatment interfaces, a 10.4-inch color touchscreen, adjustable energy and frequency settings, a built-in cooling system, and an impact counter.
Two shockwave technologies | 19 treatment tips | Three dedicated modes | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Two Professional Shockwave Technologies on One Platform
Electromagnetic Shockwave Technology
The electromagnetic handpiece uses a precision magnetic-coil mechanism to generate focused acoustic energy. Its concentrated delivery is designed for smaller treatment zones and applications that require precise energy placement.
Common applications include:
-
Focused musculoskeletal treatments
-
Tendon and soft-tissue programs
-
Localized pain-management support
-
Sports-injury rehabilitation
-
Erectile-function treatment protocols
-
Targeted physiotherapy applications
Pneumatic Ballistic Shockwave Technology
The pneumatic handpiece uses compressed air to accelerate an internal projectile. The resulting impact creates radial pressure waves that disperse through a broader tissue area.
Common applications include:
-
Large soft-tissue areas
-
Cellulite treatments
-
Body-contouring programs
-
Broad physiotherapy applications
-
Muscle and connective-tissue treatments
-
Sports-recovery programs
Integrated Dual-Technology Operation
The two handpieces allow practitioners to select focused electromagnetic energy or broader pneumatic pressure waves without purchasing separate systems.
This integrated configuration supports:
-
Precise and broad treatment options
-
Multiple professional applications
-
Customizable treatment protocols
-
Efficient switching between services
-
Reduced equipment requirements
-
Flexible clinical workflows
Select the Right Treatment Mode for Each Client
Erectile-Function Treatment Mode
The dedicated ED interface includes five mapped treatment zones, impact counting, round tracking, preload selection, and electromagnetic or pneumatic mode options.
Recommended applications:
-
Professional erectile-function protocols
-
Vascular-support treatment programs
-
Targeted acoustic-wave applications
-
Structured multi-session treatments
Recommended for:
-
Appropriately screened adult male clients
-
Specialist men’s wellness clinics
-
Qualified practitioners offering ED protocols
This application should only be provided within the practitioner’s permitted professional scope and according to applicable local requirements.
Anti-Cellulite Treatment Mode
The anti-cellulite interface provides body-area mapping and adjustable settings for different treatment zones.
Recommended applications:
-
Cellulite appearance treatments
-
Localized body-contouring programs
-
Skin-texture improvement
-
Soft-tissue stimulation
-
Body wellness treatments
Recommended for:
-
Clients concerned about visible cellulite
-
Clients seeking non-invasive body treatments
-
Clinics offering structured body-care programs
Physiotherapy Treatment Mode
The physiotherapy interface covers nine musculoskeletal regions and supports customizable frequency, energy, and impact settings.
Recommended applications:
-
Tendon and soft-tissue treatments
-
Sports-injury recovery programs
-
Chronic musculoskeletal conditions
-
Rehabilitation support
-
Localized pain-management programs
Recommended for:
-
Physiotherapy clients
-
Sports and recovery clients
-
Clients with professionally assessed musculoskeletal concerns
Sports-Recovery Program
Practitioners can select the appropriate electromagnetic or pneumatic handpiece according to the size, depth, and location of the target area.
Recommended applications:
-
Tendon overuse conditions
-
Muscle and soft-tissue recovery
-
Shoulder, elbow, knee, and ankle programs
-
Post-activity recovery support
Recommended for:
-
Athletes
-
Active adults
-
Fitness and rehabilitation clients
Electromagnetic Energy and Frequency Control
The electromagnetic handpiece offers adjustable focused-shockwave parameters for precise treatments.
| Setting | Available Range | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| Energy | 5–200mJ | Adjustable focused acoustic output |
| Frequency | 1–16Hz | Customizable pulse-delivery speed |
| Treatment Heads | Seven | Different focused applications |
| ED-Specific Heads | Two | Dedicated professional protocols |
| Preload Settings | Six | Customizable treatment response |
| Monitoring | Handpiece-mounted display | Real-time setting observation |
| Cooling | Built-in cooling fan | Supports continued operation |
Settings should be selected according to the treatment area, professional protocol, and client response.
Pneumatic Pressure and Frequency Control
The pneumatic handpiece provides adjustable radial pressure-wave settings for broader treatment areas.
| Setting | Available Range | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| Pressure | 1–6 Bar | Adjustable radial-wave intensity |
| Frequency | 1–21Hz | Customizable impact speed |
| Treatment Heads | Twelve | Broad treatment versatility |
| Head Types | Focus, radial, and flat | Different pressure-wave distributions |
| Head Diameters | 6–25mm | Small and large treatment zones |
| Tip Changing | Easy-change mechanism | Efficient treatment preparation |
| Mechanism | Compressed-air ballistic | Radial pressure-wave generation |
Nineteen Interchangeable Treatment Tips
The Dual Wave C includes seven electromagnetic heads and twelve pneumatic heads to support different treatment depths, areas, and professional applications.
| Tip Group | Quantity | Primary Applications |
|---|---|---|
| Electromagnetic Heads | Seven | Precise and focused treatment zones |
| ED-Specific Heads | Two of the seven electromagnetic heads | Professional erectile-function protocols |
| Pneumatic Focus Heads | Included within the twelve pneumatic heads | Concentrated radial treatment |
| Pneumatic Radial Heads | Included within the twelve pneumatic heads | General soft-tissue treatment |
| Pneumatic Flat Heads | Included within the twelve pneumatic heads | Broader surface coverage |
| Total Treatment Tips | Nineteen | Multi-application clinical coverage |
The exact tip should be selected according to its intended function, the treatment area, and the supplied professional protocol.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Upper-Body Areas
The available heads and treatment settings support multiple upper-body physiotherapy and recovery applications.
Common treatment areas include:
-
Shoulder
-
Elbow
-
Hand and wrist
-
Upper back
-
Selected arm muscles and tendons
Lower-Body Areas
Focused or radial shockwave delivery can be selected according to the size and location of the lower-body treatment area.
Common treatment areas include:
-
Hip
-
Knee
-
Thigh
-
Achilles tendon
-
Foot and ankle
-
Plantar area
Body and Intimate Wellness Areas
Dedicated interfaces and specialized treatment heads support professionally assessed body and intimate wellness applications.
Common treatment areas include:
-
Abdomen
-
Waist
-
Buttocks
-
Inner and outer thighs
-
Legs
-
Suitable ED treatment zones
Professional Treatment Applications
| Treatment Category | Common Applications | Recommended Technology |
|---|---|---|
| Erectile-Function Programs | Professionally assessed vascular-support protocols | Electromagnetic or protocol-selected mode |
| Cellulite Treatments | Body texture and cellulite appearance | Pneumatic radial |
| Physiotherapy | Musculoskeletal and soft-tissue conditions | Electromagnetic or pneumatic |
| Sports Recovery | Muscle, tendon, and activity-related recovery | Protocol-dependent |
| Musculoskeletal Rehabilitation | Functional recovery and localized pain support | Focused or radial shockwave |
| Body Contouring | Abdomen, waist, thighs, buttocks, and legs | Pneumatic radial |
Common Musculoskeletal Applications
The Dual Wave C may be incorporated into professional protocols for suitable clients with:
-
Tennis elbow
-
Tendinitis and tendinopathy
-
Plantar fasciitis
-
Frozen shoulder
-
Achilles tendon concerns
-
Shoulder impingement
-
Rotator-cuff concerns
-
Suitable wrist and hand conditions
-
Knee and ankle concerns
-
Lumbar and hip discomfort
-
Chronic musculoskeletal concerns
-
Post-injury soft-tissue rehabilitation
Treatment suitability, diagnosis, parameters, and expected outcomes must be determined by an appropriately qualified professional.
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s medical history, current symptoms, diagnosis where applicable, medications, previous procedures, treatment goals, and possible contraindications.
Step 2: Treatment Mode Selection
Select the appropriate ED, anti-cellulite, or physiotherapy interface. Choose the electromagnetic or pneumatic handpiece according to the application.
Step 3: Tip and Parameter Selection
Install the appropriate treatment head and select the required energy or pressure, frequency, preload, and number of impacts.
Step 4: Shockwave Treatment
Apply suitable coupling medium when required and position the treatment head over the professionally identified area. Deliver the selected number of impacts while monitoring client response.
Step 5: Treatment Completion
Stop the program, remove the treatment medium, inspect the area, document the settings and impact count, and provide appropriate post-treatment recommendations.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Dual Wave C combines two shockwave technologies, specialized interfaces, and extensive treatment-head options in one clinical platform.
Key advantages include:
-
Electromagnetic and pneumatic technologies
-
Two independent professional handpieces
-
Seven electromagnetic treatment heads
-
Twelve pneumatic treatment heads
-
Nineteen treatment tips in total
-
Three dedicated treatment interfaces
-
Adjustable electromagnetic energy and frequency
-
Adjustable pneumatic pressure and frequency
-
Six preload settings
-
10.4-inch color touchscreen
-
Treatment-area mapping
-
Integrated impact counter
-
Built-in handpiece cooling
-
Rear-mounted storage tank
-
500W power consumption
-
110V and 220V compatibility
-
CE and ISO certificates
-
Three-year parts warranty
-
Professional training and lifetime support
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty Dual Wave C |
| Model | ESWT-DOUBLE-C |
| Technology | Electromagnetic and pneumatic ballistic shockwave |
| Input Voltage | AC 110V or 220V |
| Power Consumption | 500W |
| Display | 10.4-inch color touchscreen |
| Treatment Handpieces | Two: electromagnetic and pneumatic |
| Treatment Modes | ED, anti-cellulite, and physiotherapy |
| Electromagnetic Frequency | 1–16Hz |
| Electromagnetic Energy | 5–200mJ |
| Electromagnetic Heads | Seven, including two ED-specific heads |
| Pneumatic Frequency | 1–21Hz |
| Pneumatic Pressure | 1–6 Bar |
| Pneumatic Heads | Twelve |
| Pneumatic Head Types | Focus, radial, and flat |
| Pneumatic Head Diameters | 6–25mm |
| Total Treatment Tips | Nineteen |
| Preload Settings | Six |
| Special Features | Cooling system, storage tank, and impact counter |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
| Warranty | Three-year parts warranty |
| Support | Professional training and lifetime technical support |
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty Dual Wave C main unit
-
1 × Electromagnetic shockwave handpiece
-
1 × Pneumatic ballistic shockwave handpiece
-
7 × Electromagnetic treatment heads
-
12 × Pneumatic treatment heads
-
19 × Total treatment tips
-
1 × Integrated 10.4-inch touchscreen
-
Built-in handpiece cooling system
-
Rear-mounted storage tank
-
Impact-counting system
-
Region-compatible power cable
-
Standard machine accessories
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Installation and operating guide
-
Safety and maintenance instructions
-
Dual-technology operation training
-
Electromagnetic parameter guidance
-
Pneumatic parameter guidance
-
Treatment-head selection guidance
-
ED protocol training
-
Anti-cellulite protocol training
-
Physiotherapy protocol training
-
Client-screening documentation
-
Professional training certificate
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Dual Wave C system includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use both technologies safely and consistently.
Training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen and interface operation
-
Client consultation and screening
-
Electromagnetic handpiece operation
-
Pneumatic handpiece operation
-
Treatment-head selection
-
Energy, pressure, and frequency adjustment
-
Preload and impact-count settings
-
ED treatment interface
-
Anti-cellulite treatment interface
-
Physiotherapy treatment interface
-
Equipment cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Dual Wave C includes a three-year professional parts warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period.
Treatment heads, projectiles, sealing components, and other parts subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement.
Technical Support Process
-
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team.
-
Provide the machine model and order information.
-
Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested.
-
A technician will assess the reported issue remotely.
-
Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged.
-
Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable components, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual.
Safety and Contraindications
A detailed medical consultation, professional assessment, and informed consent should be completed before treatment. The Dual Wave C should only be operated by appropriately qualified professionals within their permitted scope of practice.
Treatment may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Active thrombosis or blood clots
-
Anticoagulant therapy without appropriate medical clearance
-
Malignant tumors or known cancer in the treatment area
-
Active skin infection
-
Open wounds within the treatment area
-
Severely impaired sensation
-
Active growth plates in children
-
Recent surgery within the treatment area
-
Metal implants requiring medical clearance
-
Serious medical conditions requiring physician supervision
Additional considerations for ED treatments include:
-
Active infection or inflammation
-
Penile implants or prostheses
-
Unexplained pain, lesions, or bleeding
-
Conditions requiring specialist medical assessment
Client eligibility, treatment parameters, and medical clearance must be determined according to the application and applicable professional requirements.
Operating Precautions
-
Inspect the machine, handpieces, cables, and heads before treatment.
-
Select the correct handpiece and treatment head.
-
Begin with conservative settings.
-
Increase energy or pressure progressively according to response.
-
Use appropriate coupling medium where required.
-
Monitor client comfort throughout the session.
-
Do not treat prohibited anatomical areas.
-
Record treatment settings and impact counts.
-
Clean and disinfect reusable components after treatment.
-
Follow the supplied maintenance schedule.
-
Stop treatment if unexpected or severe discomfort occurs.
Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty Dual Wave C is intended for appropriately qualified and trained operators working in:
-
Physiotherapy clinics
-
Rehabilitation centers
-
Sports-medicine facilities
-
Musculoskeletal treatment practices
-
Men’s wellness clinics
-
Medical spas
-
Body-contouring clinics
-
Integrated wellness centers
-
Qualified medical and allied-health practices
Practitioners must review local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering shockwave treatments.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty Dual Wave C?
Two Shockwave Technologies
The system combines focused electromagnetic energy and radial pneumatic pressure waves, supporting precise and broad-area applications on one platform.
Nineteen Treatment Tips
Seven electromagnetic heads and twelve pneumatic heads provide extensive treatment flexibility for different anatomical areas and professional protocols.
Three Dedicated Interfaces
Separate ED, anti-cellulite, and physiotherapy modes streamline parameter selection, body-area mapping, impact counting, and treatment documentation.
Customizable Professional Settings
Adjustable energy, pressure, frequency, preload, and impact settings allow professionals to personalize each session.
Complete Professional Support
The package includes dual-technology training, protocol guidance, technical assistance, CE and ISO certificates, and a three-year parts warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Dual Wave C?
The Dual Wave C is a professional ESWT system that combines electromagnetic and pneumatic ballistic shockwave technologies on one platform.
What is the difference between the two handpieces?
The electromagnetic handpiece generates focused acoustic energy for precise treatment areas. The pneumatic handpiece creates radial pressure waves for broader soft-tissue areas.
How many treatment tips are included?
The system includes 19 tips: seven electromagnetic heads and twelve pneumatic heads.
Which treatment modes are available?
The touchscreen provides three dedicated interfaces for ED treatments, anti-cellulite programs, and physiotherapy applications.
What settings are available for the electromagnetic handpiece?
The electromagnetic handpiece provides an energy range of 5–200mJ and a frequency range of 1–16Hz.
What settings are available for the pneumatic handpiece?
The pneumatic handpiece provides a pressure range of 1–6 Bar and a frequency range of 1–21Hz.
Which areas can be treated?
Supported areas include the shoulder, elbow, wrist, lumbar area, hip, knee, foot, ankle, abdomen, waist, buttocks, thighs, legs, and suitable intimate wellness treatment zones.
Can the machine support ED treatment protocols?
Yes. It includes a dedicated ED interface and two specialized electromagnetic heads. This application should only be provided by appropriately qualified professionals following screening and applicable local requirements.
Can it be used for cellulite treatments?
Yes. The pneumatic handpiece and dedicated anti-cellulite interface support body-mapped cellulite and skin-texture programs.
Is treatment uncomfortable?
Client experience varies by treatment area, condition, energy level, and individual sensitivity. Intensity can be adjusted during treatment to maintain appropriate tolerance.
How many sessions are recommended?
The number and frequency of sessions depend on the application, client condition, professional assessment, and selected protocol. Treatment plans should be personalized rather than guaranteed.
Can both handpieces operate simultaneously?
The supplied configuration includes two independent handpieces and supports dual-handpiece operation. Actual use should follow the operating manual and selected professional protocol.
What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates.
What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year parts warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues.
Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers both shockwave technologies, the three treatment interfaces, treatment-head selection, parameter adjustment, client screening, safety, maintenance, and troubleshooting.
Add Dual-Technology Shockwave Therapy to Your Practice
The Wikbeauty Dual Wave C enables qualified clinics and wellness facilities to provide electromagnetic and pneumatic shockwave treatments using one professional platform.
Five key benefits:
-
Electromagnetic and pneumatic shockwave technologies
-
Nineteen treatment tips for precise and broad applications
-
Dedicated ED, anti-cellulite, and physiotherapy interfaces
-
Adjustable energy, pressure, frequency, and impact settings
-
CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, package details, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Receives in 8 days.
$2,900.00
Professional Compact Dual-Technology Shockwave System
Electromagnetic and Pneumatic Shockwave Therapy in a Portable Flight-Case Design
The Wikbeauty Dual Wave Mini is a professional extracorporeal shockwave therapy system that combines electromagnetic and pneumatic ballistic shockwave technologies on one compact platform.
The electromagnetic handpiece delivers focused acoustic energy for precise treatment areas, while the pneumatic handpiece produces radial pressure waves for broader soft-tissue and body applications. Practitioners can select the appropriate modality according to the treatment area and professional protocol.
With two treatment handpieces, 18 interchangeable treatment tips, three dedicated interfaces, a 10.4-inch touchscreen, and a compact flight-case design, the Dual Wave Mini is suitable for clinics that require multi-application performance without a large equipment footprint.
Two shockwave technologies | 18 treatment tips | Three dedicated modes | Compact flight case | Three-year warranty
Two Professional Shockwave Technologies on One Platform
Electromagnetic Shockwave Technology
The electromagnetic handpiece uses a precision magnetic-coil mechanism to generate focused acoustic energy. Its concentrated delivery supports treatments requiring accurate energy placement within a selected area.
Common applications include:
-
Focused musculoskeletal treatments
-
Tendon and soft-tissue programs
-
Sports-injury rehabilitation
-
Localized physiotherapy applications
-
Erectile-function treatment protocols
-
Targeted recovery programs
Pneumatic Ballistic Shockwave Technology
The pneumatic handpiece uses compressed air to accelerate an internal projectile. The projectile strikes the selected treatment tip, creating radial pressure waves that disperse across a broader tissue area.
Common applications include:
-
Cellulite treatments
-
Body-contouring programs
-
Broad soft-tissue areas
-
Physiotherapy treatments
-
Sports-recovery programs
-
Musculoskeletal rehabilitation
Integrated Dual-Technology Operation
The two handpieces can be selected directly from the system, allowing practitioners to switch between electromagnetic and pneumatic treatments according to the application.
This integrated configuration supports:
-
Focused and radial treatment options
-
Multiple professional applications
-
Customizable treatment protocols
-
Efficient service transitions
-
Reduced equipment requirements
-
Flexible clinical workflows
Select the Right Treatment Mode for Each Client
Erectile-Function Treatment Mode
The dedicated ED interface includes five mapped treatment zones, impact counting, preload selection, and switching between electromagnetic and pneumatic delivery.
Recommended applications:
-
Professional erectile-function protocols
-
Vascular-support treatment programs
-
Targeted acoustic-wave applications
-
Structured multi-session treatments
Recommended for:
-
Appropriately screened adult male clients
-
Men’s wellness clinics
-
Qualified professionals offering ED protocols
This application should only be provided within the practitioner’s permitted professional scope and according to applicable local requirements.
Anti-Cellulite Treatment Mode
The anti-cellulite interface provides body-area mapping and customizable parameters for different treatment zones.
Recommended applications:
-
Cellulite appearance treatments
-
Body-texture improvement
-
Localized body-contouring programs
-
Soft-tissue stimulation
-
Skin-firming support
Recommended for:
-
Clients concerned about visible cellulite
-
Clients seeking non-invasive body treatments
-
Clinics offering structured body-care programs
Physiotherapy Treatment Mode
The physiotherapy interface supports treatment planning for key musculoskeletal regions and provides adjustable shockwave parameters.
Recommended applications:
-
Tendon and soft-tissue treatments
-
Shoulder, elbow, wrist, and hand programs
-
Hip, knee, foot, and ankle treatments
-
Musculoskeletal rehabilitation
-
Localized pain-management support
Recommended for:
-
Physiotherapy clients
-
Rehabilitation clients
-
Clients with professionally assessed musculoskeletal concerns
Sports-Recovery Program
Practitioners can select focused electromagnetic energy or radial pneumatic pressure waves according to the location, depth, and size of the treatment area.
Recommended applications:
-
Tendon overuse conditions
-
Muscle and soft-tissue recovery
-
Post-injury rehabilitation
-
Shoulder, knee, and ankle programs
Recommended for:
-
Athletes
-
Active adults
-
Fitness and rehabilitation clients
-
Sports-recovery facilities
Electromagnetic Energy and Frequency Control
The electromagnetic handpiece provides adjustable focused-shockwave settings for precise professional applications.
| Setting | Available Range | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| Energy | 5–200mJ | Adjustable focused acoustic output |
| Frequency | 1–16Hz | Customizable pulse-delivery speed |
| Treatment Heads | Seven | Different focused applications |
| ED-Specific Heads | Two | Dedicated professional protocols |
| Preload Settings | Six | Customizable treatment response |
| Control Interface | 10.4-inch touchscreen | Parameter and protocol management |
Settings should be selected according to professional assessment, treatment objectives, client response, and the supplied protocols.
Pneumatic Pressure and Frequency Control
The pneumatic handpiece provides adjustable radial shockwave settings for broad and targeted treatment areas.
| Setting | Available Range | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| Pressure | 1–6 Bar | Adjustable radial-wave intensity |
| Frequency | 1–21Hz | Customizable impact-delivery speed |
| Treatment Heads | Eleven | Broad treatment versatility |
| Head Diameters | 6–25mm | Small and large treatment areas |
| Tip Replacement | Easy-change mechanism | Efficient treatment preparation |
| Mechanism | Compressed-air ballistic | Radial pressure-wave generation |
Eighteen Interchangeable Treatment Tips
The Dual Wave Mini includes seven electromagnetic heads and eleven pneumatic heads to support different treatment areas and protocols.
| Tip Group | Quantity | Primary Applications |
|---|---|---|
| Electromagnetic Heads | Seven | Precise and focused treatment areas |
| ED-Specific Heads | Two of the seven electromagnetic heads | Professional erectile-function protocols |
| Pneumatic Heads | Eleven | Radial and broad soft-tissue treatments |
| Pneumatic Tip Diameters | 6mm, 10mm, 15mm, 20mm, and 25mm | Different anatomical areas |
| Total Treatment Tips | Eighteen | Multi-application treatment coverage |
The correct treatment tip should be selected according to its intended function, treatment location, client condition, and professional protocol.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Upper-Body Areas
The available electromagnetic and pneumatic heads support multiple upper-body physiotherapy and recovery programs.
Common treatment areas include:
-
Shoulder
-
Elbow
-
Hand and wrist
-
Upper back
-
Suitable arm muscles and tendons
Lower-Body Areas
The handpiece, treatment tip, and parameters can be selected according to the size and location of the target area.
Common treatment areas include:
-
Hip
-
Knee
-
Thigh
-
Achilles tendon
-
Foot and ankle
-
Plantar area
Body and Intimate Wellness Areas
Dedicated interfaces and specialized treatment heads support professionally administered body and intimate wellness programs.
Common treatment areas include:
-
Abdomen
-
Waist
-
Buttocks
-
Inner and outer thighs
-
Legs
-
Suitable ED treatment zones
Professional Treatment Applications
| Treatment Category | Common Applications | Recommended Technology |
|---|---|---|
| Erectile-Function Programs | Professionally assessed acoustic-wave protocols | Electromagnetic or protocol-selected mode |
| Cellulite Treatments | Cellulite appearance and body texture | Pneumatic radial |
| Physiotherapy | Musculoskeletal and soft-tissue treatments | Electromagnetic or pneumatic |
| Sports Recovery | Muscle, tendon, and activity-related rehabilitation | Protocol-dependent |
| Musculoskeletal Rehabilitation | Functional recovery and localized discomfort | Focused or radial shockwave |
| Body Contouring | Abdomen, waist, thighs, buttocks, and legs | Pneumatic radial |
Common Musculoskeletal Applications
The Dual Wave Mini may be incorporated into professional treatment plans for suitable clients with:
-
Tennis elbow
-
Tendinitis and tendinopathy
-
Plantar fasciitis
-
Frozen shoulder
-
Achilles tendon concerns
-
Ankle, knee, shoulder, and wrist concerns
-
Chronic musculoskeletal conditions
-
Post-injury soft-tissue rehabilitation
-
Professionally assessed tendon and ligament concerns
Diagnosis, client suitability, treatment settings, and expected outcomes should be determined by an appropriately qualified professional.
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s medical history, symptoms, diagnosis where applicable, medications, previous procedures, treatment objectives, and possible contraindications.
Step 2: Treatment Mode Selection
Select the ED, anti-cellulite, or physiotherapy interface. Choose the electromagnetic or pneumatic handpiece according to the application.
Step 3: Tip and Parameter Selection
Install the appropriate treatment tip and select the required energy or pressure, frequency, preload, delivery mode, and number of impacts.
Step 4: Shockwave Treatment
Apply suitable coupling medium when required and position the treatment head over the professionally identified area. Deliver the selected number of impacts while monitoring client response.
Step 5: Treatment Completion
Stop the program, remove the treatment medium, inspect the area, document the selected settings and impact count, and provide appropriate post-treatment guidance.
Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Dual Wave Mini combines dual-technology performance with a portable, space-efficient flight-case design.
Key advantages include:
-
Electromagnetic and pneumatic shockwave technologies
-
Two selectable professional handpieces
-
Seven electromagnetic treatment heads
-
Eleven pneumatic treatment heads
-
Eighteen treatment tips in total
-
Three dedicated treatment interfaces
-
Adjustable electromagnetic energy and frequency
-
Adjustable pneumatic pressure and frequency
-
Two delivery modes
-
Six customizable preload settings
-
10.4-inch touchscreen
-
Treatment-area mapping
-
Impact-counting function
-
Reinforced treatment-tip construction
-
Easy pneumatic projectile replacement
-
Rear-mounted storage tank
-
Compact flight-case design
-
110V and 220V compatibility
-
Three-year professional warranty
-
Professional training and ongoing support
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty Dual Wave Mini |
| Model | Dual Wave Mini |
| Technology | Electromagnetic and pneumatic ballistic shockwave |
| Input Voltage | AC 110V or 220V |
| Power Consumption | 300W |
| Display | 10.4-inch touchscreen |
| Treatment Handpieces | Two: electromagnetic and pneumatic |
| Treatment Modes | ED, anti-cellulite, and physiotherapy |
| Electromagnetic Frequency | 1–16Hz |
| Electromagnetic Energy | 5–200mJ |
| Electromagnetic Heads | Seven, including two ED-specific heads |
| Pneumatic Frequency | 1–21Hz |
| Pneumatic Pressure | 1–6 Bar |
| Pneumatic Heads | Eleven |
| Pneumatic Tip Diameters | 6mm, 10mm, 15mm, 20mm, and 25mm |
| Total Treatment Tips | Eighteen |
| Delivery Modes | Two |
| Preload Settings | Six |
| Special Features | Treatment mapping, impact tracking, storage tank, and easy projectile replacement |
| Packing Size | 48 × 58 × 50cm |
| Weight | 35kg |
| Design | Compact portable flight case |
| Warranty | Three-year professional warranty |
| Support | Professional training and ongoing technical assistance |
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty Dual Wave Mini main unit
-
1 × Electromagnetic shockwave handpiece
-
1 × Pneumatic ballistic shockwave handpiece
-
7 × Electromagnetic treatment heads
-
11 × Pneumatic treatment heads
-
18 × Total treatment tips
-
1 × Integrated 10.4-inch touchscreen
-
Three dedicated treatment interfaces
-
Two treatment-delivery modes
-
Six preload settings
-
Real-time impact counter
-
Rear-mounted storage tank
-
Compact flight case
-
Region-compatible power cable
-
Standard machine accessories
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Installation and operating guide
-
Safety and maintenance instructions
-
Dual-technology operation training
-
Electromagnetic parameter guidance
-
Pneumatic parameter guidance
-
Treatment-tip selection guidance
-
ED protocol training
-
Anti-cellulite protocol training
-
Physiotherapy protocol training
-
Client-screening documentation
-
Professional training certificate
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Dual Wave Mini includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use both shockwave technologies safely and consistently.
Training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
Touchscreen and interface operation
-
Client consultation and screening
-
Electromagnetic handpiece operation
-
Pneumatic handpiece operation
-
Treatment-tip selection
-
Energy, pressure, and frequency adjustment
-
Preload and impact-count settings
-
ED treatment interface
-
Anti-cellulite treatment interface
-
Physiotherapy treatment interface
-
Equipment cleaning and routine maintenance
-
Pneumatic projectile replacement
-
Basic troubleshooting
Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Dual Wave Mini includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period.
Treatment heads, projectiles, seals, and other components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement.
Technical Support Process
-
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team.
-
Provide the machine model and order information.
-
Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested.
-
A technician will assess the reported issue remotely.
-
Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged.
-
Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable components, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual.
Safety and Contraindications
A detailed medical consultation, professional assessment, and informed consent should be completed before treatment. The Dual Wave Mini should only be operated by appropriately qualified professionals within their permitted scope of practice.
Treatment may not be suitable for clients with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Active thrombosis or blood clots
-
Anticoagulant therapy without appropriate medical clearance
-
Malignant tumors or known cancer in the treatment area
-
Active skin infection
-
Open wounds within the treatment area
-
Severely impaired sensation
-
Active growth plates in children
-
Recent surgery within the treatment area
-
Metal implants requiring medical clearance
-
Serious medical conditions requiring physician supervision
Additional considerations for ED treatments include:
-
Active infection or inflammation
-
Penile implants or prostheses
-
Unexplained pain, lesions, or bleeding
-
Conditions requiring specialist medical assessment
Client eligibility, diagnosis, treatment parameters, and medical clearance must be determined according to the application and applicable professional requirements.
Operating Precautions
-
Inspect the machine, handpieces, cables, and treatment tips before use.
-
Select the correct modality and treatment tip.
-
Begin with conservative treatment settings.
-
Increase energy or pressure progressively according to client response.
-
Use suitable coupling medium where required.
-
Monitor client comfort throughout the treatment.
-
Do not treat prohibited anatomical areas.
-
Record treatment settings and impact counts.
-
Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client.
-
Replace worn projectiles and components as directed.
-
Follow the supplied maintenance schedule.
-
Stop treatment if unexpected or severe discomfort occurs.
Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty Dual Wave Mini is intended for appropriately qualified and trained operators working in:
-
Physiotherapy clinics
-
Rehabilitation centers
-
Sports-medicine facilities
-
Musculoskeletal treatment practices
-
Men’s wellness clinics
-
Medical spas
-
Body-contouring clinics
-
Integrated wellness centers
-
Mobile or multi-location professional practices
Practitioners must review local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before providing shockwave treatments.
OEM and ODM Customization
Wikbeauty provides OEM and ODM services for professional distributors, clinics, and equipment brands.
Available customization may include:
-
Technology configuration
-
External case design
-
Machine color customization
-
Logo placement
-
Interface customization
-
Packaging design
-
Product documentation
-
Distributor branding
Final customization options, minimum quantities, production time, and pricing should be confirmed with the Wikbeauty sales team.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty Dual Wave Mini?
Two Shockwave Technologies
The system combines focused electromagnetic energy and radial pneumatic pressure waves for precise and broad-area applications.
Eighteen Treatment Tips
Seven electromagnetic heads and eleven pneumatic heads provide extensive treatment flexibility across different anatomical regions.
Three Dedicated Interfaces
Separate ED, anti-cellulite, and physiotherapy modes simplify parameter selection, body mapping, and treatment tracking.
Compact Flight-Case Design
The 48 × 58 × 50cm flight-case configuration is suitable for smaller treatment rooms, second treatment rooms, storage, transport, and multi-location practices.
Complete Professional Support
The package includes dual-technology training, protocol guidance, OEM and ODM options, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Dual Wave Mini?
The Dual Wave Mini is a compact professional ESWT system that combines electromagnetic and pneumatic ballistic shockwave technologies on one platform.
How does it differ from the Dual Wave C?
The Dual Wave Mini provides the same two shockwave modalities in a smaller flight-case design. It includes 18 treatment tips, operates at 300W, weighs 35kg, and has a packing size of 48 × 58 × 50cm.
What is the difference between the two handpieces?
The electromagnetic handpiece generates focused acoustic energy for precise treatment areas. The pneumatic handpiece creates radial pressure waves for broader soft-tissue and body applications.
How many treatment tips are included?
The system includes 18 tips: seven electromagnetic heads and eleven pneumatic heads.
What settings are available for the electromagnetic handpiece?
The electromagnetic handpiece provides energy from 5 to 200mJ and frequency from 1 to 16Hz.
What settings are available for the pneumatic handpiece?
The pneumatic handpiece provides pressure from 1 to 6 Bar and frequency from 1 to 21Hz.
Which treatment modes are available?
The system includes dedicated interfaces for ED treatments, anti-cellulite programs, and physiotherapy applications.
Can the machine support ED treatment protocols?
Yes. It includes a dedicated ED interface and two specialized electromagnetic heads. Treatment should only be provided by appropriately qualified professionals following screening and applicable local requirements.
Can it be used for cellulite treatments?
Yes. The pneumatic handpiece and anti-cellulite interface support body-mapped cellulite and skin-texture programs.
Is treatment uncomfortable?
Client experience varies according to the treatment area, condition, selected settings, and individual sensitivity. Parameters can be adjusted during treatment to maintain suitable tolerance.
How many sessions are recommended?
Session number and frequency depend on the application, client condition, professional assessment, and selected protocol. Treatment outcomes and course length should not be guaranteed.
Is the system suitable for mobile practitioners?
Its compact flight-case design makes it more portable than a full-size floor-standing system. Safe transport, equipment protection, and suitable treatment-room conditions remain essential.
Does Wikbeauty provide OEM and ODM services?
Yes. Available services include equipment configuration, case design, logo customization, interface options, and packaging customization.
What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues.
Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers both technologies, treatment-tip selection, parameter adjustment, the three treatment interfaces, client screening, safety, cleaning, maintenance, and troubleshooting.
Add Compact Dual-Technology Shockwave Therapy to Your Practice
The Wikbeauty Dual Wave Mini enables qualified clinics and mobile practitioners to offer electromagnetic and pneumatic shockwave treatments using one compact professional platform.
Five key benefits:
-
Focused electromagnetic and radial pneumatic technologies
-
Eighteen treatment tips for precise and broad applications
-
Dedicated ED, anti-cellulite, and physiotherapy interfaces
-
Portable flight-case design with a design with a 10.4-inch touchscreen
-
Professional training, OEM and ODM services, and a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, customization options, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Receives in 8 days.
From $2,699.00
Professional EMS Muscle-Toning and Body-Contouring System
Non-Invasive Electrical Muscle Stimulation for Targeted Body Sculpting
The Wikbeauty EMS Sculpting Machine is a professional body-contouring system designed to support muscle conditioning, body toning, and improved definition across multiple treatment areas.
Electrical Muscle Stimulation technology delivers controlled electrical impulses to targeted muscles, producing repeated involuntary contractions. These contractions help activate muscle fibers and support structured muscle-toning programs without conventional weight training during treatment.
With multiple treatment applicators, adjustable intensity levels, a clear LCD interface, and portable construction, the system can be used for the abdomen, buttocks, thighs, arms, and calves.
EMS muscle stimulation | Multiple applicators | Adjustable intensity | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Functions on One Platform
Electrical Muscle Stimulation
EMS technology sends controlled electrical impulses through the treatment applicators and into targeted muscles. These impulses generate repeated involuntary contractions throughout the selected program.
Common applications include:
-
Abdominal muscle conditioning
-
Buttock toning
-
Thigh muscle stimulation
-
Upper-arm definition
-
Calf muscle conditioning
-
General body-toning programs
Targeted Body Contouring
Applicators can be positioned over specific muscle groups, enabling practitioners to create personalized treatments according to the client’s body-contouring objectives.
Common applications include:
-
Waistline definition
-
Abdominal contouring
-
Buttock shaping
-
Inner- and outer-thigh toning
-
Upper-arm contouring
-
Lower-leg definition
Adjustable Muscle-Conditioning Programs
Intensity can be adjusted from Level 1 to Level 10 according to the selected area and client comfort. This enables practitioners to begin at a lower setting and increase the stimulation progressively.
Common benefits include:
-
Personalized treatment intensity
-
Progressive muscle activation
-
Different settings for different body areas
-
Improved client comfort
-
Structured multi-session programs
Select the Right Program for Each Client
Muscle-Conditioning Program
Designed to focus on repeated muscle activation and improved muscle tone in a selected area.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdominal muscle conditioning
-
Buttock toning
-
Arm muscle stimulation
-
Thigh and calf conditioning
Recommended for:
-
Clients seeking improved muscle definition
-
Clients supplementing regular fitness activities
-
Clients interested in assisted muscle stimulation
Body-Contouring Program
Focuses on improving the appearance and definition of selected body areas through targeted EMS treatments.
Recommended applications:
-
Waistline contouring
-
Buttock shaping
-
Inner-thigh toning
-
Outer-thigh contouring
-
Upper-arm definition
Recommended for:
-
Clients concerned about reduced muscle tone
-
Clients seeking a firmer-looking silhouette
-
Clients following an active and balanced lifestyle
Multi-Area Sculpting Program
Allows practitioners to create a structured plan covering several body areas over a series of sessions.
Recommended applications:
-
Abdomen and buttocks
-
Abdomen and thighs
-
Arms and abdomen
-
Thighs and calves
-
Complete body-toning packages
Recommended for:
-
Clients with several treatment objectives
-
Clients seeking comprehensive body conditioning
-
Professional clinics offering treatment packages
Maintenance Program
Designed to help clients continue their muscle-conditioning routine after completing an initial treatment course.
Recommended applications:
-
Muscle-tone maintenance
-
Body-contour maintenance
-
Seasonal body-shaping programs
-
Continued fitness and wellness support
Recommended for:
-
Returning EMS clients
-
Clients who have completed six to eight sessions
-
Clients combining treatment with regular exercise
Adjustable Intensity and Treatment Settings
The EMS Sculpting Machine allows treatment intensity to be customized according to the body area, selected protocol, and client comfort.
| Setting | Available Configuration | Professional Purpose |
|---|---|---|
| Intensity Levels | 1–10 | Progressive, comfort-based muscle stimulation |
| Stimulation Frequency | Adjustable | Customizable treatment protocols |
| Treatment Applicators | Multiple | Treatments for different muscle groups |
| Session Duration | Approximately 30 minutes | Efficient professional or personal use |
| Recommended Course | Six to eight sessions | Structured muscle-conditioning program |
| Treatment Frequency | Commonly twice weekly | Progressive treatment planning |
| Control System | LCD interface | Simple setting and program management |
Treatment settings should always be selected according to user suitability, individual tolerance, and the supplied operating instructions.
Adjustable Treatment Areas
Abdomen and Waist
The applicators can be positioned over the abdominal muscles to support muscle conditioning and midsection definition.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Abdominal muscle stimulation
-
Core-area conditioning
-
Waistline definition
-
Improved abdominal tone
Buttocks and Thighs
Treatments can be customized for the buttocks, inner thighs, outer thighs, and other suitable areas of the legs.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Buttock toning and shaping
-
Inner-thigh muscle conditioning
-
Outer-thigh contouring
-
Lower-body definition
Arms and Calves
The system can also support targeted muscle stimulation for smaller treatment areas.
Common treatment objectives include:
-
Biceps stimulation
-
Triceps conditioning
-
Upper-arm definition
-
Calf muscle toning
Professional Body-Sculpting Applications
| Treatment Area | Primary Objective | Suitable Program |
|---|---|---|
| Abdomen | Muscle conditioning and midsection definition | Muscle-conditioning program |
| Waist | Improve the appearance of body contours | Body-contouring program |
| Buttocks | Toning and shape enhancement | Muscle or multi-area program |
| Inner Thighs | Muscle conditioning and leg definition | Body-contouring program |
| Outer Thighs | Hip and thigh contouring | Multi-area program |
| Upper Arms | Biceps and triceps stimulation | Muscle-conditioning program |
| Calves | Lower-leg muscle conditioning | Muscle-conditioning program |
How a Professional Session Works
Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, treatment goals, target areas, and possible contraindications. Explain the expected muscle-contraction sensation and establish realistic treatment objectives.
Step 2: Applicator Placement
Choose the appropriate applicators and position them securely over the selected muscle groups. Ensure correct skin contact and avoid prohibited treatment areas.
Step 3: Personalized Settings
Select the appropriate stimulation frequency, intensity, and session duration. Begin at a low intensity and increase it progressively according to the client’s comfort and muscle response.
Step 4: EMS Treatment
The system delivers controlled electrical impulses for approximately 30 minutes. The client experiences repeated muscle contractions within the selected treatment area.
Step 5: Treatment Completion
The system completes the selected program, and the applicators are removed. Inspect the treatment area and provide any appropriate post-treatment recommendations.
Designed for Professional and Personal Treatment Environments
The EMS Sculpting Machine combines customizable body-toning functions with straightforward operation and portable construction.
Key advantages include:
-
Professional Electrical Muscle Stimulation technology
-
Multiple body-treatment applicators
-
Adjustable stimulation frequency
-
Ten adjustable intensity levels
-
Treatments for five or more body areas
-
Clear LCD control interface
-
Automatic shut-off
-
Skin-contact sensors
-
Overload protection
-
Lightweight, portable construction
-
110V and 220V compatibility
-
CE and ISO certificates
-
Three-year parts warranty
-
Customer training and technical support
Technical Specifications
| Specification | Details |
|---|---|
| Product Name | Wikbeauty EMS Sculpting Machine |
| Technology | Electrical Muscle Stimulation |
| Stimulation Frequency | Adjustable |
| Intensity Levels | Levels 1–10 |
| Treatment Applicators | Multiple applicators for different body areas |
| Session Duration | Approximately 30 minutes |
| Recommended Course | Six to eight sessions |
| Recommended Frequency | Commonly two sessions per week |
| Treatment Areas | Abdomen, buttocks, thighs, arms, and calves |
| Display | Clear LCD control interface |
| Safety Features | Automatic shut-off, skin-contact sensors, and overload protection |
| Power Input | AC 110V or 220V |
| Design | Lightweight and portable |
| Suitable Environments | Salons, wellness centers, fitness facilities, and home use |
| Certificates | CE and ISO certificates |
| Warranty | Three-year parts warranty |
| Support | Customer training and technical assistance |
What Is Included?
Standard Equipment
-
1 × Wikbeauty EMS Sculpting Machine
-
Multiple EMS treatment applicators
-
Applicator connection cables
-
Adjustable intensity controls
-
Integrated LCD control interface
-
Standard machine accessories
-
1 × Region-compatible power cable
The final number and configuration of treatment applicators should follow the selected product package.
Documentation and Training
-
English user manual
-
Installation and operating guide
-
Safety instructions
-
Professional video training
-
Applicator-placement guidance
-
Muscle-conditioning protocols
-
Body-contouring protocol guidance
-
Client consultation materials
-
Cleaning and maintenance guidance
-
Professional training certificate
Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every EMS Sculpting Machine includes operating guidance to help professionals and approved users operate the system correctly.
Training covers:
-
Machine installation and setup
-
LCD interface operation
-
Client consultation and screening
-
Treatment-area selection
-
Correct applicator placement
-
Stimulation-frequency adjustment
-
Intensity-level selection
-
Muscle-conditioning protocols
-
Safety procedures and contraindications
-
Applicator cleaning and maintenance
-
Basic troubleshooting
Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp.
Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty EMS Sculpting Machine includes a three-year professional parts warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for your equipment.
Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period.
Consumable accessories and components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement.
Technical Support Process
-
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team.
-
Provide the machine model and order information.
-
Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested.
-
A technician will assess the reported issue remotely.
-
Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged.
-
Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed.
Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable accessories, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual.
Safety and Contraindications
A client consultation and health-history review should be completed before professional treatment. The machine must be operated according to the supplied instructions.
Treatment may not be suitable for users with:
-
Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy
-
Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices
-
Metal implants within the treatment area
-
Active skin infection
-
Open wounds within the treatment area
-
Recent surgery in the selected area
-
Serious cardiovascular conditions
-
Neurological conditions affecting sensation
-
Severe skin sensitivity
-
Medical conditions affected by electrical stimulation
Do not position applicators over the heart, head, front or side of the neck, spine, broken skin, or other prohibited areas identified in the operating manual.
Users with medical concerns should consult an appropriate healthcare professional before beginning treatment.
Operating Precautions
-
Begin every new treatment at a low intensity.
-
Increase the intensity gradually according to comfort.
-
Ensure correct applicator contact before activation.
-
Do not place applicators over prohibited body areas.
-
Inspect applicators and cables before every session.
-
Clean the applicators between professional clients.
-
Keep the machine in a clean, dry environment.
-
Stop treatment if unusual pain or discomfort occurs.
-
Follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions.
Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty EMS Sculpting Machine is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in:
-
Beauty salons
-
Body-contouring studios
-
Wellness centers
-
Fitness and recovery facilities
-
Professional spas
-
Home-based beauty businesses
-
Aesthetic treatment facilities
The machine may also be suitable for personal use when operated according to the supplied manual. Professional services must comply with applicable local licensing, insurance, and operating requirements.
Why Choose the Wikbeauty EMS Sculpting Machine?
Targeted Muscle Stimulation
EMS technology delivers controlled electrical impulses to selected muscle groups, supporting structured muscle-conditioning and toning programs.
Adjustable Intensity Levels
Ten intensity levels allow users to begin comfortably and increase muscle stimulation progressively according to individual tolerance.
Multiple Treatment Areas
One system can support treatments for the abdomen, buttocks, thighs, arms, and calves using suitable applicator placement.
Portable and Easy to Operate
The lightweight design, clear LCD interface, and straightforward controls make the system suitable for professional facilities and approved personal use.
Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating guidance, training, technical assistance, CE and ISO certificates, and a three-year parts warranty.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the EMS Sculpting Machine?
It is an Electrical Muscle Stimulation system that delivers controlled electrical impulses to targeted muscles for body-toning and muscle-conditioning programs.
How long does one session take?
A standard treatment session takes approximately 30 minutes, depending on the selected body area and treatment protocol.
Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the abdomen, buttocks, inner and outer thighs, biceps, triceps, and calves.
How many sessions are recommended?
The supplied protocol recommends six to eight sessions, commonly scheduled twice per week. The final course should be personalized according to individual suitability and objectives.
What does EMS treatment feel like?
Users typically experience repeated muscle contractions, tingling, or pulsing sensations. The intensity can be adjusted from Level 1 to Level 10 according to comfort.
Does the machine have adjustable intensity?
Yes. The system provides ten adjustable intensity levels and customizable stimulation-frequency settings.
Is the treatment invasive?
No. The system uses external applicators and does not require injections, incisions, or surgery.
Can EMS replace regular exercise?
EMS treatments should complement rather than replace regular physical activity, balanced nutrition, and healthy lifestyle habits.
Can the machine directly remove fat?
The primary function of the system is electrical muscle stimulation. Improved muscle tone may support a more defined appearance, but individual body-composition changes vary and should not be guaranteed.
Can it be used at home?
The supplied information indicates suitability for home use. Users must follow the operating manual, observe all contraindications, and begin at a low intensity.
Are results the same for every user?
No. Results vary according to the treatment area, selected intensity, number of sessions, muscle condition, lifestyle, and individual response.
What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates.
What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year parts warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues.
Is training included?
Yes. Machine operation, applicator placement, intensity adjustment, safety instructions, cleaning, maintenance, and technical support are included.
Add Professional EMS Body Sculpting to Your Business
The Wikbeauty EMS Sculpting Machine enables salons, wellness centers, fitness facilities, and body-contouring professionals to introduce customizable muscle-conditioning and body-toning services.
Five key benefits:
-
Targeted Electrical Muscle Stimulation technology
-
Multiple applicators for five or more body areas
-
Ten adjustable intensity levels
-
Portable design with a clear LCD interface
-
CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty
Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, package configuration, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Receives in 8 days.
Elevate Your Practice
Shop by Treatment
Explore professional-grade machines crafted for every aesthetic and wellness need.
Top Sellers You Can't Miss
From $2,599.00
Receives in 8 days.
From $2,599.00
Receives in 8 days.
$560.00
Receives in 8 days.
$2,169.00
Receives in 8 days.
From $499.00
Receives in 8 days.
$2,299.00
Receives in 8 days.
$3,999.00
Receives in 8 days.
Wait — here's $50 off your order
Looks like you left something behind. Complete your order now and take $50 off with code COMEBACK50 — no minimum purchase required.
- Choosing a selection results in a full page refresh.
- Opens in a new window.